Home

User`s Manual - tn incorporated ltd.

1. Type FRN__ _E1S 4U F50 002 003 Nominal applied motor HP 1 2 2 3 Rated capacity kVA 2 12 26 44 Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function oO Rated current A 4 15 25 6 85 ki Overload capability 150 of rated current for 1 min 200 0 5 s i Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Three phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz g Voltage frequency variations J Voltage 10 to 15 Voltage unbalance 2 or less Frequency 5 to 5 E M a with DCR 0 85 1 6 3 0 4 4 7 106 144 211 28 8 5 Rated current A 5f f 1 T 1 a without DOR 1 7 34 59 82 190 73 232 33 0 43 8 Required power supply capacity kVA 6 0 6 1 1 2 0 2 9 49 7 4 10 15 20 Torque 7 100 70 40 20 2 Torque 8 150 E DC braking Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Braking transistor Built in Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Weight Mass Ibs kg 2 4 1 1 26 12 37 17 37 17 51 23 75 34 7 9 3 6 13 5 6 1 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 460 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses
2. TAA ANN DLE 1 i L Programming mode 1 i L i BEng List of maintenance items Maintenance info i L 1 1 VIO S A lee 5CHE gt cn gt ng Cumulative zs r A fp Nm uem run time OTO oo le 289 Es bus voltage I I I i i I 1 b I I i 1 i 5 n gt EE Option s k REZAN H CU ROM version E 3 nmn Cumulative run E 7 time of the motor Mac y Figure 3 9 Menu Transition in Menu 5 Maintenance Information Basic key operation To view the maintenance information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the e key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the S and V keys to display Maintenance Information 5L HE 3 Press the eS key to proceed to a list of maintenance item codes e g 5_ 7 7 4 Use the 9 and V keys to display the desired maintenance item then press the eS key The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears 3 Press the eO key to return to a list of maintenance items Press the eS key again to return to the y y ag menu 3 26 LED Monitor shows 3 3 Programming Mode Table 3 18 Display Items for Maintenance Information Cumulative run time Description Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Unit t
3. Figure 1 22 Inverters Totally Controlled by POD Global standard compliance e Complies with standards EC Directives CE Mark UL Standard cUL Certified e Sink Source switchable i It C Uu LISTED e Wide voltage range e The multi function keypad displays multiple languages Japanese English German French Spanish Italian Chinese and Korean There are two types of multi function keypad 1 10 1 2 Control System 1 2 Control System This section gives you a general overview of inverter control systems and features specific to the FRENIC Multi series of inverters As shown in Figure 1 24 the converter section converts the input commercial power to DC power by means of a full wave rectifier which charges the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor The inverter portion modulates the electric energy charged in the DC link bus capacitor by Pulse Width Modulation PWM according to the control circuit signals and feeds the output to the motor The PWMed frequency is called the Carrier Frequency The voltage applied to the motor has a waveform modulated by the carrier frequency from the dynamic torque vector flux controller that estimates the optimal PWM signal monitoring the inverter output current feedback as shown on the left hand side PWM voltage waveform of Figure 1 23 The voltage consists of alternating cycles of positive and negative pulse trains synchronizing with the inverter s outp
4. Trip with alarm after running for the period specified by timer y13 Retry during the period specified by timer y13 If the retry fails trip with alarm If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run yia Timer ieee o eps px vy a yi4 Baud rate 0 2400 T 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps yt5 Data length 0 8 bits 1 7 bits yt6 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU TH 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU c 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU yl7 Stop bits 4 yi8 No response error detection time 9 yi9 Response interval e y20 Protocol selection Og m y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Frequency command Run command 9 93 05 Follow H30 data Follow H30 data 9 123 Via field bus option Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via field bus option Via field bus option Via field bus option y99 Loader Link Function Mode selection Frequency command Run command 9 123 Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader Via RS 485 link Loader Via RS 485 link Loader 9 13 9 2 Overview of Function Codes This section provides a detailed description of the function codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters In each code group its function codes are arranged in an ascending o
5. These function codes allow terminal FM to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage or pulse pulse duty approximately 50 The magnitude of such analog voltage or pulse rate is adjustable E Mode selection F29 F29 specifies the property of the output to terminal FM You need to set switch SW6 on the interface printed circuit board PCB Refer to the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring of the Inverter Position of slide switch SW6 Data for F29 Output form mounted on the interface PCB Voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA function Pulse 0 to 6000 p s FMP function E Voltage adjustment F30 dedicated to FMA F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage or current representing the monitored data selected by F31 within the range of 0 to 300 F30 200 F30 100 F30 50 Out of scale EREET n 2 Ud ee ipo ok itm br eae eae eae S 2 6 gt F F30 3396 9 8 5V Q Ss O UO m m T op o i i 2 0 50 100 200 300 Meter scale W Function F31 F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminal FM Data for F31 FM output Output frequency before slip compensation Function Monitor the following Output frequency of the inverter Equivalent to the motor synchronous speed Meter scale Full scale at 100 Maximum frequency F03 A01 Output frequency af
6. Data for F05 x 0 264 12 8 to 18 296 Data for F05 x 0 272 13 4 to 19 196 Data for F05 x 0 280 14 0 to 20 096 Data for F05 x 0 289 14 7 to 21 096 Data for F05 x 0 297 15 3 to 21 996 Data for F05 x 0 305 15 9 to 22 896 Data for F05 x 0 313 16 6 to 23 796 Data for F05 x 0 321 17 2 to 24 696 Data for F05 x 0 329 17 9 to 25 496 1 10 of base frequency Torque boost pattern of FRENIC Multi Output voltage Base voltage 100 H51 FO9 A05 With non linear V f pattern Without non linear V f pattern Base frequency H50 A 42 Base frequency Glossary This glossary explains the technical terms that are frequently used in this manual Glossary Acceleration time Period required when an inverter accelerates its output from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency Related function codes F03 F07 E10 and H54 Alarm mode One of the three operation modes supported by the inverter If the inverter detects any malfunction error or fault in its operation it immediately shuts down or trips the output to the motor and enters this mode in which corresponding alarm codes are displayed on the LED monitor Alarm output for any faults A mechanical contact output signal that is generated when the inverter is halted by an alarm by short circuiting between terminals 30A and 30C Related function code E27 See Alarm mod
7. Via field bus option H30 0 2 or 6 y98 2 y98 H30 1 3 or 7 2 H30 4 5 or 8 y98 2 H30 0 1 to 8 y98 3 For details refer to Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC and the RS 485 Communication User s Manual or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual When an LE terminal command Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus is assigned to a digital input terminal turning LE ON makes the settings of H30 and y98 effective When LE is OFF those settings are ineffective so that both frequency commands and run commands specified from the inverter itself take control Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor H42 displays the measured capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan H43 displays the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Startup Times of Motor 1 A46 Startup Times of Motor 2 H44 displays the startup times of motor 1 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Mock Alarm H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup Setting the H45 data to 1 displays mock alarm on the LED monitor and issues alarm output ALM to the digital output terminal specified see E20 E21 and E27 Accessing the H45 data requires simultaneous keying of 9 key J key After that the H45 data automatically reverts to 0 allo
8. When the auto torque boost F37 is enabled the non linear V f pattern takes no effect Examples E Normal linear V f pattern Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Output frequency Hz Base Maximum frequency 1 frequency 1 F04 F03 E V f pattern with two non linear points Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Non linear V f pattern 2 Voltage H53 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Output frequency Hz Non linear Non linear Base Maximum Vif pattern 1 V f pattern 2 frequency 1 frequency 1 Frequency Frequency F04 F03 H50 H52 c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo F07 Acceleration Time 1 E10 Acceleration Time 2 Deceleration Time 1 E11 Deceleration Time 2 F07 specifies the acceleration time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency F08 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz Acc time 1 F07 Dec time 1 F08 Maximum frequency F03 Starting Stop frequency frequency 1774 i TRT F25 F23 Actual Actual acc time dec time If you choose S curve acceleration deceleration or curvilinear acceleration deceleration in Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 the actual acceleration decelerat
9. 7 to any of the digital output terminals m Current detected and Current detected 2 signals ID and ID2 When the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 or E37 and it continues longer than the period specified by E35 or E38 the ZD or ID2 signal turns ON respectively When the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level the ZD or ID2 turns OFF Minimum width of the output signal 100 ms To utilize this feature you need to assign ZD data 37 or ID2 data 38 to any of digital output terminals T EE REM Mee aanntscnecnedese E34 E37 lt i i O xcu A a a aa ESAJESZ x09 d Oo Output Current z i i O i i O 1 1 E35 E38 i 02 9h ON ID ID2 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication E39 and E50 specify coefficients for determining the constant feeding rate time load shaft speed and line speed as well as for displaying the output status monitored Calculation expression Coefficient for speed indication E50 Constant feeding rate time min s Frequency x Coefficient for constant feeding rate time E39 Load shaft speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Line speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Where the frequency refers to the reference frequency to be applied for settings constant feeding rate time load shaft speed or line speed
10. 9 Chose Operation Status Monitor MO mers Systema mordor Alam monitor Meter dec The leit aloe code Data when alom occured f H Li ERE it Coenacting Seloctineerer No 1 ive z Gose VO eris Spstten morita Alm moree Meter Sagay Materi utput frequency before slip IP OCTET o Connecting Sojectioverier No 11 tit Ciso Oo m D D c NOLLVOINPININOO S8 SY HONOYHL ONINNNY 5 2 3 4 Test running The Test running feature allows you to test run the motor in Run forward or Run reverse while monitoring the running status of the selected inverter Select monitor item Setting frequency command Select what is to be displayed here from Enter or select the set frequency command to write it into the inverter output frequency current etc Click Apply to make it effective I O terminal status Shows status of the programmable I O terminals of the inverter Indicating za Test run Operation status Shows FWD REV STOP and Alarm codes Operation buttons mu pen Connecting lect inde Close Selecting monitor item Update the inverter info Switching frequency and run Select the operation status information to for the latest ones command sources be monitored real time Click the Refresh button to Select the frequency and run update running status
11. 9 112 Y Y Bit 0 PID output pole 9 115 0 addition 1 subtraction Bit P Select compensation of output ratio 7 speed command 1 ratio 0 TOS zd Current EE a a Disable Decelerate to stop Coast to a stop Hit mechanical stop Enable at constant speed and during deceleration Enable at constant speed Enable anytime 8999 5 A 71 Start point upper digits 2 Start point lower digits 2 I Preset point upper digits 2 Preset point lower digits 2 Creep speed SW point upper digits 2 Creep speed SW point lower digits 2 Creep speed 2 End point upper digits 2 End point lower digits 2 Positioning allowance Aore noo 9 Coasting compensation e a a End point command 2 Preset positioning requirement 2 Position detection direction 2 Overload Stop Function P Gain 2 Integral time 2 10 001 to 9 999 999 ot fs v v 99 50 0 to 150 0 o3 v v f 1000 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 These are available on inverters with
12. FVR E11S vs FRENIC Multi F Fundamental functions FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Data protection 0 Data change enable 1 Data protection Data protection Disable data protection and digital reference protection Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection Frequency command 1 0 Keypad operation UP DOWN keys Frequency command 1 UP DOWN keys on keypad 1 Voltage input Terminal 12 Frequency command 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 Analog Input adjustment for 12 Polarity Unipolar 2 Current input Terminal C1 Frequency command 1 Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 3 Voltage and current input Frequency command 1 Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function 4 Reversible operation with polarity Terminal 12 Frequency command 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 Analog Input adjustment for 12 Polarity Bipolar 5 Inverse mode operation with polarity Terminal 12 Frequency command 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 Selection of normal inverse operation Inverse operation 6 Inverse mode operation Terminal C1 Frequency command 1 Current input to terminal C1 C1 function Selection of normal inverse operation
13. Setting slide switches SW7 and SW8 on the interface printed circuit board interface PCB and data of function codes E59 and H26 characterizes the analog input terminal C1 for the current input C1 function covering 4 to 20 mA DC the voltage input V2 function covering 0 to 10 VDC or the PTC If no input such as frequency command is applied to the terminal the inverter makes of it as 0 Although the C1 terminal can be switched to either the current input C1 function or the voltage input V2 function suitable adjustment of the analog input such as the offset filter and gain should be processed by exclusively provided function codes The command loss detection is only applicable to analog inputs of the terminals 12 C1 C1 function and C1 V2 function For the command loss detection the continue to run frequency automatically switched to the reference frequency determined by what active frequency command is lost however the switched reference command may fluctuate due to the switching timing or the switched situation For details refer to the description of function code E65 Case that data setup for both the gain and bias will take effect concurrently is only available for the frequency command source 1 F01 For the frequency command source 2 C30 and auxiliary frequency command sources 1 and 2 E61 to E63 only setup of the gain will take effect UJ r Q A z gt D E S n TI E Q O
14. ssssseeeeeeeeeeneenene 321 3 3 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information eeessess 3 26 3 3 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information sese 3 29 SP MED Eandem 3 32 3 4 1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode sse 3 32 3 4 2 Displaying the alarm history senenn eterne KE en nnne 3 32 3 4 3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm sees 3 32 3 4 4 Switching to Programming mode sess ener nennen nre enn 3 32 Part 2 Driving the Motor Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC 4 1 Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings sse 4 1 A2 Drive Frequency Gommand Block re Ea eee HR Ee ea terit dh 4 2 4 3 Drive Command Block ssssssssssssesseseeeee eene en nnne esteses testen testets sestese sses ennt 4 6 AA Control Blocks users ROC UR stare aot ette ed 4 8 4 5 PID Process Control Block udine eerte ie b e UR T RE eee heen emia 4 12 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block disse ee eee ede Hd ete E E 4 16 AJS EM Output Selector nnm teisan enden E mtis eie deed 4 19 viii Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication cccccceeceeseesceesceeeceesceseceseceseceaeceaecaeecaecaaecseecaeeeaeeeneeeeeeeeeeereneaees 5 1 5 1 1 RS 485 common specifications standard and optional se
15. 2 2 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad As shown at the right the keypad consists of a four digit LED monitor six keys and five LED indicators The keypad allows you to run and stop the motor monitor running status and switch to the menu mode In the menu mode you can set the function code data monitor I O signal states maintenance information and alarm information LED Monitor LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators 7 segment LED monitor A LED indicators Program Reset key RUN LED Function Data key STOP y key UP key DOWN key Figure 2 3 Keypad Table 2 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Functions Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the operation modes In Running mode Running status information e g output frequency current and voltage Menus function codes and their data Alarm code which identifies the alarm factor if the protective function is activated In Programming mode In Alarm mode Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode Pressing this key after removing the alarm factor will switch the inverter to Running mode In Programming mode In Alarm mode Function Data key which switches the operation you want to do in eac
16. C37 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Gain F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 C38 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Filter time constant C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Refer to the description of C31 C39 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Gain base point F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 C41 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Offset C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Refer to the description of C31 C42 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Gain F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 C43 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Filter time constant C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Refer to the description of C31 C44 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Gain base point F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 C50 Bias Frequency command 1 Bias base point F18 Bias Frequency command 1 For details about bias base point setting for frequency command 1 refer to the description of F18 c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo C51 Bias PID command 1 Bias value C52 Bias PID command 1 Bias base point These function codes specify the bias and bias base point of the analog PID command 1 enabling it to define arbitrary relationship between the analog input and P
17. Cumulative run time of the cooling fan Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON OFF control function code H06 is enabled but the fan does not run Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 99 99 Shown in units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 99990 hours the count stops and the display remains at 99 99 Cc remp LILI Number of startups Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run commands issued 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Input watt hour Shows the input watt hour of the inverter Unit 100 kWh Display range 0 001 to 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitor s resolution e g the resolution varies between 0 001 0 01 0 1 or 1 To reset the integrated input watt hour and its data set function code E51 to 0 000 When the input watt hour exceeds 1000000 kWh it returns to 0 3 27 o U m o Z c Er Z 9 I m A m lt gt oO
18. Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto resetting succeeds Otherwise an accident could occur 9 84 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Reset interval H05 After the reset interval specified by H05 from when the inverter enters the tripped state it issues a reset command to auto reset the tripped state Refer to the timing scheme diagrams below Operation timing scheme Alarm factor Protective function Reset command Inverter output frequency Auto reset signal TRY 0 Time Timing scheme for failed retry No of reset times 3 Alarm factor Protective function Tripped state HO05 4 HOS H05 i Reset command ama nama gt il i i i 2nd 3rd i Hi ie m D Ed co H 1 H H Inverter output H frequency Auto reset signal TRY Alarm output for any alarm S309 NOILONNA 0 Time The reset operation state can be monitored by external equipment via the inverter s digital output terminal Y1 Y2 or 30A B C to which the TRY is assigned by setting 26 with function code E20 E21 or E27 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control To prolong the life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan stops when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops However since frequent switching of the coo
19. E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions Selecting each of these function P codes Motor 1 parameters codes enables its data to be displayed changed H codes High performance functions A codes Motor 2 parameters J codes Application functions y codes Link functions o codes Optional function Section 3 3 2 Data Checking Displays only function codes that have been changed from their factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data Section 3 3 3 Drive Monitoring Displays the running information required for maintenance or test running Section 3 3 4 I O Checking Displays external interface information Section 3 3 5 Maintenance Information Displays maintenance information including cumulative run time Section 3 3 6 Alarm Information Displays the latest four alarm codes You can refer to the running information at the time when the alarm occurred Section 3 3 7 Note 1 Mounting a multi function keypad adds the data copying function to the menu enabling reading writing and verifying of function code data Note 2 The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option 3 10 3 3 Programming Mode Figure 3 3 illustrates the menu driven function
20. EC ES AO of Output frequency Before slip compensation 9 64 1 Output frequency After slip compensation 9 66 2 Reference frequency 3 Motor speed in r min 4 Load shaft speed in r min 5 Line speed in m min ce Constant feeding rate time 9 62 9 66 0 000 Cancel reset k 9 66 0 001 to 9999 0 Function code data editing mode Menus 0 and 1 9 67 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 2 _Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 0 Current input C1 function 4 to 20 mADC 9 68 1 Voltage input V2 function 0 to 10 VDC Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals 12 and C1 C1 V2 function as listed below 0 None 1 Auxiliary frequency command 1 2 Auxiliary frequency command 2 3 PID command 1 5 PID feedback amount 0 Decelerate to stop 9 69 20 to 120 999 Disable The shaded function codes 5 are applicable to the quick setup xl display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 x2 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 3 These function codes are for use with an
21. Inverse operation 7 UP DOWN control 1 Frequency command 1 Terminal command UP DOWN control UP DOWN control Initial frequency setting 0 00 8 UP DOWN control 2 Frequency command 1 Terminal command UP DOWN control UP DOWN control Initial frequency setting Last UPIDOWM command value on releasing run command Operation method 0 Keypad operation Motor rotational direction specified by terminals FWD REV 1 External signal input digital input 2 Keypad operation Run to forward 3 Keypad operation Run to reverse Operation method RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV 2 RUN STOP keys on keypad forward 3 RUN STOP keys on keypad reverse Maximum frequency 1 50 to 400 Hz Maximum frequency 50 0 to 400 0 Hz Base frequency 1 25 to 400 Hz Base frequency 1 25 0 to 400 0 Hz Rated voltage 1 230 V 80 to 240 V 0 V The output voltage in proportion to the power supply voltage is set 460 V 160 to 480 V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 80 to 240 V for 230V 160 to 480 V for 460 V 0 V Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage Maximum voltage 1 230 V 80 to 240 V 460 V 160 to 480 V Maximum output voltage 1 80 to 240 V for 230 V 160 to 480 V for 460 V
22. LED Monitor shows Table 3 18 Display Items for Maintenance Information continued Input watt hour data Description Shows the value expressed by input watt hour KWh x E51 whose data range is 0 000 to 9999 Unit None Display range 0 001 to 9999 The data cannot exceed 9999 It will be fixed at 9999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour data the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution To reset the integrated input watt hour data set function code E51 to 0 000 Number of RS 485 errors standard Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in standard RS 485 communication via the RJ 45 connector as standard since the power is turned on Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Content of RS 485 communications error standard Shows the most recent error that has occurred in standard RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Number of option errors Shows the total number of optional communications card errors since the power 1s turned on Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Inverter s ROM version Shows the inverter s ROM version as a 4 digit code Keypad s ROM version Shows the keypad s ROM version as a 4 digit code Number o
23. Switch to Programming mode without resetting alarms currently occurred LS Alarm mode 69 S5 keys 2 Er o Zz gt lt m on 2 Z 0 TI c Z O a O Z 7 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status configure function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data The keypad is available in two types standard keypad and optional multi function keypad For the instructions on how to operate the multi function keypad refer to the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual Contents 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes eee teet iere ie ie ee eee dedii ei eee Ren 3 1 32 Running Mode ierre ennen ate tede eee RU RE A Ete MN RUE eda 3 3 3 2 1 Monitoring the running status sssesssseseeseeeeneeeneeneene enne nnne eren eren ener ener nennen 3 3 3 2 2 Setting up frequency and PID commands ssssssssssesseeeeneeeenenenren ener 3 4 32 3 Running stopping the motor eene ener nennen enn entren enne 3 9 3 2 4 Jogging Operation 4 ees d e e eee e eee RR GEN eas ERI e ue EO qe tete coms adesto deus 3 9 3 3 Programming Mode csse eese eu E RS ed eed 3 10 3 3 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup sessssssss
24. When the JOL signal is ON it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from the frequency specified by the frequency command because of this limiting function Note m Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Function code data 6 This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut down the output until restart has been completed the output has reached the reference frequency To enable this ZPF signal set F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure to 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred or 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency beforehand m Motor overload early warning OL Function code data 7 This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm 7 and shuts down its output Refer to the description of E34 E Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit and no protective functions are activated E Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Function code data 21 This output signal
25. When using FRENIC Loader which requires a special protocol for handling Loader commands you need to set up some communication function codes accordingly For details refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual Further another RS 485 communications port can be added by mounting an optional RS 485 Communications Card onto the FRENIC Multi inverter This additional communications link can be used only as a port for host equipment not used for a keypad or FRENIC Loader For details of RS 485 communication refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual 5 1 Az c z zZ Z 0 X D O C O I Az o A co a Oo O z c zZ S d O z 5 1 1 RS 485 common specifications standard and optional Items Specifications Protocol FGI BUS Modbus RTU Loader commands supported only on the standard version Compliance Fuji general purpose Modicon Modbus Dedicated protocol inverter protocol RTU compliant Not disclosed only in RTU mode No of supporting Host device 1 stations Inverters Up to 31 Electrical EIA RS 485 specifications Connection to RS 485 RJ 45 connector standard or terminal block optional Synchronization Asynchronous start stop system Transmission mode Half duplex Transmission speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Max transmission 1600 ft 500 m cable length No of logical station 1 to31 to 247 to 255 addresses available Message frame format
26. 5 points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of FRENIC5000G1 IS P11S series FVR E11S series etc 9 2 Overview of Function Codes E In the case of bipolar input Terminal 12 with C35 0 Setting C35 to 0 enables terminal 12 to be used for bipolar input 10 V to 10 V When both F18 Bias and C50 Bias base point are set to 0 the negative and positive voltage inputs produce reference frequencies symmetric about the origin point as shown below Reference frequency Point iB i Terminal 12 Gain 10v input base point C34 Configuring F18 Bias and C50 Bias base point to specify an arbitrary value Points A1 A2 and A3 gives the bias as shown below Reference frequency oO m D P co Point A Terminal 12 input S302 NOILONNA Point As PEL DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency H95 DC Braking Braking response mode A09 DC Braking 2 Braking starting frequency DC Braking 1 Braking level A10 DC Braking 2 Braking level DC Braking 1 Braking time A11 DC Braking 2 Braking time F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor from running by inertia during decelerate to stop operation If the motor enters a decelerate to stop operation by turning off the run command or by decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 du
27. 5 2 Overview of FRENIC Loader Note 2 Use a PC with as high a performance as possible since some slow PCs may not properly refresh the operation status monitor and Test run windows Note 3 To use FRENIC Loader on a network where a FRENIC Mini inverter is also configured choose 19200 bps or below 5 2 2 Connection By connecting a number of inverters to one PC you can control one inverter at a time or a number of inverters simultaneously You can also simultaneously monitor a number of inverters on the multi monitor For how to connect a PC to one or more inverters refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual ie m D D c 5 2 3 Function overview 5 2 3 1 Setting of function code You can set edit and check the setting of the inverter s function code data List and Edit In List and edit you can list and edit function codes with function code No name set value set range and factory default You can also list function codes by any of the following groups according to your needs Function code group Function codes that have been modified from their factory defaults Result of comparison with the settings of the inverter Result of search by function code name User specified function code set EE Function code edit Auto tuning Comparison File Information NOLLVOINNWNODS 8t S4 HONOYHL ONINNNY E Function Change Function code No Function code name Setting value Range of setting
28. Acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 s Acceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 s Deceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 s A 32 Deceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600 s App F Replacement Information FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Data setting range Name Data setting range name Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Torque boost 1 0 Automatic torque boost Load 1 Constant torque load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 1 1 Variable torque characteristics Torque boost 1 096 Load 0 Variable torque load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 1 2 Proportional torque There is no pattern equivalent to the FVR E11S s proportional torque Selecting the constant torque is recommended 3 to 31 Constant torque FO9 Torque boost 1 Refer to the Torque Boost Conversion Non linear V f Table on the last page of this appendix H50 pattern Frequency Non linear V f pattern Voltage Electronic 0 Inactive Electronic thermal O L thermal relay for motor overload 1 protection Select for motor 1 Overload detection level 1 Active for standard motor Electronic 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft 2 Active for inverter motor thermal driven fan overload 2 For an inverter driven motor protection non ventilated motor or motor with for motor 1 forced cooling fan Select motor characteristics Electronic 20 to 13596 of
29. Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor between factory default setting and your own choice Before specifying the threshold of your own choice measure and confirm the Note i reference level in advance Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power off The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid such an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Since load may vary significantly in the following cases disable the judgment on the life during operation Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions matching the actual ones An option card or multi function keypad is used Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of the DC link bus To set data of H98 assign functions to each bit total 5 bits and set it in decimal format The table below lists functions assigned to
30. Braking starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz DC brake Braking level 0 to 100 DC braking 1 Braking level 0 to 100 DC brake Braking time 0 00 to 30 00 s DC braking 1 Braking time 0 00 to 30 00 s Multi frequency 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Multi frequency 0 00 to 400 00 Hz acceleration deceleration pattern 0 Liner 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong A 27 Acceleration deceleration pattern 0 Liner 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong FVR E9S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S Protective action history Display alarm history of last four alarms Refer to Menu 6 Starting frequency 0 1 to 15 Hz Starting frequency 1 0 2 1 0 to 15 0 Hz Torque limiter During acceleration deceleration 0 No limit Active 20 to 18096 Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for driving 20 to 180 999 Disable Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for braking 20 to 180 999 Disable Terminal X5 function 14 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL 1 Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for driving 20 to 200 999 Disable Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for braking 20 to 200 999 Disable Terminal Y2 function 21 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Note Short circuit between terminals X5 and Y2 and between CM
31. FGI BUS Modbus RTU FRENIC loader Frame SOH Start Of Header Detection of no data Start code 96H synchronization character detection transmission time for detection 3 byte period Frame length Normal transmission Variable length Variable length 16 bytes fixed High speed transmission 8 or 12 bytes Max transfer data Write 1 word Write 50 words Write 41 words Read 1 word Read 50 words Read 41 words Messaging system Polling Selecting Broadcast Command message Transmission ASCII Binary Binary character format Character length 8 or 7 bits 8 bits fixed 8 bits fixed selectable by the function code Parity Even Odd or None Even fixed selectable by the function code Stop bit length 1 or 2 bits No parity 2 bits 1 bit 1 bit fixed selectable by the Even or Odd parity function code 1 bit Select by parity setting Error checking Sum check CRC 16 Sum check 5 2 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication 5 1 2 RJ 45 connector pin assignment for standard RS 485 communications port The port designed for a standard keypad uses an RJ 45 connector having the following pin assignment Signal name Function Remarks Power source for the keypad 5 V power lines Reference potential Grounding pins Not used No connection RS 485 data Built in terminating resistor 112Q RS 485 data Open close by SW3 5V GND T
32. Multi frequency commands 1 2 and 3 are exclusively applicable to the primary frequency For logics common to the drive frequency command block refer to 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block To use any of analog input terminals 12 C1 C1 function and C1 V2 function for a PID command dancer reference position input be sure properly configure data of function codes E60 E61 E62 and J02 Multi frequency commands 4 8 and 12 are exclusively applicable to the PID command dancer reference position The output of dancer reference position bandwidth detector switches PID constant set of the PID control between J03 J04 and J05 and J59 J60 and J61 This logic allows the inverter to select either controlling the output of PID processor in a ratio 96 or add subtract of the frequency Hz to the primary frequency command The terminal command of PID cancel Hz PID cancels the compensation of PID dancer control and makes the inverter also possible to run with the primary frequency command 4 7 FM Output Selector 4 7 FM Output Selector Analog output FM Function Mode selection Gain Hardware switch SW6 FMA Output frequency 1 Output frequency 2 e Output current 440 Output voltage o l Output torque tio i Load factor Input power PID feedback amount e o 8 l l l l l l l Pulse rate PG feedback va
33. Output frequency Hz 50 Output torque 96 eo 100 150 200 250 Figure 7 1 Output Torque Characteristics Base frequency 50 Hz Sdl LIOVvdVO amp 3 LH3ANI ANY YOLOW IVWI LdO 9NILO3T3S 7 1 250 2166 i 200 i 180 ROSE C 150 100 s 50 Output frequency ii 50 Output torque 96 e s 100 per y aid 120 7 wr 150 180 we 200 250 Figure 7 2 Output Torque Characteristics Base frequency 60 Hz 1 Continuous allowable driving torque Curve a in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 Curve a shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter continuous rated current where the motor cooling characteristic is taken into consideration When the motor runs at the base frequency of 60 Hz 100 output torque can be obtained at 50 Hz the output torque is somewhat lower than that in commercial power and it further lowers at lower frequencies The reduction of the output torque at 50 Hz is due to increased loss by inverter driving and that at lower frequencies is mainly due to heat generation caused by the decreased ventilation performance of the motor cooling fan 2 Maximum driving torque in a short time Curves b and c in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 Curve b shows the torque characteristic that can be obtained in the range of the inverter rated current in a
34. PID output limiter Integration reset hold Speed control slip compensation A phase and B phase B phase When the optional PG interface card is installed Auto search for idling motor speed The inverter automatically searches the idling motor speed to be harmonized and starts to drive it without stopping it Automatic When the torque calculation value exceeds the limit level set for the inverter during deceleration deceleration the output frequency is automatically controlled and the deceleration time automatically extends to avoid an trip Deceleration The motor loss increases during deceleration to reduce the load energy regenerating at characteristic the inverter to avoid an 7 trip upon mode selection improving braking ability Auto energy saving operation The output voltage is controlled to minimize the total sum of the motor loss and inverter loss at a constant speed Overload prevention Control The output frequency is automatically reduced to suppress the overload protection trip of inverter caused by an increase in the ambient temperature operation frequency motor load or the like Auto tuning Automatically tunes the motor for r1 Xo excitation current and slip frequency 12 Cooling fan ON OFF Detects inverter internal temperature and stops cooling fan when the temperature is low control Secondary motor setting One inverter can be used to control two motors by
35. When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the 9 amp key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID command currently selected while you cannot change the setting On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is displayed Ii S4 Decimal point Table 3 4 PID Command Manually Set with WN Q Key and Requirements PID control PID control Mode Remote command LED monitor selection E43 JO1 Multi NET frequency With N V key SS4 SS8 PID command by keypad Other than 0 ON or OFF Other than 0 PID command currently selected 3 7 Setting up the primary frequency command with O and Q keys under PID dancer control When function code F01 is set to 0 N V keys on keypad and frequency command 1 is selected as a primary frequency command when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link and multi frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the 9 V keys In Programming or Alarm mode the amp keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running mode Table 3 5 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how th
36. Y1 terminal A Y2 terminal OFF 30Ry terminal CH OFF Y2 terminal Start stop monitoring fni START STOP Advanc 16000ms START STOP Monitoring items Advanced setting Scope scroll Cursor Monitor window the real time trace of the channels of the channels slide C Note During the real time trace in progress you cannot e Change the RS 485 station address Change the advanced waveform settings or Scroll the real time trace screen or move the cursor Resizing the real time trace window automatically changes the monitor window size 5 11 Az c z zZ z 0 xa D O O I Az o A co e Q O z c zZ S d O z Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options FRENIC Multi s configuration with them and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals Contents 6 1 Configuring the FRENIC Multi esesseseeseeeseeeeeee enne ener ennt enne nennen rtr n rennen neret nene nn nennen nnn 6 1 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals eene ener A 6 2 6 2 1 Recommended wires eR eere ente edat ede ede e e RUE eti exe e e Ege ds 6 4 6 3 Peripheral Equipment esee e qe HR ee ERE MERE Re ERE RENS 6 8 1 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI and
37. Zero phase reactor Installation requirements Wire size type Qty Number of turns mm 2 0 1 4 3 5 ACL 40B 5 5 8 2 2 14 8 1 4 i ACL 74B 25 2 2 38 The selected wires are for use with 3 phase input output lines 3 wires 6 22 6 4 Selecting Options 6 4 2 Options for operation and communications 1 External potentiometer for frequency setting An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency Connect the potentiometer to control signal terminals 11 through 13 of the inverter as shown in Figure 6 13 Model RJ 13 BA 2 B characteristics 1 kQ 0 14 3 5 rm 0 24 6 Shaft 2 p j 0 02 0 5 F i 3 E E tl S a TT H A S M8 A oF 028 052 pz075 0 59 asegun 079 0 4 10 S 1 77 0 08 45 2 0 980 04 25 1 Dial plate type YS549810 0 Knob type MSS 2SB 1 0 20 1 65 vc 00 13 63 2 Io o T eb 6 0 4 610 ot JS o O9 400 ay FREO SET t 1 58 40 0 4 1 610 Unit inch mm Note The dial plate and knob must be ordered as separated items Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Model WAR3W 3W B characteristics 1 kQ 0 91 23 0 79 20 r3 e N Dp 9i j 9 Dial plate Knob ry cho mee 8 Ee Ed M fT 82 ALLN Si OLES v eyes S 90240 Unit inch mm Note The dial plate and knob are supplied together with the external potentiometer WAR3W Available from Fuji Electric Technica
38. a FRNO10E1S 2U DB7 5 2C 15 37 0 375 T FRN015E1S 2U DB11 2C 10 55 10 0 55 D FRN020E1S 2U DB15 2C 8 6 75 0 75 peas DBO 75 4C 200 50 eM 0 075 d o FRNOO1E1S 4U 133 20 Sc ee DB2 2 4C i 160 55 is 0 110 is z Three FRNOO3E1S 4U 50 m phase FRN005E1S 4U DB3 7 4C 130 140 75 0 185 2 460 V FRNOO7E1S 4U DB5 5 4C 80 55 20 0 275 T FRNO10E1S 4U DB7 5 4C 60 38 0 375 FRNO15E1S 4U DB11 4C 40 55 10 0 55 FRNO20E1S 4U DB15 4C 34 4 75 0 75 FRNF12E1S 7U 1000 100 FRNF25E1S 7U 500 75 Single ERHERDEMGETU DBO 75 2C 100 50 m 0 075 hon FRNOO1E1S 7U 133 20 FRNOO2E1S 7U 73 14 aR CET DB2 2 2C 40 55 0 110 m The 10 ED braking resistor does not support overheating detection or warning output so an electronic thermal overload relay needs to be set up using function codes F50 and F51 to protect the braking resistor from overheating 6 15 1 3 Compact model Power supply voltage Note Braking resistor Figure 6 8 Braking Resistor Compact Model and Connection Example Resistor Table 6 8 Braking Resistor Compact Model Capacity KW TK80W1200 0 08 Resistance Q 120 Applicable inverter model FRNF50 E1S 2U FRNOO1 E1S 2U FRN002 E1S 2U FRNOO3 E1S 2U FRNOOS E1S 2U Nominal applied motor HP 1 2 1 2 3 5 Average braking torque 150 65 45 Allowable braking properties Allowable duty cycle 15 5 5 Allowable continu
39. and Meter display You can choose an appropriate monitoring format according to the purpose and situation I O monitor Allows you to monitor the ON OFF states of the digital input signals to the inverter and the transistor output signals System monitor Allows you to check the inverter s system information version model maintenance information etc Alarm monitor The alarm monitor shows the alarm status of the selected inverter In this window you can check the details of the alarm currently occurs and related information Meter display Displays analog readouts of the selected inverter such as output frequency on analog meters The example on the right displays the reference frequency and the output frequency 5 9 TO serio tun mcrae iem scies Meter ec Assn n iro ial Normal Qo pav ARES m tomay Ovn ev PU E v2 fmweeysuesexesmaPAND fm 9 0 foy fim p or Exe Td p 9 m pr p Coneacsng Selectinener ws scm Glove Operation Status Monitor V mentor System montor Alarm montor Meter daptay ROM Ver Gating seip Mon corsa cru WO Operation order ED Frequency order Option t Tee Accumulated time of PC bord mounted Accumulated operation tire cl cooling lan Acoam aed operanon number of inei Mox RIMS curse A Hihat TMP incide INV deg C Highest TMP of heat sink deg C Accumedaied of eiecti enm dita Sojectiarter no spi
40. motor Inverters provide a pair of grounding terminals that function equivalently Power supply for the potentiometer Power supply 10 VDC for frequency command potentiometer Potentiometer 1 to 5kQ The potentiometer of 1 2 W rating or more should be connected Analog input Analog setting voltage input 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input voltage 0 to 10 VDC O to 100 Normal operation 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 22kQ The maximum input is 15 VDC however the current larger than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC Note Inputting a bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 requires setting function code C35 to 0 8 8 8 3 Terminal Specifications S o B lss o Functions i uh hal un un c S O C1 Analog setting 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog current input input current C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal operation 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID process command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 250Q Maximum input is 30 mA DC however the current larger than
41. o Uo m p p nh 55 PEN cc 2 wel Required power HP kW Rotating speed of load machine oe Control circuit terminals Terminals on the inverter which are used for input output of signals to control or manage the inverter external equipment directly or indirectly Current limiter A control that keeps an inverter output frequency within the specified current limit Cursor Marker blinking on the four digit 7 segment LED monitor which shows that data in the blinking digit can be changed modified by keying operation Curvilinear V f pattern A generic name for the inverter output patterns with curvilinear relation between the frequency and voltage Refer to function code H07 in Chapter 9 Section 9 2 5 H codes DC braking DC braking DC current braking that an inverter injects into the motor to brake and stop it against the moment of inertia of the motor or its load The inertial energy generated is consumed as heat in the motor If a motor having the load with large moment of inertia is going to stop abruptly the moment of inertia may force to rotate the motor after the inverter output frequency has been reduced to 0 Hz Use DC braking to stop the motor completely Related function codes F20 to F22 and A09 to A11 Glossary DC link bus voltage Voltage at the DC link bus that is the end stage of the converter part of inverters The part rectifies the input AC power to charge the DC link bus
42. 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Jump frequency 2 0 to 400 Hz Jump frequency 2 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Jump frequency 3 0 to 400 Hz Jump frequency 3 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Base frequency 2 50 to 400 Hz Base frequency 2 50 0 to 400 0 Hz Acceleration time 2 0 01 to 3600 s Acceleration time 2 0 01 to 3600 s Deceleration time 2 0 01 to 3600 s Deceleration time 2 0 01 to 3600 s Torque Boost 2 1 Variable torque load Torque boost 1 0 0 to 20 0 Load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 2 0 Variable torque load 2 Proportional torque load 3 to 31 Constant torque load Torque boost 1 Refer to the Torque Boost Conversion Table on the last page of this appendix Electronic thermal overload relay 2 Select 0 Inactive Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Overload detection level 0 00 1 Active for 4 pole standard motor 2 Active for 4 pole inverter motor Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Select motor characteristics 1 For general purpose motors with shaft driven fan 2 For inverter driven motors non ventilated motors or motors with forced cooling fan Electronic thermal overload relay 2 Level 0 01 to 99 9 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable 1 to 135 of the rated current al
43. 4 I O Checking displays the I O status of external signals including digital and analog I O signals without using a measuring instrument Table 3 14 lists check items available The menu transition in Menu 4 I O Checking is shown in Figure 3 8 Power ON Running mode S Programming mode B Go I O data ES P By LED segment ON OFF W O status in binary format 3935 Input status in hex format GGG Output status in hex format S EN By LED segment ON OFF W O status in binary format Input status in hex format G lt OGG 1 Output status in hex format Input voltage at terminal 12 V 50 8 PG pulse rate 2 Z phase p s Figure 3 8 Menu Transition in Menu 4 I O Checking Oo m D 9 wo QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOLLVH3dO Basic key operation To check the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the e key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the J and keys to display I O Checking H 12 3 Press the amp key to proceed to a list of I O check items e g 5 77 ffo 4 Use the S and keys to display the desired I O check item then press the amp 3 key The corresponding I O check data appears For the item 7 or
44. 5 details 10 Timer limer Onz OA Okw i Remaining time of timer operation operation 3 PID output in as the maximum PID output 3 4 A DHz OA Okw frequency F03 being at 100 For motor 2 read F03 as A01 Load factor of the motor in 96 as the Load factor Onz HA Okw rated output being at 100 Motor output 7 LlHz OA kw Motor output in kW 3 3 1 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed on the 4 digit LED monitor screen so 7 appear instead 2 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for the unit of the voltage V 3 These PID related items appear only when the inverter PID controls the motor according to a PID command specified by function code JO1 71 2 or 3 The Timer item appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 Refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 2 3 C codes Control Functions When the PID control or timer operation is disabled appear 4 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks 5 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights 6 When the LED monitor displays a load factor the 7 segment letter _ in the lowest digit stands for 96 7 When the LED monitor display
45. Bit 3 Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor A codes Motor 2 Parameters Default Code Data setting range setting A01 Maximum Frequency 2 25 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz N Y 600 9 702 02 Base Frequency 2 25 0 to 400 0 o1 Hz N v j 600 A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 1 V Y2 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 230 V Pin 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 460 V A04 Maximum Output Voltage 2 80 to 240V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 230 V 160 to 500V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 460 V A05 Torque Boost 2 0 0 to 20 0 TA percentage with respect to A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 on the Note This setting takes effect when A13 0 1 3 or 4 inverter capacity A06 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan Protection for Motor 2 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with Select motor characteristics separately powered cooling fan A07 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable H 100 of 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the the motor moor A08 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 tT min A09 DC Braking 2 0 to 60 OHz A10 Braking level A11 Braking time 0 00 Disable z 01 to 30 00 A12 A13 Load Selection Variable
46. Control circuit O Q PLC Sw1 SINK SOURCE M PLC m SINK l j an H swi SOURCE al 24 VDC M X1 to X5 FWD REV A X1 to X5 Photocoupler FWD REV Photocoupler s CM CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 8 5 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact Tip B Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 8 6 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power source turns ON or OFF control signal X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power source which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC Programmable logic controller Control circuit C
47. For example when data 9 in Enable external alarm trip Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON 9 44 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Terminal function assignment and data setting m Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 Function code data 0 1 2 and 3 The combination of the ON OFF states of digital input signals SS7 SS2 SS4 and SS8 selects one of 16 different frequency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19 Multi frequency 0 to 15 With this the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset frequencies The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SST SS2 SS4 and SS8 In the Selected frequency column Other than multi frequency represents the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 or others For details refer to the block diagram in Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block Selected frequency Other than multi frequency C05 Multi frequency 1 C06 Multi frequency 2 C07 Multi frequency 3 C08 Multi frequency 4 C09 Multi frequency 5 C10 Multi frequency 6 C11 Multi frequency 7 C12 Multi frequency 8 Z C13 Multi frequency 9 Z C14 Multi frequency 10 Z C15 Multi frequency 11 C16 Multi frequency 12 a c z O a O
48. Hz x Base frequency Note For reactance choose the value at the base frequency 1 F04 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving A23 Motor 2 Slip compensation gain for driving Motor 1 Slip compensation response time A24 Motor 2 Slip compensation response time Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for braking A25 Motor 2 Slip compensation gain for braking P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in for driving and braking individually Specification of 100 fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor Excessive compensation P09 P11 gt 100 may cause a system oscillation so carefully check the operation on the actual machine P10 determines the response time for slip compensation Basically there is no need to modify the default setting If you need to modify it consult your Fuji Electric representatives Motor 1 Rated slip frequency P06 Motor 1 No load current P07 Motor 1 R1 P08 Motor 1 X A26 Motor 2 Rated slip frequency For details about setting of the rated slip frequency of motor 1 refer to the descriptions of P06 to P08 Motor 1 Selection A39 Motor 2 Selection P99 specifies the motor to be used Data for P99 Motor type Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors
49. Note also that any bias setting must not apply to feedback control Feedback A 100 0 Input at terminal 12 Application examples Dancer control Example 1 When the output level of the external sensor is 7 VDC Use terminal 12 since the voltage input is of bipolar Example When the external sensor s output is of bipolar the inverter controls the speed within the range of 100 To convert the output 7 VDC to 100 set the gain C32 for analog input adjustment at 143 as calculated below 10V 1439 TV s Feedback 100 f 3 pA LS a P Lt i d i Lent Tu P aN ha Input at terminal 12 2 7V 10V i i Z i P4 Ld cu A T a aon S i MF cme AEAEE NS 9 106 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Example 2 When the output level of the external sensor is 0 to 10 VDC Use terminal 12 or C1 V2 function since the voltage input is of unipolar Example When the external sensor s output is of unipolar the inverter controls the speed within the range of 0 to 100 Feedback 100 5 Input at terminal 12 OV 10V This example sets the dancer reference position around the 5 V 50 point m Remote command SV J02 J02 sets the source that specifies the command value SV under PID control Data for J02 Function Keypad Using the J V keys on the keypad in conjunction with PID display coeffi
50. Q A 9g gt D a S z n ui A Q O z 4 Az Q E O O 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block LED monitor Key operation on the keypad Selection of normal inverse Switch normal inverse Em operation eference vs loss detection E65 999 eT a Normal inverse 112 Le iQ O1 T be ZI operation i I 1 Polari c Polarity vy Flier Continue to run S _ Gain Bias C35 1 C35 1 frequency at oe PELO CE ana EM thermistor 0 Hardware C1 Mode 0 limiter PO MEE letection switch C1 function selection SWT C1 E59 0 H26 0 J C1 O O OO i i Normal inverse en OP pe ia o t pon I z HO I PTC C36 ien tou Sai icii Bias o ti Hard thermistor ct lt function C1 Ct function 0 limiter ware IC1 Mode C1 function E65 gt switch C1 function selection Offset Reference loss r SW7 V2 E59 1 H26 0 detection ASA RA i Normal inverse O O O O gt k jO 0 F lal ee operation G A l 1 T AWN 1 C1 mE M E Gain TER a C1 V2 function requency i uo E
51. Q The analog input less than the bias base point C50 is limited by the bias value Note F18 Specifying that the data of the bias base point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain base point C34 C39 or C44 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz Reference frequency Gain ae C32 C37 or C42 ee Point B Bias ae sedo F18 pointa Ln Analog input 0 Bias Gain 10096 base base point point C50 C34 C39 or C44 Example Setting the bias gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 10096 follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 in frequency command 1 Reference frequency Gain i 100 Point B Bias F18 0 Point A i Analog input 0 1V 10 PRSA Bias Gain base base point C50 point C34 Point A To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V full scale set the bias base point to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V full scale set the gain base point to 50 C34 50 The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any base CN
52. RE g sg 8 297 e N e e t 1 With overcurrent protection t 1 56 40 Unit inch Note Available rated capacity of nominal nit inch mm applied motors is 5 HP or less Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Figure 6 3 Dimensions of Surge Killer and Connection Example 3 Arresters An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply lines Use of an arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Applicable arrester models are the CN23232 and CN2324E Figure 6 4 shows their external dimensions and connection examples Refer to the catalog Fuji Noise Suppressors SH310 Japanese edition only for details These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd mI 97 50 Terminal 53116 9 52 10 screw M5 w4 Three phase 220 VAC Three phase 440 VAC 1 Plug fuse Plug fuse AFaC 30 I fl l aFac a0 t L1 32 5 3 CN2324E i UN a 35mm wide Mounting clam 25 IEC standard rail Mounting hole Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Unit inch mm Figure 6 4 Arrester Dimensions and Connection Examples 6 12 6 3 Peripheral Equipment 4 Surge absorbers A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the power lines to ensure effective protection of your power system from the malfunctio
53. S4 SS8 LE Frequency O command 1 r Q m jn Frequency fe ee n 1 tO limiter High m tO 4 Communications LOrTQ e 15 r link function Bus link rS 1 OOS d CL es O function See O rive frequency Loader link Jump command Q 0 2 6 function mO frequency TN 1910678 OTF Et Og Paasa 1 34 Frequency Frequency LI limiter limiter I kK Low Mode Q ning C20 selection Multi frequency 1 Jogging i E Multi frequency 2 c06 frequency Z Multi frequency 3 C07 75 comman 1 012 74 Multi frequency 4 on Multi frequency 5 O Multi frequency 6 A Auxiliary frequency setting 1 Multi frequency 7 Oo Z r O 1 1 1 1 s 1 Oo 1 1 1 Multi frequency 11 5 i i Multi frequency 12 1 8 tO l Multi frequency 13 l 7 lo i Multi frequency 14 111 Multi frequency 15 1 O 1 12 Ojo 1 H1 1 Oo gt x L I l Auxiliary frequency setting 2 i 12 O N T 1 l O13 1 1 1 wi Gain Ols Er C1 1 C1 function 1 Takes priority when the same function has been assigned by E61 E62 and E63 Terminal 12 gt Terminal C1 C1 function gt Terminal C1 V2 function 2 Refer to block diagrams of PID control block for details 3 For details of the options refer to the instruction manual for each option Notes When PID control is enabled the control logic differs f
54. Sel Search result FMA terminal Ou BEAD WRITE F01 fo Factory set Func code set Func code info Inialsization advanced Ein Selectinverter No 1 1 INV1 x Close 5 7 Comparison You can compare the function code data currently being edited with that saved in a file or stored in the inverter To perform a comparison and review the result displayed click the Comparison tab and then click the Compared with inverter tab or click the Compared with file tab and specify the file name The result of the comparison will be displayed also in the Comparison Result column of the list File information Clicking the File information tab displays the property and comments for identifying the function code editing file 1 Property Shows file name inverter model inverter s capacity date of readout etc 2 Comments Displays the comments you have entered You can write any comments necessary for identifying the file 5 2 3 2 Multi monitor This feature lists the status of all the inverters that are marked connected in the configuration table Multi monitor Allows you to monitor the status of more than one inverter in a list format iBixj EE F1S 3phase 200 60 00 C18 3phase 200 3747 Selection 5 2 3 3 Running status monitor 5 2 Overview of FRENIC Loader The running status monitor offers four monitor functions I O monitor System monitor Alarm monitor
55. Switching at approx 1 second intervals O Q m O Z c D Z 9 I m A m lt gt v C MI he IQ TWO Chit t u Item EOM Error sub code Switching at approx Eo 1 second intervals A ocd LI Same as above E B A Same as above Same as above a oa 95 C Figure 3 10 Alarm Information Menu Transition 3 29 Basic key operation To view the alarm information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the e key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the Wand amp 2 keys to display Alarm Information 5 77 3 Press the amp key to proceed to a list of alarm codes e g In the list of alarm codes the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history 4 Each time the Wor V key is pressed the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most recent oneas Z 7 and 4 5 While the alarm code is displayed press the S key to have the corresponding alarm item number e g amp _ LIL and data e g Output frequency displayed alternately in intervals of approximately 1 second You can also have th
56. Switching at approx Output frequency Oo m D 9 wo Current alarm code LILI ALI LILI FN 1 ES S AJ TO 2 Item Switching at approx Output current d mal 1 second intervals i3 o 5 0 D IC J4 z c eo z Ol TO 2 Item Switchin at approx Error sub code second intervals 6 2 1 8 5 lt y Most recent alarm code g Eg ia d Same as above LIZ M 2nd recent alarm code Eg 2 LU 3rd recent alarm code Fal ia Same as above Eg 30H4 WT acd f List of alarm codes Running status info at the time an alarm occurred Same as above Figure 3 11 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode 3 33 Part 2 Driving the Motor Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Contents 4 1 Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings sese 4 1 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block eiii enne E E E E E en nnne 4 2 4 3 Drive Command Block nas apa ma QR HORTON IR a EDO 4 6 44 Control Block oet ree etie EE Ee v Ee TER Ie iEn ee inn 4 8 45 PID Process Control Block 5 3 t Rect cela ees aT RERO a RT RT REI De TR RT 4 12 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block see
57. The calculated time is correct Deceleration time calculation The calculated time is correct Add optional braking resistor Deceleration time calculation The calculated time is correct Regenerative energy calculation Is the loss permissible Select a braking resistor of higher rating Is the loss permissible Highly frequent acceleration and deceleration Equivalent RMS current calculation Is the RMS current lower or equal to the rated current END Consult with FUJI Figure 7 3 Selection Procedure 7 4 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 1 Calculating the load torque during constant speed running For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 1 It is essential to calculate the load torque during constant speed running for all loads First calculate the load torque of the motor during constant speed running and then select a tentative capacity so that the continuous rated torque of the motor during constant speed running becomes higher than the load torque To perform capacity selection efficiently it is necessary to match the rated speeds base speeds of the motor and load To do this select an appropriate reduction gear mechanical transmission ratio and the number of motor poles If the acceleration or deceleration time is not restricted the tentative capacity can apply as a defined capacity 2 Calculating the acceleration time For detailed calculatio
58. XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control the I O display is in normal logic using the original signals not inverted Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details on input commands sent through RS 485 communications and the instruction manual of communication related options as well 3 3 Programming Mode m Displaying control I O signal terminals on optional DI O interface card The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the optional DI O interface card just like the control circuit terminals Table 3 17 lists the assignment between LED segments and DI O signals Table 3 17 Segment Display for External Signal Information Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 LI ILA L LALL L LED No Bit Input terminal Output terminal O Q m o Z c Er Z I m A m lt gt s 3 3 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance Information contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter Table 3 18 lists the maintenance information display items and Figure 3 9 shows the menu transition in Menu Z5 Maintenance information Power ON Running mode
59. Z Q O Og m Qo Z C17 Multi frequency 13 Z C18 Multi frequency 14 Z SiSisisisisisis C19 Multi frequency 15 m Select ACC DEC time RT1 Function code data 4 This terminal command switches between ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 and ACC DEC time 2 E10 E11 If no RTI command is assigned ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 takes effect by default Input d command Acceleration deceleration time Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 Acceleration deceleration time 2 E10 E11 m Enable 3 wire operation HLD Function code data 6 Turning this terminal command ON self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command issued with it to enable 3 wire inverter operation Turning HLD ON self holds the first FWD or REV command at its leading edge Turning HLD OFF releases the self holding When HLD is not assigned 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect Output dde m Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms m Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept
60. details of each function code Contents 9 1 Function Code Tables ERR qa 9 1 92 Overview ot Function Codes coii ced edere ere e de nde Patre eee eere de eee Lee read 9 14 9 2 1 F codes Fundamental functions enne enne nennen nnne 9 14 9 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions eere 9 43 92 3 C codes Control functions iss o coe tet es qid p a teo e eda eie 9 70 9 2 4 Pcodes Motor 1 parameters nee esee iei decent desea ede re ede e e Hee RE ERE 9 77 9 2 5 H codes High performance functions cccceecceesceesceseceeeceseceeceecaecsaecaeecaeeeaeeeseeeeesereserseeeeeenaees 9 80 9 2 6 Acodes Motor 2 parameters essersi inii eeii eene ener enne nre 9 102 9 2 7 J codes Application functions sosesc ea ener nnne tnter nennen 9 104 9 2 8 y codes Link functions enne nennen nennen eren enne 9 119 9 1 Function Code Tables 9 1 Function Code Tables Function codes enable the FRENIC Multi series of inverters to be set up to match your system requirements Each function code consists of a 3 letter alphanumeric string The first letter is an alphabet that identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group The function codes are classified into nine groups Fundamental Functions F codes Extension Terminal Functions E codes Control Functions C codes Motor 1 Parameters P codes High Performance Functions H codes Motor 2 Parameters A cod
61. magnetic contactor MG tete ete tede iie teer Ee RENE e Yet 6 8 25 5Surgekillets2 edi Secreto vce dotats rea atom mtt o Ua giten 6 12 KNEE HS UCIEEEE H E 6 12 EA Surge absorbers aec tete ete aie eee test bere te tete 6 13 6 4 Selecting Options isset e e Ye EUREN e ER Ee d e ee Ere EEG e es 6 14 6 4 1 Peripheral equipment options eene enne entente nene nennen eren enn 6 14 1 Braking resistors ices S Rl e eie SO I 6 14 2 DOTfeactors DORS 3 5 eie Sete eh RR IU reete aie Re e de E T TTG 6 17 3 AC reactors ACRS nenn ies edi dame demere 6 19 4 O tput circuit filters ORES terret err UR eU eet 6 20 5 Zero phase reactor for reducing radio noise ACL sse 6 22 6 4 2 Options for operation and communications sess eere enne enne enn 6 23 1 External potentiometer for frequency setting sssssssssssssesseeeeeeer ene 6 23 2 Multi function keypad eec ete ee de ee eee ertet 6 24 3 Extension cable for remote operation essen eene 6 24 4 RS 485 communications Card ccccccceccccssccssscessecesececsseceeececssecseeeecaeceeeeecsaecseseecsaeceeeeecsseeeeeeess 6 25 5 Inverter support loader software sess eene nennen 6 25 6 4 3 Meter Options cese Ree Re ERU REIR E UR EP Ue ded 6 26 1 Erequency metets eot o teer etes oce eee ege awe e EYE ae E FERRE ge eee Led 6 26 6 1 Configuri
62. motor Motor 1 Auto tuning A18 Motor 2 Auto tuning The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory Basically it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a Fuji standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter In any of the following cases perform auto tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of Fuji standard motors so as not to obtain the best performance under each of these controls auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving operation torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector droop control or overload stop c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non standard motor Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter For details of auto tuning refer to the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data Motor 1 Online tuning A19 Motor 2 Online turning The primary and secondary resistances VoR1 and R2 will change as the motor temperature rises P05 allows you to tune this change when the inverter is in operation online P07 P08 Motor 1 No load current P12 Motor 1 Rated slip frequency A20 Motor
63. protection function prevents the inverter from undergoing heavy stress that may be caused by input phase loss or inter phase voltage unbalance and may damage the inverter If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the inverter this function will not detect input phase loss if any Output phase Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running LL Yes loss protection and during running stopping the inverter output Overheat Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink UH i Yes protection temperature in case of cooling fan failure or overload Discharging and inverter operation are stopped due to cor Yes overheating of an external braking resistor Function codes must be set corresponding to the braking resistor l This alarm on 30A B C should be ignored depending upon the function code setting 8 30 8 7 Protective Functions LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overload Stops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor ULL Yes protection IGBT internal temperature calculated from the output current and temperature of inside the inverter 1s over the preset value Externalalarm Places the inverter in alarm stop state upon receiving digital Lii Yes input input signal THR Electronic In the following cases the inverter stops running the motor to TA Yes thermal protect the motor in accordan
64. rera ofan er e e ar s s res s sra s wo s se 2s oe LL EH ppm er E os MERERI IERI LIC CR ZEE CEN TES dem pe m es ns 7 n2 LES dem pee m en ns s7 n2 pm pm on 7 8 pm pm on n 7 27 epp os 8 8 a poppe m 8 1 12 pe wo por or or 25 3 fren ze ps or 40 05 a A 21 FVR E11S vs FRENIC Multi FVR E11S IP20 FRENIC Multi IP20 Ambient temperature 50 C Ambient temperature 50 C Mount Power External dimensions mm Mounting area Volume External dimensions mm ing area m x10 2 s pups uo c as os us NIU a o2 ze vn vor es ss os ose 00 oes o m sz e2 9 o oo E o oo we se 22 os sen ons o ro pr ee as 72 56 Fors m0 oo e se ss vs sen 2 won co opere so 7 sa Es ins o poo se or s asa 2 asa o vo 5 9 7 27 22 refiero ee Te Tia Tosa 2 T oea Tr fro frof e ll ar ro fae re fes re 22 a es T ors inf e faea e Fee f 2e ee Fes peo o pes 0 pos 6 woo o 2 ve or 0 55 res o zo poo 6 o o 2 er 7 0 55 DT ee E epe fes ns 57 n2 Os ee ed supply voltage fox i o e se e s esa v7 aaa o o o ao 14 20 Fors ine o eo se or s asa 21 asa vo o vo e or v4 20 Es fefie roof se a 25 Treo ro eo spur oe e nr Pa io oo ro e e 4 asa 25 voz vo o nm se 7 2
65. the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode In this mode you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED monitor Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered a protective function For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 7 Protective Functions Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes If the inverter is turned ON it automatically enters Running mode making it possible to start or stop the motor Power ON o Q m o Z c Er Z 4 I m A m lt gt ju Setting of function codes Run Stop of motor Monitor of running status Monitor of running status O signal states and maintenance info y i 4 i N L 4 y t 4 i Y 5 Pa 4 Occurrence x p ofanalam M i 0 08 NO f a Press this key if an alarm has occurred Display of alarm status Figure 3 1 Status Transition between Operation Modes Figure 3 2 illustrates the transition of the LED monitor screen during Running mode the transition between menu items in Programming mode and the transition between alarm codes at different occurrences in Alarm mode Running mode Programming mode Power ON Run stop of motor Gree of function codes Monitor of running status Monitor of various inverter status Menu driven Quick Setup Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 5 S Alarm mode Display of alarm
66. using the Wand p g pp g amp keys switches the display method between the segment display for external signal information in Table 3 15 and hexadecimal display for I O signal status in Table 3 16 5 Press the eS key to return to a list of I O check items Press the eS key again to return to the menu sy Key aj Key ag Table 3 14 I O Check Items LED monitor Description shows P T O signals on the control Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals circuit terminals Refer to Bil Displaying control I O signal terminals on the next page for details Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals that received a command via RS 485 and optional communications Refer to BE Displaying control I O signal terminals and B Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the following pages for details I O signals on the control circuit terminals under communications control Input voltage on terminal 12 Shows the input voltage on terminal 12 in volts V Input current on terminal C1 Shows the input current on terminal Cl in milliamperes mA q US Output voltage to analog Shows the output voltage on terminal FM in volts meters FM V Pulse rate of FM Shows the output pulse rate on terminal FM in pulses per second p s Input voltage on terminal C1 Shows the input voltage on terminal Cl V2 function assigned in volts V
67. width 0 0 to 400 0 Hz 0 0 to 400 0 Hz OL 1 function signal Mode select Timer 0 Electric thermal O L relay Terminal Y1 Y2 function 7 Motor overload early warning OL 1 Output current Terminal Y1 Y2 function 37 Current detected ID 5 to 200 of inverter rated current 0 00 to 60 0 s Overload early warning Current detection Level Timer Current value of 5 to 200 of the inverter rated current 0 01 to 600 00 s Coefficient for constant feeding rate time 0 000 to 9 999 Coefficient for constant feeding rate time 0 000 to 9 999 Display coefficient A Display coefficient B 0 00 to 200 0 PID display coefficient A 0 00 to 200 0 0 00 to 200 0 PID display coefficient B 0 00 to 200 0 LED display filter 0 0 to 5 0 s A 37 LED display filter 0 0 to 5 0 s C Control functions FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Jump frequency 0 to 400 Hz Hysteresis 0 to 30 Hz Jump frequency Hysteresis 0 to 400 Hz 0 to 30 Hz Multistep frequency setting 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Multi frequency zx 0 00 to 400 0 Hz Timer operation 0 Inactive 1 Active operation 0 Disable 1 Enable Pattern operation Stage 1 0 00 to 3600 s With C21 1 set t
68. 0 assigned to FWD Bit 1 assigned to REV Bit 13 XF and bit 14 XR Programmable bits equivalent to the terminal inputs FWD and REV In the block diagram all of these are denoted as operation commands The data setting for function code E98 to select the function of terminal FWD and E99 of REV determine which bit value should be selected as the run command If bits 13 and 14 have the same setting to select the function of FWD or REV the output of bit 13 14 processor logic will follow the truth table listed in Figure 4 2 If either one of bits 13 and 14 is ON 1 as a logic value the OR logic output will make the enable communications link command LE turn on This is the same as with bit 0 and 1 Ifrun commands FWD and REV are concurrently turned on then logic forcibly makes the internal run commands FWD and REV turn off e Ifyou set data 1 or 3 up to the function code H96 STOP key priority Start Check to make the 69 key priority effective then depressing the 69 key forcibly turns off the internal run commands FWD and REV In this case the generator automatically replaces deceleration characteristics of the inverter for that of the linear deceleration regardless of the setting of H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern Ifthe reference frequency is lower than the starting frequency F23 or the stop frequency F25 then the internal run commands will be finally turned off according to the output of run decision logic and
69. 0 to 100 of rated current Braking transistor Built in Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type 9 Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling S Weight Mass Ibs kg 1 3 0 6 1 3 0 6 1 5 0 7 1 8 0 8 3 7 1 7 3 7 17 5 1 2 3 7 5 3 4 7 9 3 6 13 5 6 1 15 7 7 1 la 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 230 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load a v m Q a S en o Z 77 5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 6 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option M lt V Min volt 79 olene mee o0 coe vase CO Min Vola oY ce pag ed Three phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 460 V Item Specifications
70. 10 24 260 Power supply voltage Inverter type FRNO15E1S 2U FRNO20E1S 2U FRNO15E1S 4U FRNO20E1S 4U Three phase 230 V Three phase 460 V 8 25 8 5 2 Standard keypad Unit inch mm 2 03 51 44 0 53 13 5 3 12 79 2 2 71 68 8 F 2 3 12 79 2 N S 020 EE x 52 2 71 68 8 z 1 1 Coe 2 01 51 05 0 58 l S g S 2 2XM3 hz J e z L i 1 77 45 los a be Dimensions of panel cutting viewed from A For remote operation or panel wall mounting The keypad rear cover should be mounted 8 26 8 6 Connection Diagrams 8 6 Connection Diagrams 8 6 1 Running the inverter with keypad The diagram below shows a basic connection example for running the inverter with the keypad Note 1 7 P DCR CM THR Note 4 Note 2 ils BS MCCB or 4 3 M a does Power P1 P DB N Three phase x Lu LUR U single phase Motor 200 to 240 V x L2 S IV 50 60 Hz 7 Pi or three phase __ _ L3 T ii 380 to 480 V L ea 50 60 Hz Sw3 Grounding PE ec ce Grounding terminal 13 t3 PTC Q 12 Es 11 d Sws C1 C1 o SW7 9 A 11 v2 m Q m FMA 30C 9 4 FM o 308 Alarm output 4 Meter i 30 30A for any fault o D FMP z SW6 A FWD Y1 REV Y2 Transistor output CM SINK CMY
71. 190 jun gor epow SOP uonosjes epow Y9r le e uonoejeg 9f enje uonoejeq dois peopano eum uoneJedo L 1ZO m ava uonesjado Jou Jaw uolsioap uny ouenbeJj eAug 4q peubisse y jo enjeA ay sjndjno peubisse JON 440 440 NO NO NO NO indino vM L Iq S10sse90Jd y Iq EL HA 90S 104 B1Ge YIL 86 663J NO 2 S isu s ua 66 8634 NO Aza WX viu O Oo GM 3X erua Q 34 BE uondo snq pjer4 jueuidinbe soH 86 863 J NO orpexd zina 8019 Z 08H ow Pex LL wg puewuoo 1340 OJepexd opua us i ae rt O ae jueuidinbe 1s0H ELTE gud u AS z sersu d A334 puewwoo dO4S dois 0 62104 yui sng ze azul bua uonoun ul suoneolunuuuo puewwoo uny NO A33 ava pue NO GWH 3 4430 01 pe2104 31 Snq pjey Jo Ggp Sal BIA yu suoneorunuiuuoo ejqeu3 TO OF 0 AagM GMH poy w uogesado qIH uonejedo aum ejqeu3 Qype zya S Z OEH 40 sx 918 Z 86 J 440 px sug ex vid ex e ud 9 1HF 4 juawidinba soH Lx z ua 2 L 8919 OEH 10 Sgp S uod apr E Z 96 1 440 ped ey prepues lama oud A AJY essences UNY AM4 pJenuoj uny uonooJlp Bunejor ul PIOH ped ey 606 ped ex peigesip piod uonounj BIniN uonejedo BuibBof 10 Apeay F
72. 2 No load current Motor 1 R1 A21 Motor 2 R1 Motor 1 X A22 Motor 2 X P06 through P08 and P12 specify no load current R1 X and rated slip frequency respectively Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning automatically sets these parameters E No load current P06 Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer W R1 P07 Enter the value calculated by the following expression RI R1 Cable R1 x 100 96 V 3x1 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Ratedcurrent of the motor A m X P08 Enter the value calculated by the following expression _ X14 X2x XM X2 XM Cable X X f V GBI x 100 where X1 Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary 2 XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A E Rated slip frequency P12 Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression and enter the converted value Note The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value Synchronous speed Rated speed Synchronous speed Rated slip frequency
73. 20 44 20 20 20 82 20 20 20 55 phase a leor Edu la 26 T 29 os T 38 Ss 20 139 9 0 460V 35 13 18 is rmoiseisau es 20 20 osi eo 35 as sso ss 20 20 24 20 meses eo 3s zs pss wo ss ss 5s eo os 20 30 08 1 4 FRNF25E1S 7U 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 3 3 2 0 2 0 2 0 1 5 Single hase 3 0 230v __1 _ FRNootets 7u 20 20 20 ea 20 20 20 o7 20 20 20 50 8 0 1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring without rack or duct 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires for 60 C 140 F 600 V class of polyethylene insulated HIV wires for 75 C 167 F and 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires for 90 C 194 F 6 4 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals Table 6 2 Cont for DC reactor braking resistor control circuits and inverter grounding 7 2 Recommended wire size mm Nominal DC pecu Braking resistor 4 Inverter groundin P g g g Deum med eter ype PC D eis voltage Pre Allowable temp 1 Allowable tempt 1 iren Allowable temp 1 Allowable temp 1 Current Allowable temp 1 Allowable temp 1 HP 6o c 75 c 90 C 6o c 75 c 90 C 60 c 75 c 9o c 6o c 75 c 90 C 140 F 167 F 194 F 140 gt 167 F 194 F 140 F 167 F 194 F 140 F 167 F 194 F 2 0 Three 2 FRNOO2E1S 2U 20 20 20 70 20 20 20 36 alee phase to 230V com 35 20 20 17
74. 20 mA DC is handled as 20 mA DC Analog setting 1 The frequency 1s commanded according to the external analog voltage input input voltage V2 function e 0to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID process command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 22 kQ Maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage larger than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC PTC thermistor 1 Connects PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor input for motor protection The figure shown below illustrates the PTC function internal circuit diagram To use the PTC thermistor you must change data of the function code H26 Analog input UU m Q I S J o Z 77 13 lt Control circuit gt Q e 10 VDC Resistor 1kQ Operation level C1 External alarm PTC thermistor Resistor 250 Q 11 Ye ov Figure 8 1 Internal Circuit Diagram The C1 function V2 function or PTC function can be assigned to terminal C1 Doing so requires setting the slide switch on the interface PCB and configuring the related function code For details refer to Setting up the slide switches on page 8 17 11 Analog common Common for analog input output signals 13 12 C1 and FM Isolated from termi
75. 3 3 5 4 Required power supply capacity kVA 6 0 3 0 4 0 7 Torque 95 2 150 100 Hi Torque 8 150 amp DC braking Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Braking level 0 to 100 of rated current Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking transistor i Built in kcal sy standards utsnec c22 2 o 14 ENSOITE iS Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type Cooling method Natural cooling j Fan cooling Weight Mass Ibs kg 13 06 13 06 1507 20 09 4 0 18 53 24 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor Oo m D O 2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 230 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 6 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used SNOI VOIJIO3dS 7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option 8 3 8 2 Common Specifications Output frequency Item Explana
76. 37 Limiting level for driving F41 Limiting level for braking F42 Control Mode Selection 1 V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface F43 Current Limiter Disable No current limiter works 9 39 Mode selection Enable at constant speed Disable during ACC DEC 2 Enable during ACC constant speed operation F44 Level 20 to 200 The data is interpreted as the rated output current of the inverter for 10096 F50 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 to 900 1 kWs Y Y Protection for Braking Resistor 999 Disable Sa id ca aa Discharging capability 0 Reserved F51 Allowable average loss 0 001 to 50 000 0 001 kW Y 0 000 bees LY 9 1 Function Code Tables E codes Extension Terminal Functions Default Code Data setting range S ls setting E01 Terminal X1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals X1 to X5 as listed below E02 Terminal X2 Function 1000 Select multi frequency E03 Terminal X3 Function 1001 Select multi frequency E04 Terminal X4 Function 1002 Select multi frequency E05 Terminal X5 Function 1003 Select multi frequency 1004 Select ACC DEC time 1006 Enable 3 wire operation 1007 Coast to a stop 1008 Reset alarm 1009 Enable extemal alarm trip 1010 R
77. 707 608 496 B HIV wires Maximum allowable temperature 75 C 167 F Table F 1 b Allowable Current of Insulated Wires Aerial wiring Wire size reference value 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 F 50 C 122 F 55 C 131 F 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 50 C 122 F mm up to 30 C lox0 91 lox0 82 lox0 71 lox0 58 lox0 40 lox0 63 lox0 57 lox0 49 lox0 40 Allowable current Wiring in the duct Max 3 wires in one duct A A A A 14 101 95 a a8 z 55 22 132 124 us 34 72 100 363 342 321 298 271 244 238 223 208 187 150 481 454 426 395 359 323 316 296 276 248 200 572 539 506 469 426 384 375 351 328 295 250 678 639 600 556 505 455 444 417 389 350 325 793 747 702 650 591 533 520 487 455 409 400 908 856 804 745 677 596 558 521 469 500 1027 968 909 842 766 690 673 631 589 530 2x100 606 571 536 497 452 407 397 372 347 313 2x150 802 756 710 658 598 539 526 493 460 414 2x 200 954 899 844 782 641 625 586 547 492 2 x 250 1066 1001 927 843 760 741 695 648 584 2x325 1245 1169 1083 985 888 866 812 758 682 2 x 400 1428 1341 1242 993 931 869 782 2 x 500 1613 1515 1403 982 883 A 18 App E Allowable Current of Insulated Wires M 600 V Cross linked Polyethylene Insulated wires Maximum allowable temperature 90 C 194 F Table F 1 c Allowable Current of Insulated Wires Allowable current Aerial wiring Wiring in the duct Max 3 wires
78. Analog input Offset control Input filter time constant Terminal 12 C31 C33 Terminal C1 C1 function C36 Terminal C1 V2 function C41 C33 C38 or C43 configures a filter time constant for an analog voltage current input at terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function respectively The larger the time constant the slower the response Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response speed of the machine load If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises increase the time constant Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Gain F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 C33 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Filter time constant C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Refer to the description of C31 C34 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Gain base point F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to the description of F18 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Polarity To use terminal 12 with an input 10 to 10 VDC set this function code data to 0 If C35 1 a minus component of the input will be regarded as 0 VDC inside the inverter Data for C35 Polarity Input range allowable to terminal 12 0 Bipolar 10 to 10 VDC 1 Unipolar 0 to 10 VDC 9 2 Overview of Function Codes C36 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Offset C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Refer to the description of C31
79. Co Ltd Inverter External potentiometer Figure 6 13 External Potentiometer Dimensions and Connection Example 6 23 ile m D o D LNAWdINOA WHsHdldad ONILOATAS 2 Multi function keypad Connecting the multi function keypad on a FRENIC Multi series inverter with an optional remote operation extension cable CB 5S CB 3S or CB 1S allows you to operate the inverter locally or remotely from the keypad in hand or mounted on a panel respectively In addition the multi function keypad can be used for copying function code data from a FRENIC Multi series inverter to other ones up to three inverters of function code data HE YER mon xq mye rn em ro 3 Extension cable for remote operation The extension cable connects the inverter with the keypad standard or multi function or USB RS 485 converter to enable remote operation of the inverter The cable is a straight type with RJ 45 jacks and its length is selectable from 16 9 3 and 3 3 ft 5 3 and 1 m Cable gig as k L A Table 6 13 Extension Cable Length for Remote Operation Type Length ft m CB 5S 16 5 CB 3S 9 8 3 CB 1S 3 3 1 6 4 Selecting Options 4 RS 485 communications card The RS 485 communications card 2 port is exclusively designed for use with the FRENIC Multi series of inverters other than with the standard port of the inverter and enables extended
80. E O 0 gt Q d m op 3 Deceleration time For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 2 To calculate the deceleration time check the motor deceleration torque characteristics for the whole range of speed in the same way as for the acceleration time 1 Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor Same as for the acceleration time 2 Calculate the minimum deceleration torque See Figures 7 5 and 7 6 Same as for the deceleration time 3 Calculate the deceleration time Assign the value calculated above to the equation 7 11 to calculate the deceleration time in the same way as for the acceleration time If the calculated deceleration time is longer than the requested time select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and calculate it again Load torque rz Ud cama LEE Load torque at T constant speed TuNc Speed gt oc gt Speed p5 5 4 Load torque at P ni p 7 constant speed Minimum deceleration Tu Ns torque Load torque Tt Torque 4 Minimum deceleration torque Torque Motor output torque zw Motor output torque zw Figure 7 5 Example Study of Minimum Figure 7 6 Example Study of Minimum Deceleration Torque 1 Deceleration Torque 2 Braking resistor rating For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 3 Braking resistor rating is classified into two types according to the braking periodic duty cycle 1 When the period
81. F11 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Overload detection level Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Thermal time constant F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Thermal time constant DC Braking 2 Braking starting frequency F20 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency DC Braking 2 Braking level F21 DC Braking 1 Braking level DC Braking 2 Braking time F22 DC Braking 1 Braking time Starting Frequency 2 F23 Starting Frequency 1 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 Control Mode Selection 2 F42 Control Mode Selection 1 Motor 2 No of poles P01 Motor 1 No of poles Motor 2 Rated capacity P02 Motor 1 Rated capacity Motor 2 Rated current P03 Motor 1 Rated current Motor 2 Auto tuning P04 Motor 1 Auto tuning Motor 2 Online turning P05 Motor 1 Online tuning Motor 2 No load current P06 Motor 1 No load current Motor 2 R1 P07 Motor 1 R1 Motor 2 X P08 Motor 1 X 9 102 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Motor 2 Slip compensation gain for driving P09 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving Motor 2 Slip compensation response time P10 Motor 1 Slip compensation response time Motor 2 Slip compensation gain for braking P11 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for braking Motor 2 Rated slip frequency P12 Motor 1 Ra
82. FRN001E1S 7U ACR2 15A 8 29 54 14 e FRN003E1s 70 ACR 3 7A 262 23 Note 1 Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following conditions The power supply is three phase 230 V 460 V 50 Hz with 0 interphase voltage unbalance ratio The power supply capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter The motor is a 4 pole standard model at full load 100 6 19 4 Output circuit filters OFLs Insert an OFL in the inverter power output circuit to Suppress the surge voltage at motor terminal This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge currents from the 460 V class series of inverters Suppress leakage current due to higher harmonic components from the inverter output lines This reduces the leakage current when the motor is connected by long power feed lines Keep the length of the power feed line less than 1300 ft 400 m Minimize radiation and or induction noise issued from the inverter output lines OFLs are effective noise suppression device for long wiring applications such as that used at plants Note Power supply voltage Three phase 230V Three phase 460V Three phase 460V Single phase 230V Use an ACR within the allowable carrier frequency range specified by function code F26 Otherwise the filter will overheat Table 6 11 Out
83. Factory setting value 4 E Code group Data protection 0 0to1 0 Fcode Freg and1 1 Vottag m T Pii Operation method KEYPAD operation Up or Down key Peode Maximum frequency Voltage input Terminal 12 0 to 10 DC ed Base frequency Current input Terminal C1 4 to 20mA DC Voltage input Terminal 12 and Current input Terminal C1 Jcode Rated voltage at base freqency 5 voltage input Terminal v2 0 to 10V DC ycode Acceleration time 1 UP DOWN control ocode Deceleration time 1 10 0 0 00 to 3500 s icode Torque boost 3 4 0 0 to 20 0 96 ucode Electronic thermal select 11102 boi Electronic thermal Level 22 50 0 00 to 2000 A Electronic thermal Thermal time 1 5 0 0 5 to 75 0 min Contents of chan Restart mode after momentary pa 1 0t05 E User definition Frequency limiter High 70 0 0 0to 120 0 Hz User definitio Frequency limiter Sees see Change Factory User definitio Bais for F01 F01 Frequency command 1 User definitio DC brake Startint E Code for commur DC brake Brakint Establishment range Oto7 5 code _ 10 KEYPAD operation Up or Down key M code DC brake Brakint 4 voltage input Terminal 12 0 to 10V DC W code Starting frequency 2 Current input Terminal C1 4 to 20mA DC X code Stop frequency Voltage input Terminal 12 and Current input Terminal C1 Z code Motor sound Cari 5 Voltage input Terminal V2 0 to 10V DC H Motor sound Sou UP DOWN control Comparison resull FMA terminal
84. I m um eiom Li y 1 12 Offset o 0 limiter I I 0 limiter I I Hardware Ct PTCthemistor 4 switch C1 function Mode selection SW7 C1 E59 0 H26 0 Ei eee 2 c1 O O 070 O Te 3 Pre o istor C37 C39 F18 C50 O limiter Hardware Ci Mode Switch C1 function i l SW7 V2 E59 1 s I o 0 limiter UPIDOWN control H27 Compe 5 ef Gain I Initial frequency setting LiT ED rar UP Level I command I UP UPI DOWN l DOWN control l command DOWN l a l oo gt D I O card O O D I O card l input terminal option QrO u 0 Pulse train PG card PG card input terminal option Standard keypad OFF if y98 1 3 RJ 45 port RS 485 or H30 24 5 8 Host equipment Oo Frequency command via communications OFF if y98 1 3 7 or H30 1 3 7 RS 485 2 Ty NI Host equipment communications 55 E 0 option card OFF if Last exu odd 253195 command 2 i to take effect Host equipment Field bus option card O UPIDOWN control Initial frequency setting PID control Dancer reference position UP command UP gt uP DOWN DOWN command y control DOWN Remote command SV Select multi frequency SS4 SS8 Dancer ed PID reference Gain Bias command via Position 3 communications a C08 s Multfrequency4 i x bs 1 C122 40 T Multi fr
85. Item Min Max Operation ON level OV 2V voltage SINK OFF level 22V 27V Operation ON level 22V 27V voltage SOURCE OFF level OV 2V Operation current at ON Input voltage is at 0 V AIDE Suae Allowable leakage 0 5 mA current at OFF PLC PLC signal power Connects to PLC output signal power supply Rated voltage 24 VDC Maximum 50 mA DC Allowable range 22 to 27 VDC This terminal also supplies a power to the circuitry connected to the transistor output terminals Y1 and Y2 Refer to Analog output pulse output transistor output and relay output terminals in this Section for more Digital input common Two common terminals for digital input signals These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals 11 s and CMY 8 11 2 m Q N S o Z 77 Classifi ya a 5 xs ob a Functions B Using a relay contact to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 8 5 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE Note To configure this kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW S Control circuit
86. L1A instead 9 89 mm Deceleration Mode H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF Data for H11 Function Normal deceleration The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration commands specified by H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern F08 Deceleration time 1 and E11 Deceleration time 2 Coast to stop The inverter immediately shuts down its output so the motor stops according to the inertia of the motor and machine and their kinetic energy losses Note When reducing the reference frequency the inverter decelerates the motor according to the deceleration commands even if H11 1 Coast to stop m2 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns off its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Data for H12 Function Disable An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Enable The current limiting operation is effective If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuat
87. Lower limit of PID process output J59 to J61 within detection width PID control Detection width of dancer position deviation PID alarm processor PID alarm PID ALM PID control Select alarm output PID control Upper level alarm AH PID control Lower level alarm AL Mv Speed Bit 1 PID control Select compensation of output ratio 1 Takes priority when the same function has been assigned by E61 E62 and E63 Terminal 12 gt Terminal C1 C1 function gt Terminal C1 V2 function 2 For details of the options refer to the instruction manual for each option Note S codes are communication related function codes Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details Figure 4 5 2 PID Dancer Control Block Output Stage 4 17 UJ r Q A z gt D E S n ui E Q O z Az Q E O O Figures 4 5 1 and 4 5 2 show block diagrams of the PID control block input and output stages respectively when the PID dancer control is enabled J01 3 The logic shown generates the Drive frequency command gt according to the various PID command such as the dancer reference position and its PID feedback the primary frequency command and their switching means Additional and supplemental information is given below For the primary frequency command the inverter disables the command loss detection and switching between the normal and inverse operation
88. MCCB inserted in the power supply side cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose For the purpose only it is recommended that you use an MC capable of turning the MC ON OFF manually When your system requires starting stopping the motor s driven by the inverter with the MC the frequency of the starting stopping operation should be once or less per hour The more frequent the operation the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor s used in the DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow It is recommended that terminal commands FWD REV and HLD for 3 wire operation or the keypad be used for starting stopping the motor At the output side Note Insert an MC in the power output side of the inverter in order to 1 Prevent externally turned around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals U V and W unexpectedly An MC should be used for example when a circuit that switches the motor driving power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines is connected to the inverter As application of the external current to the inverter s secondary output circuits may break the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors IGBTs MCs should be used in the power control system circuits to switch the motor drive power supply to the commercial power lines after the motor has come to a complete stop Also ensure that voltage 1s never mistakenly applie
89. Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz ep U 9 8 m s 9 to less than 20 Hz C 2 m s 20 to less than 55 Hz Q d 1 m s 55 to less than 200 Hz 9 o Note 1 When inverters are mounted side by side without any gap between them 5 HP or less the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink in the inverter If the inverter is to be used in such an environment install it in the panel of your system or other dustproof containers Note 3 If you use the inverter in an altitude above 3300 ft 1000 m you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table 8 6 Table 8 6 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Altitude Output current derating factor 3300 ft 1000 m or lower 1 00 3301 to 4900 ft 1000 to 1500 m 0 97 4901 to 6600 ft 1500 to 2000 m 0 95 6601 to 8200 ft 2000 to 2500 m 0 91 8201 to 9800 ft 2500 to 3000 m 0 88 8 4 2 8 4 2 1 Storage environment Temporary storage Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed below Table 8 7 Storage and Transport Environments Item Specifications Storage 25 to 70 C 13 to 158 F temperature Places not subjected to abrupt temperature changes or Relative 5 to 95 2 condensation or freezing humidit
90. OFF for the normal inverter operation An alarm occurrence Inverter Turning alarm display on and No alarm displayed running status holding alarm status Stop and ready to run Alarm output i ALM ON H OFF Min 10 ms Reset alarm m Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop displays the alarm 7 77 and outputs the alarm relay for any fault ALM The THR command is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place Cp Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in a peripheral equipment 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Reagy for jogging JOG Function code data 10 This terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a work piece Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging Simultaneous keying 69 J keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command however it is restricted by the run command source as listed below When the run command source is the keypad F02 0 2 or 3 Input terminal command JOG 69 A keys on the keypad Inverter running state Ready for jogging Pressing these keys toggles Normal operation between the normal operation om and ready for jogging Ready for jogging When t
91. Option control circuit terminal Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals A O on the optional DI O interface card Refer to M Displaying control I O signal terminals on optional DI O interface card on page 3 25 for details PG pulse rate 1 Shows the A B phase pulse rate p s in quad A B phase frequency when the PG interface is installed Displayed value Pulse rate p s 1000 PG pulse rate 1 Z phase Shows the pulse rate p s in Z phase when the PG interface is installed PG pulse rate 2 Shows the A B phase pulse rate p s of the second PG A B phase in quad frequency when two PG interfaces are installed Displayed value Pulse rate p s 1000 PG pulse rate 2 Z phase Shows the second PG pulse rate p s in Z phase when two PG interfaces are installed 3 3 Programming Mode m Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of control I O signal terminal may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal display e Display I O signal status with ON OFF of each LED segment As shown in Table 3 15 and the figure below each of segments a to g on LEDI lights when the corresponding digital input terminal circuit FWD REV X1 X2 X3 X4 or X5 is closed it goes off when it is open Segment a and b on LED3 light when the circuit between output terminal Y1 or Y2 and terminal CMY and do not light when the circuit is open Segment a on LED4
92. Slip compensation gain for driving Rated slip frequency Pd X Braking we Figure 4 3 1 Control Block Input Stage 4 4 Control Block Power Rectifier DC link bus p m Cooling fan Motor Cooling fan Gate drive circuit Output cuani ON OFF lu Iv Iw control ID Instantaneous overcurrent limiting Mode selection cooling fan ON OFF O control Alarm 70 to OEF Output Current lu Iv Iw Current limit level Maximum frequency 1 4 Base frequency 1 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F06 Maximum output voltage 1 9 Torque boost 1 37 Load selection Auto torque boost Auto saving operation 1 Control mode selection 1 frequency 850 Non linear V f pattern 1 Frequency High Voltage Edc FE Non linear V f pattern 1 Frequency DC link bus F15 Voltage 2 phase voltage Deceleration 3 phase characteristics converter PWM processor Output current fluctuation suppression gain for motor 1 Motor 1 e i Rated capacity fluctuation Rated current suppressor Motor sound Carrier frequency ctm F26 Low limiter Frequency F26 Carrier Lower limiting limiter F27 frequency frequency Low DC braking 1 Tone Braking r response mode Cancel if H98 0 Hardware l DC braking 1 Voltage current
93. Three phase 230 V 2 to 3 HP Three phase 230 V 2 to 3 HP Three phase 460 V 1 2 to 3 HP Three phase 460 V 1 2 to 3 HP nfv valen jeu culx pap pap pa auae n epa papa pps ra aja ra ro ou oou pa n pop es junjus in v v v Jes Dr NAME um X Ae V E E n V Single phase 230 V 1 HP ual jan v v v es oo ptm S m ctim n mimi eae A 24 App F Replacement Information Three phase 230 V 5 HP Three phase 230 V 5 HP Three phase 460 V 5 HP Three phase 460 V 5 HP ny rafal cus papa pape ea no Pup pa ra p pe ESSE sexes Fee eT a ee C RR AREE eee ee V Single phase 230 V 2 to 3 HP edp nre e PST TT Te V Three phase 230 V 7 5 to 10 HP Three phase 230 V 7 5 to 10 HP Three phase 460 V 7 5 to 10 HP Three phase 460 V 7 5 to 10 HP pine jon pa popa pps a kajesppe n FORO po se LEE VU Direction of wire guide A 25 F 3 Function codes This section describes the replacement information related to function codes that are required when replacing the conventional inverter series e g FVR E9S and FVR E11S with the FRENIC Multi series It also provides the conversion table for the torque boost setting FVR E9S vs FRENIC Multi F Fundamental functions FVR E9S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S Data protection 0 The data can be changed 1 The data cannot b
94. V 8 to 15 400 50 60 Hz Three phase 380 to 480 V 0 75 to 15 400 50 60 Hz Three phase 380 to 480 V 400 50 60 Hz 8 to 15 6 4 Selecting Options Inverter Output circuit filter OFL Figure 6 11 External View of Output Circuit Filter OFL and Connection Example ie m D A D LNAWdINOA IVH43HdIHY3d 9NILO3 TIS 6 21 5 Zero phase reactor for reducing radio noise ACL An ACL is used to reduce radio frequency noise emitted by the inverter An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation for the power supply lines inside the inverter Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 66 ft 20 m insert an ACL to the power supply lines if it is more than 66 ft 20 m insert it to the power output lines of the inverter Wire size is determined depending upon the ACL size I D and installation requirements z Fi pa x z wo g N pd 3 5 2 e 8 e w 4 3 74 95 MAX 2 40 22 3 2 5 5 E T 2 TIT 379 z s c I 3 Rs amp o e a ir E o 2 o c r 9 0 16 4 0 16 4 i ACL 40B ACL 74B F200160 Unit inch mm MCCB MC G Inverter With overcurrent protection Figure 6 12 Dimensions of Zero phase Reactor for Reducing Radio Noise ACL and Connection Example Table 6 12 Zero phase Reactor for Reducing Radio Noise ACL
95. ae temp 1 HP m Rr Kg ETE 60 a ce m ue mod md Fs 90 C s pedes pend a 20 20 2a 37 29 28 28 48 2 0 mee 2 frwonzeisav 20 er ero 20e zot 38 lors sore phase 3 FRNOOSE1S 2U 20 20 20 102 20 20 20 to to 280v L eoe p zs pps pz pz 29 25 an Exc 25 125 1 29 3 5 ES o rns pus piao eo ms 2s 28 48 5 8 0 ia Fanrsoetsau 20 20 20 19 29 29 29 05 20 Three e ozs ozs o phase 5 FRNOOSETS 4U 20 20 20 89 20 20 to 460V 20 Fir 25 3 5 ua __ FRNF25E1S 7U 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 0 66 Ems aera AAE N ida we Bov L__1__lernoorers 7u 20 20 20 64 20 20 20 14 125 2 j FRNOOZEIS 7U 20 20 20 12 20 20 20 14 3 jrRNoosEtS 7U 20 20 20 18 20 20 20 17 1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring without rack or duct 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires for 60 C 140 F 600 V class of polyethylene insulated HIV wires for 75 C 167 F and 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires for 90 C 194 F LL If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ from those listed above select wires suitable for your system by referring to Table 6 1 and Appendices App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires 6 7 m r m O z 9 m D T T r m o c T m z 6 3 Peripheral Equipment 1 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB groun
96. all function code data to the factory defaults FMA and FMP terminals Select 0 Analog output FMA 1 Pulse output FMP A 28 Analog output FM Mode selection 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA 2 Output in pulse FMP FVR E9S App F Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S FMA terminal Function 0 Output frequency 1 Output current 2 Output torque 3 Load factor Analog output FM Function 0 Output frequency 1 before slip compensation 2 Output current 4 Output torque 5 Load factor FMP terminal Pulse rate amplifier 10 to 100 Analog output FM Pulse rate 25 to 6000 p s Pulse rate at 100 output Maximum frequency setting x FVR E9S s data Terminal X4 Function 0 RT1 function 1 Terminal X4 function 2 VF2 function 3 HLD function Terminal X4 function 4 Select ACC DEC time RTT 3 Select multi frequency SS8 12 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 6 Enable 3 wire operation HLD Multi frequency 8to 15 0 00 to 400 Hz Multi frequency 8to 15 0 00 to 400 00 Hz Frequency command filter 0 02 to 5 00 s Analog Input adjustment for 12 Filter time constant 0 02 to 5 00 s Analog Input adjustment for C1 Filter time constant 0 02 to 5 00 s Timer operation time Di
97. all the alarms available in the system Data for J11 Absolute value alarm Description While PV AL or AH PV PID ALM is ON l PID feedback PV PID control PID control Lower level Upper level alarm AL alarm AH J13 J12 Absolute value alarm with Hold Same as above with Hold Absolute value alarm with Latch Same as above with Latch Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch Same as above with Hold and Latch Deviation alarm While PV lt SV AL or SV AH lt PV PID ALM is ON PID control PID control Lower level Upper level alarm AL alarm AH J13 212 PID feedback PV PID command value SV 9 112 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Data for J11 Description Deviation alarm Same as above with Hold with Hold Deviation alarm Same as above with Latch with Latch Deviation alarm Same as above with Hold and Latch with Hold and Latch Hold During the power on sequence the alarm output is kept OFF disabled even when the monitored quantity is within the alarm range Once it goes out of the alarm range and comes into the alarm range again the alarm is enabled Latch Once the monitored quantity comes into the alarm range and the alarm is turned ON the alarm will remain ON even if it goes out of the alarm range To release the latch PRA perform a reset by using the key or turning the RS
98. and the torque boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point Note Output voltage V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 c tnn t 00060 F05 Increased output voltage using torque boost 1 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Torque boost 1 F09 Output frequency 0 Non linear V f Base Hz pattern 1 frequency 1 Frequency H50 F04 Auto torque boost This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of the motor Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 Note When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 0 or 1 9 20 9 2 Overview of Function Codes W Auto energy saving operation This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to
99. assign terminal commands to digital input terminals X1 to X5 a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Deceleration Time for Forced Stop Assigning the Force to stop command STOP to a digital input terminal data 30 and turning it ON decelerates the inverter output to stop in accordance with the H56 data When the output has stopped the inverter enters an alarm stop state with alarm 7 5 displayed UPIDOWN Control Initial frequency setting H61 specifies the initial reference frequency to be applied at startup of UP DOWN control that increases or decreases the reference frequency with the UP DOWN terminal command For details refer to function codes E01 to E05 that assign terminal commands to digital input terminals X1 to X5 Low Limiter Mode selection F15 Frequency Limiter High F16 Frequency Limiter Low For how to set up this function code data refer to the descriptions of F15 and F16 Low Limiter Lower limiting frequency H64 specifies the lower limit of frequency to be applied when the current limiter torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload prevention control is activated Normally it is not necessary to change the lower limit of frequency Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions F42 Control Mode Selection 1 A40 Slip Compensation 2 Operating conditions For details about the setting of slip compensation 1
100. capacitor as the DC power to be inverted to AC power Deceleration time Period during which an inverter slows its output frequency down from the maximum to 0 Hz Related function codes F03 F08 E11 and H54 Digital input Input signals given to the programmable input terminals or the programmable input terminals themselves A command assigned to the digital input is called the terminal command to control the inverter externally Refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 3 1 functions Terminal Electronic thermal overload protection Electronic thermal overload protection to issue an early warning of the motor overheating to safeguard a motor An inverter calculates the motor overheat condition based on the internal data given by function code P99 A39 about the properties of the motor and the driving conditions such as the drive current voltage and frequency External potentiometer A potentiometer optional that is used to set frequencies as well as built in one Fan stop operation A mode of control in which the cooling fan is shut down if the internal temperature in the inverter is low and when no operation command is issued Related function code H06 Frequency accuracy stability The percentage of variations in output frequency to a predefined maximum frequency Frequency limiter Frequency limiter used inside the inverter to control the internal drive frequency in order to keep the motor speed within the spec
101. code system in Programming mode Power ON Programming mode Menu driven Quick Setup Menu 0 Running mode Data Setting Menu 1 Data Checking Drive Monitoring Maintenance Info Alarm Info Figure 3 3 Menu Transition in Programming Mode 3 11 Oo m D 9 wo QIVdA3 AHL ONISN NOLLVH3dO Bi Selecting menus to display The menu driven system allows you to cycle through menus To cycle through necessary menus only for simple operation use function code E52 that provides a choice of three display modes as listed below The factory default E52 0 is to display only two menus Menu 0 Quick Setup and Menu 1 Data Setting allowing no switching to any other menu Table 3 8 Keypad Display Mode Selection Function Code E52 Data for E52 Mode Menus selectable Function code data editing mode factory default Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 1 Data Setting Function code data check mode Menu 2 Data Checking Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 Pressing the J V key will cycle through the menu With the S key you can select the desired menu item Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display will return to the first menu item 3 3 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 0 Quick Setup in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of function codes specified in Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Function Code T
102. comes ON when a difference between the output frequency before the torque limiting and the reference frequency comes to within the frequency arrival hysteresis width E30 and then the frequency arrival delay time E29 has elapsed Refer to the descriptions of E29 and E30 E Inverter output limiting with delay JOL2 Function code data 22 Ifthe inverter enters any output limiting operation such as output torque limiting output current limiting automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload stop hit mechanical stop it automatically activates the stall free facility and shifts the output frequency When such an output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more this output signal comes ON This signal is used for lessening the load or alerting the user to an overload status with the monitor m Auto resetting TRY Function code data 26 This output signal comes ON when auto resetting is in progress The auto resetting 1s specified by H04 and H05 Auto reset Refer to the descriptions of H04 and H05 for details about the number of resetting times and reset interval m Heat sink overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action before an overheat trip 4 actually happens This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the overheat trip 77 temperature min
103. communications link Disable For the processing of communications errors refer to y02 and y12 m Response interval y09 and y19 y09 and y19 specify the latency time after the end of receiving a query sent from the host equipment such as a PC or PLC to the start of sending the response This function allows using equipment whose response time is slow while a network requires quick response enabling the inverter to send a response timely by the latency time setting Data setting range 0 00 to 1 00 s Host equipment Query Inverter T1 Response T1 Latency time a where a is the processing time inside the inverter This time may vary depending on the processing status and the command processed in the inverter For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual When setting the inverter with FRENIC Loader pay sufficient attention to the performance and or configuration of the PC and protocol converter such as RS 485 RS 232C communications level converter Note that some protocol converters monitor the communications status and switch the send receive of transmission data by a timer Note m Protocol selection y10 y10 specifies the communications protocol Data for y10 Protocol for the standard RS 485 port MALTS Seal Specifying FRENIC loader to connect to ba EE the inverter can only be made by y10 FRENIC Loader protocol Select FRENIC Loader y10 1 Fuji general purp
104. e Liz External alarm e EF Data save error due to WIT undervoltage e 717 Inverter overheat 8 f F RS 485 communication error Lui Motor protection PTC thermistor option RE CES cit Overheating of braking resistor ae 7 Hardware error oT frm Mock alarm ri PG disconnection Running or trip mode Trip history Saves and displays the last 4 trip factors and their detailed description Refer to Section 8 7 Protective Functions Environment Protection Refer to Section 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment 8 7 o 9 m Q I S d o Z 27 8 3 Terminal Specifications 8 3 4 Terminal functions Main circuit and analog input terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T or LI L L2 N Main circuit power inputs Functions Connect the three phase input power lines or single phase input power lines U VW Inverter outputs Connect a three phase motor P1 P DC reactor connection Connect a DC reactor DCR for correcting power factor DB Braking resistor Connect the braking resistor option Main circuit H NC DC link bus Connect a DC link bus of other inverter s An optional regenerative converter is also connectable to these terminals ec Grounding for inverter and motor Grounding terminals for the inverter s chassis or case and motor Earth one of the terminals and connect the grounding terminal of the
105. e key 1s turned ON or an alarm reset RST is input Enable communications link LE has been activated and the run command is active in the linked source Tuning error During tuning of motor parameters if the tuning has failed or r Yes detection has aborted or an abnormal condition has been detected in the tuning result the inverter stops its output RS 485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network Eri Yes communications via the RS 485 port designed for the keypad detecting a error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an error code r Data save error If the data could not be saved during activation of the Ert Yes during under undervoltage protection function the inverter displays the alarm voltage code RS 485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network Ec Yes communications via an optional RS 485 communications card detecting a error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an optional error code Retry When the inverter has stopped because of a trip this function allows the inverter to automatically reset itself and restart You can specify the number of retries and the latency between stop and reset Surge protection Protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear between one of the power lines for the main circuit and the ground Command loss Upon detecting a loss of a frequency
106. each bit Bit number Select life Judge the life judgment Function of DC link bus threshold of capacitor DC link bus capacitor Lower the Detect output Detect input carrier phase loss phase loss frequency automatically Data 0 Disable Use the Disable Disable Disable factory default Data 1 Enable Use the user Enable Enable Enable setting Example of Enable 1 Use the Disable 0 Enable 1 Enable 1 decimal factory default expression 0 19 9 100 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Conversion table Decimal to from binary Decimal o o joyoy o oyoyro T woo o oyosyo yo so c z O a O Z Q O Og m Q 9 101 9 2 6 A codes Motor 2 parameters A01 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 Maximum Frequency 2 F03 Maximum Frequency 1 Base Frequency 2 F04 Base Frequency 1 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 Maximum Output Voltage 2 F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 Torque Boost 2 F09 Torque Boost 1 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Select motor characteristics F10 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Overload detection level
107. for Motor 2 Select motor characteristics Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Overload detection level A07 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Overload detection level Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Thermal time constant A08 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 2 Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor inside the inverter F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics F11 specifies the overload detection current and F12 specifies the thermal time constant c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo f Note Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the Or Note overload early warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these characteristics data to these function codes To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set function code F11 to 0 00 E Select motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor shaft driven or separately powered cooling fan Data for F10 Function For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately p
108. ground to prevent noise propagation refer to Figure A 8 The shield braided wire of a shielded wire should be securely connected to the base common side of the signal line at only one point to avoid the loop formation resulting from a multi point connection refer to Figure A 9 The grounding is effective not only to reduce the risk of electrical shocks due to leakage current but also to block noise penetration and radiation Corresponding to the main circuit voltage the grounding work should be Class D 300 VAC or less grounding resistance 100Q or less and Class C 300 to 600 VAC grounding resistance 10Q or less Each ground wire is to be provided with its own ground or separately wired to a grounding point Connection terminals Metal conduit pipe Figure A 8 Grounding of Metal Conduit Pipe Figure A 9 Treatment of Braided Wire of Shielded Wire 2 Control panel The system control panel containing an inverter is generally made of metal which can shield noise radiated from the inverter itself When installing other electronic devices such as a programmable logic controller in the same control panel be careful with the layout of each device If necessary arrange shield plates between the inverter and peripheral devices App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise 3 Anti noise devices To reduce the noise propagated through the electrical circuits and the noise radiated from the main c
109. hexadecimal Notation Table 3 11 Running Status Bit Assignment Content when function code data is being written Notation Content under voltage limiting control Always 0 under torque limiting control Always 0 when the DC link bus voltage is higher than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is enabled when ready for run and frequency commands via communications link during braking 1 when an alarm has occurred when the inverter output is shut down during deceleration during DC braking during acceleration during running in the reverse direction under current limiting control during running in the forward direction Table 3 12 Running Status Display Bit Notation Binary Hexa decimal on the LED monitor LED4 B Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format 1 hexadecimal digit Table 3 13 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor LED3 LED2 LED1 Table 3 13 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion Hexadecimal 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 20 3 3 Programming Mode 3 3 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking Using Menu
110. in one duct Wire size reference value 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 F 50 C 122 F 55 C 131 F 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 50 C 122 F mm up to 30 C lox0 91 1ox0 82 lox0 71 lox0 58 lox0 40 lox0 63 lox0 57 lox0 49 lox0 40 A A A 2 0 21 3 5 49 47 45 29 5 5 66 63 59 46 44 39 8 0 82 78 74 57 54 48 14 118 113 107 82 79 70 38 228 218 208 197 186 174 152 145 137 129 60 305 292 279 264 249 234 203 195 184 173 402 384 363 3 0 100 420 40 34 363 ace 321 280 268 253 238 150 454 426 371 355 335 316 200 539 506 440 422 398 375 250 750 717 678 ex 6o 522 500 472 444 325 747 702 611 585 552 520 400 1005 961 908 856 804 700 670 633 596 2x100 571 536 467 447 422 397 2x150 888 848 802 756 618 592 559 526 2x200 1055 1008 954 899 844 735 703 664 625 2 x 500 1978 1894 1809 1711 1613 1515 1318 1262 1192 1122 T 9 App F Replacement Information When replacing Fuji conventional inverter series FVR E9S FVR E11S with the FRENIC Multi series refer to the replacement information given in this section F 1 External dimensions comparison tables Below is a guide that helps in using the comparison tables on the following pages Mounting area Allows comparing the mounting area required for the FRENIC Multi series Multi 96 with that for the conventional inverter series in percentage assuming the area for the FRENIC Mult
111. in the inverter s output secondary circuit An overcurrent trip will occur disabling motor operation Discontinuance of surge killer Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Reducing noise Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to satisfy EMC Directive Refer to Appendices App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise for details Measures against surge currents If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or operated under light load it is assumed that the surge current is generated by open close of the phase advancing capacitor in the power system Connect a DC reactor to the inverter Megger test When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter use a 500 V megger and follow the instructions contained in the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual Chapter 7 Section 7 5 Insulation Test Control circuit wiring length When using remote control limit the wiring length between the inverter and operator panel to 20 m or less and use twisted pair or shielded wire If long wiring 1s used between the inverter and the motor the inverter may Wiring length overheat or trip due to overcurrent because a higher harmonics current between inverter flows into the stray capacitance between each phase wire Ensure that the and motor wiring is shorter than 50 m If this length must be e
112. inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 6 Reading maintenance information 3 These function codes are for use with an optional multi function keypad P Current position Absolute position 9 12 9 1 Function Code Tables y codes Link Functions a Incre Data Default Refer to Code Data setting range Unit d D ment j copying setting page y01 RS 485 Communication Standard 1to 255 9 119 Station address y02 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alam 7 Trip with alarm after running for the period specified by timer y03 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If the retry fails trip with alam If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run vy v oz y03 Timer 0 0 to 60 0 o1 yo4 Baud rate 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps y05 Data length y06 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU yo7 Stop bits y08 No response error detection time 0 No detection 1 to 60 yoo Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 yi0 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol Y Y 1 1 FRENIC Loader protocol SX protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol Station address yi2 Communications error processing Immediately trip with alam
113. is for terminals 30A B C Segment a on LEDA lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A is short circuited ON and does not light when it is open Tip all bid input signals are OFF open segment g on all of LEDI to LED4 will blink Table 3 15 Segment Display for External Signal Information Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 Lt XF E dp XR RST No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to ll Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page o Q m o Z c Er Z I m A m lt gt s e Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal format Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3 16 An unassigned bit is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor in 4 hexadecimal digits to each With the FRENIC Multi digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bit 0 and bit 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X5 are assigned to bits 2 through 6 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited ON and is set to 0 when it is open OFF For example when FWD and X1 are on short circuited and all the others are off open 7 5 is displayed on LED4 to LEDI Digital output terminal Y1 and Y2 are assigned to bits
114. l I Delay time 1 H49 l P d Max 1 2 sec 1 Idling motor speed 4 I I presumed H I I i EE NN a P RN Auto search for idling motor speed to follow m H09 and STM terminal command Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting The combination of H09 data and the S TM state determines whether to perform the auto search as listed below Auto search for idling motor speed at starting Data Tor H09 For restart after momentary power failure F14 4 or 5 Bor nogal setup 0 Disable Disable Disable 1 Enable Enable Disable 2 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Auto search delay time H49 Auto search for the idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor retains residual voltage It is therefore necessary to leave the motor for an enough time for residual voltage to disappear H49 specifies that time 0 0 to 10 0 sec At the startup triggered by a run command ON auto search starts with the delay specified by H49 When two inverters share a single motor to drive it alternately coast to stop it and perform auto search every switching H49 can eliminate the need of the run command timing control The H49 data should be the same value as the H13 data Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time At the restart after a momentary power failure at the start by turning the termin
115. limiter integral hold reset signals are provided The PID output limiter and integral hold reset signals can also be used in cases where the inverter is used for dancer control B Operating signal trouble is avoided by the command loss detection function If frequency signals connected to the inverter 0 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA Multi speed signals communications etc are interrupted the missing frequency commands are detected as a command loss Further the frequency that is output when command loss occurs can be set in advance so operation can be continued even in cases where the frequency signal lines are cut due to mechanical vibrations of the equipment etc f Analog frequency command Command loss detection REF OFF fi Output frequency fi X E65 4 f1x0 1 zd Time Figure 1 17 B An overload stop function protects equipment from over operation If the load on equipment suddenly becomes great while controlled by the inverter the inverter can be switched to deceleration stop or to coast to stop operation to prevent damage to the equipment Detection Operation frequency Deceleration stop Coast to stop Figure 1 18 1 8 1 1 Features B Continuous equipment operation with overload avoidance control i9 m o 9 If the fans or pulleys are entangled with foreign material so as to increase the load and cause a sudden temperature rise in the inverter or if the ambient temperat
116. limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation If F43 2 the current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation Choose F43 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output current during constant speed operation m Mode selection F43 F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active Running states that enable the current limiter Data for F43 During acceleration During constant speed During deceleration Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable Disable m Level F44 F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated in ratio to the inverter rating CNote Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software it Note 3 A ene NS may cause a delay in control If you need a quick response specify a current limit operation by hardware H12 1 at the same time If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting Thetorque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the system Avoid concurrent
117. noise by inserting choke coils in series in the signal circuit or passing signal lines through ferrite core beads It is also effective to widen the signal base lines 0 V line or grounding lines 5 Other The level of generating propagating noise will change with the carrier frequency of the inverter The higher the carrier frequency the higher the noise level In an inverter whose carrier frequency can be changed lowering the carrier frequency can reduce the generation of electrical noise and result in a good balance with the audible noise of the motor under driving conditions 3 Table A 2 lists examples of the measures to prevent noise generated by a running inverter Noise prevention examples Table A 2 Examples of Noise Prevention Measures device Noise prevention measures 1 AM radio 2 AM radio When operating an inverter noise enters into an AM radio broadcast 500 to 1500 1 Install an LC filter at the power supply side of the inverter In some cases a kHz capacitive filter may be used as a simple method 2 Install a metal conduit wiring between the Power motor and inverter supply LC filter Capacitive filter Note Minimize the distance between the LC filter and inverter as short as possible within 3 3ft 1m lt Possible cause gt The AM radio may receive noise radiated from wires at the power supply and output sides of the inverter When operating an inverter no
118. of Function Codes 9 2 8 ycodes Link functions y01 to y20 RS 485 Communication Standard and option Up to two ports of RS 485 communications link are available including the terminal block option as shown below Function code Applicable equipment Standard RS 485 y01 through y10 Standard keypad Communications for Multi function keypad connection with keypad FRENIC Loader via RJ 45 port Host equipment Optional RS 485 y11 through y20 Host equipment communications card via No FRENIC Loader supported the terminal port on the card To connect any of the applicable devices follow the procedures shown below 1 Standard keypad and optional multi function keypad The standard keypad and optional multi function keypad allow you to run and monitor the inverter There is no need to set the y codes 2 FRENIC Loader Using your PC running FRENIC Loader you can monitor the inverter s running status information edit function codes and test run the inverters For the setting of y codes refer to function codes y01 to y10 For details refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual 3 Host equipment The inverter can be managed and monitored by connecting host equipment such as a PC and PLC to the inverter Modbus RTU and Fuji general purpose inverter protocol are available for communications protocols c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Modbus RTU is a protocol established by Modicon Inc Fo
119. optional multi function keypad 9 6 9 1 Function Code Tables E code continued Default Refer to Code Data setting range 5 setting page E98 Terminal FWD Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 9 43 terminals FWD and REV as listed below 9 69 E99 Terminal REV Function 1000 Select multi frequency 1001 Select multi frequency 1002 Select multi frequency 1003 Select multi frequency 1004 Select ACC DEC time 1006 Enable 3 wire operation 1007 Coast to a stop 1008 Reset alarm 1009 Enable extemal alarm trip 1010 Ready for jogging 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK 1014 Select torque limiter level TLZ TL1 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 1018 DOWN Decrease output DOWN frequency 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 1024 Enable communications link via LE RS 485 or field bus 1025 Universal DI U DI 1026 Enable auto search for idling motor STM speed at starting 1030 Force to stop STOP 1033 Reset PID integral and differential PID RST components 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 42 1042 Reserved 2 43 1043 Reserved 2 44 1044 Reserved 2 45 1045 Reserved 2 98 Run forward FWD 99 Run
120. or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 6 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option 9 Max voltage V Min voltage V Voltage unbalance x 67 IEC 61800 3 Three phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 8 2 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 3 Single phase 230 V Item Specifications Type FRN__ _E1S 7U F12 F50 Nominal applied motor HP 3 1 8 1 4 1 2 Rated capacity kVA 2 0 3 0 6 1 2 k Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function E Rated current A 4 eu i xa amp 0 7 1 4 2 5 6 Overload capability 150 of rated current for 1 min 20096 0 5 s Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Single phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz g Voltage frequency variations Voltage 10 to 10 Frequency 5 to 5 amp with DCR 14 20 35 a Rated current A T T k without DCR 1 8
121. output an alarm signal m Thermistor Mode selection H26 H26 selects the operation mode protection or alarm for the PTC thermistor as listed below Data for H26 Disable Enable When the voltage sensed by the PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level the motor protective function alarm 77 is triggered causing the inverter to enter an alarm stop state m Thermistor Level H27 H27 specifies the detection level expressed in voltage for the temperature sensed by the PTC thermistor Data setting range 0 00 to 5 00 V c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo The temperature at which the overheating protection becomes activated depends on the characteristics of the PTC thermistor The internal resistance of the thermistor will significantly change at the alarm temperature The detection level voltage is specified based on the change of the internal resistance PTC thermistor internal resistance A Rp2 Rp1 Temperature m Alarm temperature Suppose that the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature is Rp the detection level voltage V is calculated by the expression below Set the result V 2 to function code H27 250xRp 250 R 250 R 1000 SFR Wo x10 V Connect the PTC thermistor as shown below The voltage obtained by dividing the input voltage on terminal C1 with a set of internal resistors is compared with the detection level voltage
122. same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times Figure 8 2 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 8 3 Example of Electric Noise Reduction 8 10 Digital Input Terminals Digital input Digital input 1 Run forward command Run reverse command 8 3 Terminal Specifications Functions 1 Various signals such as coast to stop alarm from external equipment and multi frequency commands can be assigned to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV by setting function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 For details refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 2 Overview of Function Codes 2 Input mode i e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the internal slide switch Refer to Setting up the slide switches on page 8 17 3 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD or REV If the logic value for ON of the terminal X1 is 1 1n the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa 4 The negative logic system never applies to the terminals assigned for FWD and REV Digital input circuit specifications lt Control circuit gt 24 VDC IPLC j li Q kJ ow l SIME Photocoupler pA eT swt eee pt I l SOURCE AK Da i X1 to X5 iro Ene AL FWD REV Figure 8 4 Digital Input Circuit
123. short time the output torque is 150 for one minute when torque vector control is enabled At that time the motor cooling characteristics have little effect on the output torque Curve c shows an example of the torque characteristic when one class higher capacity inverter is used to increase the short time maximum torque In this case the short time torque is 20 to 30 greater than that when the standard capacity inverter is used 3 Starting torque around the output frequency O Hz in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 The maximum torque in a short time applies to the starting torque as it is 7 2 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 4 Braking torque Curves d e and f in Figures 7 1 and 7 2 In braking the motor kinetic energy is converted to electrical energy and regenerated to the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor of the inverter Discharging this electrical energy to the braking resistor produces a large braking torque as shown in curve e If no braking resistor is provided however only the motor and inverter losses consume the regenerated braking energy so that the torque becomes smaller as shown in curve d When an optional braking resistor is used the braking torque is allowable only for a short time Its time ratings are mainly determined by the braking resistor ratings This manual and associated catalogs list the allowable values kW obtained from the average discharging loss and allowable values kWs obtained
124. signals Since it is removable wiring operations are simple Figure 1 11 All types and variations of interface board are available as options available soon Optional interface boards have the same dimensions as the standard interface board supplied with the inverter so it is possible to meet optional specifications using the same installation space as with standard specification models 1 5 B A multi function keypad which enables a wide variety of operations is available A multi function keypad is available as an option This keypad features a large 7 segment LED with five digits and large backlit liquid crystal panel Its view ability is high and guidance is displayed on the liquid crystal panel therefore operations can be conducted simply A copy function is included Figure 1 12 B Inverter support loader software is available On sale soon Windows compatible loader software is available to simplify the setting and management of function codes RS 485 communication RJ 45 connector Personal computer USB RS 485 converter T f made by System gt E i Sacom Sales Corp B i USB cable that comes with the converter Figure 1 13 B Simulated failure enables peripheral device operation checks The inverter has the function for outputting dummy alarm signals enabling simple checking of sequence operations of peripheral devices from the cont
125. status Occurence of 5e T Current alarm code FP an alarm 69 E HET Press these keys if an alarm has occured Most recent alarm code E g Loue 2nd recent alarm code E 3rd recent alarm code g Eg 1 The speed monitor allows you to select the desired one from the seven speed monitor items by using function code E48 2 Applicable only when PID control is active J01 1 2 or 3 3 The Timer screen appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 4 Applicable only when the full menu mode is selected E52 2 Figure 3 2 Transition between Basic Screens in Individual Operation Mode 3 2 3 2 Running Mode 3 2 Running Mode When the inverter is turned on it automatically enters Running mode in which you can 1 Monitor the running status e g output frequency and output current 2 Configure the reference frequency and other settings 3 Run stop the motor and 4 Jog inch the motor 3 2 1 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the eleven items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned on the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed Press the G5 key to switch Fun between monitor items For details of switching the monitor item by using the amp key refer to Monitor of running status in the Running mode in Figure 3 2 Table 3 1 Monitoring Items Display sample on LED indi
126. switched from the drive frequency command generator block to the PID frequency command generator block PID process control block diagram Manual speed command O Frequency command 4 PID remote command PID processor PID feedback 9 104 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Dancer control block diagram Fixed roll Fixed roll Rotation speed control Position Upper limit Position data 3 ex 0 Vto 10V Potentiometer Position Reference Position Lower limit The inverter controls the line speed with reference of the dancer roll position Speed command a Frequency command i Primary command PE Es Upper limit PID remote command PID UYY Dancer reference position processor 7 Lower limit PID feedback Dancer position feedback L Refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 4 Section 4 5 PID Process Control Block and Section 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block m Mode Selection J01 J01 selects the PID control mode Data for J01 Function Disable Enable Process control normal operation Enable Process control inverse operation Enable Dancer control Using J01 enables switching between normal and inverse operations against the PID control output so you can specify an increase decrease of the motor rotating speed to the difference error component between the commanded input and feedback amo
127. switching switching is not available while a motor is running Base frequency rated current torque boost electronic thermal and slip compensation can be set as data for the secondary motor The second motor constants can be set in the inverter Auto tuning possible The presence of digital signal in a device externally connected to the set terminal can be Universal DI sent to the master controller Universal AO The output from the master controller can be output from the terminal FM The motor speed can be detected with the pulse encoder and speed can be controlled Speed control When the optional PG interface card is installed Positioning control Only one program can be executed by setting the number of pulses to the stop position and deceleration point When the optional PG interface card is installed Rotation direction control Select either of reverse or forward rotation prevention 8 6 Indication Item Running stopping 8 2 Common Specifications Explanations Speed monitor output current A output voltage V torque calculation value input power kW PID command PID feedback amount PID output load factor motor output period for timer operation s Select the speed monitor to be displayed from the following Reference frequency Hz Output frequency 1 before slip compensation Hz Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Hz Motor speed s
128. the inverter decelerates to stop the motor The inverter is also equipped with the feature that if the frequency command specifies a reference frequency lower than that of specified by the lower limiter F16 and H63 the logic turn the run command OFF automatically Further more When the command loss detection is activated due to entering the abnormal frequency command if E65 0 the inverter turns the run command OFF For the timer driven operation once inputting a run command the timer starts countdown the inverter automatically turns OFF the internal run command after the time elapsed and releases the hold function in the keypad at same time When the overload stop facility is enabled and an overload is detected the inverter turns the run command OFF depending on data of the function code J65 To restart the inverter operation once turn the run command OFF and it ON again 4 7 UJ r Q A z gt D E S n T E Q O z Az r r O O 4 4 Control Block pas 4 Holding time imitation H08 Forward rotation prohibited o Maximum frequency 1 Base frequency 1 Rotational Starting frequency 1 direction L qum af 0 Stop frequency Holding time H28 0 5 min ACC DEC processor Acceleration deceleration pattern Deceleration mode Deceleration time for Droop control H56 forced stop Select Low limi
129. the above equation is an equivalent turning radius corresponding to speed v m s around the motor shaft The value F N in the above equations depends on the load type 2 Obtaining the required force F Moving a load horizontally A simplified mechanical configuration is assumed as shown in Figure 7 7 If the mass ofthe carrier table is W kg the load is W kg and the friction coefficient of the ball screw is u then the friction force F N is expressed as follows which is equal to a required force for driving the load where g is the gravity acceleration 9 8 m s Then the driving torque around the motor shaft is expressed as follows 60 0 W W g nu 2 Te Nym Ng TM N m 7 4 07 m r m O d z 0 O v d z 2 r z O O D 2 Z o Z lt mi E m E O 0 gt Q d m op y m s Wo kg Nw r min Ball Screw Figure 7 7 Moving a Load Horizontally 7 7 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation When an object whose moment of inertia is J kg m rotates at the speed N r min it has the following kinetic energy NUN AU EE D 7 5 2 60 To accelerate the above rotational object the kinetic energy will be increased to decelerate the object the kinetic energy must be discharged The torque required for acceleration and deceleration can be expressed as follows 2n dN N m 7 6 Bo a 7 6 This way the mechanical mom
130. the frequency to apply in jogging operation Data setting range 0 00 to 400 0 Hz For details about jogging inching operation refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function 9 72 9 2 Overview of Function Codes C21 Timer Operation C21 enables or disables a timer operation that is triggered by a run command and continues for the timer count previously specified with the 9 V keys The operating procedure for the timer operation is given below Data for C21 Function 0 Disable timer operation 1 Enable timer operation CTip Pressing the 69 key during timer countdown quits the timer operation Even if C21 1 setting the timer to 0 no longer starts the timer operation with the amp key Applying terminal command FWD or REV instead of the key command can also start the timer operation Operating procedure for timer operation example Preparation Set E43 data to 13 LED monitor to display the timer count on the LED monitor and set C21 to 1 Enable timer operation Specify the reference frequency to apply to timer operation When the keypad is selected as a frequency command source press the eS key to shift to the speed monitor and specify the desired reference frequency Triggering the timer operation with the amp key 1 While watching the timer count displayed on the LED monitor press the J V key to set the timer for the desired count in sec
131. the motor to minimize the total power loss of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving before actually apply this feature to your power system This feature applies to constant speed operation only During acceleration deceleration the inverter will run with manual torque boost F09 or auto torque boost depending on the F37 data If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a change in motor speed may be slow Do not use this feature for such a system that requires quick acceleration deceleration f Note Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the r base frequency is set at 60 Hz or higher you may get a little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the frequency becomes higher than the base frequency the auto energy saving operation will be invalid Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters PO1 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics A06 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection
132. the power supply apart from the MCCB or GFCI when necessary Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter THR function can be used by assigning code 9 external alarm to any of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV function code E01 to E05 E98 or E99 Frequency can be set by connecting a frequency setting device external potentiometer between the terminals 11 12 and 13 instead of inputting a voltage signal 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 5 VDC or 1 to 5 VDC between the terminals 12 and 11 For the control signal wires use shielded or twisted pair wires Ground the shielded wires To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible recommended 10 cm or more Never install them in the same wire duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring set them at right angles 8 29 o 9 m Q I S d o Z 27 8 7 Protective Functions The table below lists the name of the protective functions description alarm codes on the LED monitor presence of alarm output at terminals 30A B C and related function codes If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor remove the cause of activation of the alarm function referring to FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING LED Alarm Name Description monitor output di
133. the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias specified by F18 Gain Bias Analog input Function code Data setting Function code Data setting range 96 range 96 Terminal 12 C32 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 C34 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 F18 Bias 100 00 to 100 00 Terminal C1 C37 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 C1 function NEZ eae eT A HERREN MM C39 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 Terminal C1 C42 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 e Bias base V2 function p C44 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 0 00 to 100 00 E Inthe case of unipolar input Terminal 12 with C35 1 terminal C1 C1 function or terminal C1 V2 function As shown in the graph below the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 is determined by points A and B Point A is defined by the combination of the bias F18 and its base point C50 Point B by the combination of the gain C32 C37 or C42 and its base point C34 C39 or C44 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 that of C37 and C39 to C1 Cl function and that of C42 and C44 to C1 V2 function Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 or C42 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias base point C50 and gain base point C34 C39 or C44 assuming the full scale 10 VDC or 20 mA DC of analog input as 100 aa c z O a O Z Q O Og m
134. the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 9 3 c z O a O z Q O O m Qo F code continued Default Code Data setting range setting F29 Analog Output FM 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC Mode selection 2 Output in pulse 0 to 6000 p s F30 Voltage adjustment Oto 300 FMA F31 Function Select a function to be monitored from the followings 0 Output frequency 1 before slip compensation Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command SV PID output MV F33 Pulse rate 25 to 6000 FMP Pulse rate at 100 output LL Le LL 1440 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Variable torque load 9 18 Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 Constant torque load 9 37 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC F39 Stop Frequency 0 00 to 10 00 9 33 Holding Time 9 37 ONOARWNA oes ek Seek OnkRwoOoO F40 Torque Limiter 1 9
135. the starting frequency Restart mode after momentary power failure Disable restart Trip immediately Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power failure Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load Frequency limiter 0 to 400 Hz Frequency limiter 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Gain for frequency setting signal 0 0 to 200 0 Analog input adjustment for 12 Gain Analog input adjustment for C1 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 Bias frequency 400 to 400 Hz Bias Frequency command 1 Bias frequency x 100 maximum frequency DC break Starting freq Braking time 0 0 to 60 0 Hz 0 to 100 0 0 s DC brake inactive 0 1 to 30 0 s DC braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking time 0 0 to 60 0 Hz 0 to 100 0 00 Disable 0 1 to 30 00 s Starting frequency Holding time 0 1 to 60 0 Hz 0 0 to 10 0 s Starting frequency 1 Holding time 0 1 to 60 0 Hz 0 00 to 10 00 s Stop frequency 0 1 to 6 0 Hz Stop frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Motor sound Carrier freq Sound tone 0 75 1 to 15 kHz 0to3 Motor Sound Carrier frequency 0 75 1 to 15 kHz 0to3 FMA and FMP terminals Select 0 Analog output FMA function 1 Pulse output FMP function Analo
136. to 10 VDC Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function Voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN control DIO interface card option 12 PG interface card option RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV Terminal command FWD or REV RUN STOP keys on keypad forward Maximum Frequency 1 x 9 to 400 0 Base Frequency 1 25 0 to 400 0 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 230 V 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 460 V Maximum Output Voltage 1 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 230 V PT OOS jan teaa ouput an Rotate tage oreo Acceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start 0 00 to 3600 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the deceleration time requiring external soft start 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 Note This setting takes effect when F37 0 1 3 or 4 Frequency Command 1 Operation Method Deceleration Time 1 Torque Boost 1 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan Protection for Motor 1 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor
137. to braking resistor s terminals 2 and 1 To protect the motor from overheat without using the thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor configure the electronic thermal overload protection facility by setting F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss values listed below respectively Intermittent braking Brakino resistor Continuous braking Period L h Power 8 100 braking torque Period Less than suppl Inverter type Resistance 109s ine m Q Discharging Braking Allowable D Type Qty capability time average SB kWs s loss kW p FRNFI2EIS 2U al jiz 3 FRNF25EIS 2U 9 i DB0 75 2 100 FRNFSOEIS 2U 0 044 22 FRNOOIEIS 2U 17 45 0 068 18 Three FRNOO2EIS 2U eee re 34 0 075 10 phase FRNOO3EIS 2U l 33 30 0 077 7 230 V FRNOOSEIS2U DB3 7 2 33 37 20 0 093 FRN007EIS2U DB5 52 20 55 0 138 FRNOIOEIS 2U DB7 5 2 15 37 0 188 5 FRNOISEIS2U DBI1 2 10 55 10 0 275 FRNO20EIS 2U DB15 2 8 6 75 0 375 FRNFSOEIS 4U BUTS 20d 9 0 044 22 FRNOO1E1S 4U i 17 45 0 068 18 FRN002E1S 4U DBS wi 34 0 075 10 Three FRN003E1S 4U l 33 30 0 077 7 phase FRNOOSEIS 4U DB3 7 4 130 37 55 0 093 460 V FRNOO7E1S 4U_ DB5 5 4 80 55 0 138 FRNOIOEIS 4U DB7 5 4 60 38 0 188 5 FRNOISEIS 4AU DB11 4 40 55 10 0 275 FRNO20EIS AU DB15 4 344 75 0 375 FRNFI2EIS 7U 90 0 087
138. to provide accurate information in the handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual
139. voltages 5 ete edades dcum dran qi s Pte ea i ERR NU A 13 Countermeasures against surge voltages cccesccesecesecsecesecssecseecseeeseeseeeeceseenseensecaecaeeaeceeceenneeaes A 13 Regarding existing equipment cesserit iee ni dee deett He TR d Eb een A 14 Inverter Generating Lo88 ise neo teet tete tette it Aen Be A 15 Conversion from SI Units neci Orto ete UR ORTU CE ER OR EC ia A 16 Allowable Current of Insulated Wires sse ener ener eren A 18 Replacement Information eee eee eee eiie ite ie e see aS A 20 External dimensions comparison tables nennen A 20 Terminal arrangements and symbols essen eere A 23 Functi r codes s en recent E e e egeo Foret Pe Fee edet ueber EE A 26 Glossary xi Part 1 General Information Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Multi Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Multi This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC Multi series and the recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment Contents IDE m LP 1 1 1 2 ControlSystetm esee o Reo ORE Reo tete iste ele te ax t teen ete dite tede 1 11 1 3 Recommended Configuration inte eei Ee here ede ied e e teeters Rees 1 13 1 1 Features 1 1 Features i9 m o a Environment friendly B Complies with European regulations that limi
140. will cause the output current waveform to have a large amount of ripples As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80 or less of the rated current When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overload alarm With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled Refer to the description of H98 E Motor sound Tone F27 F27 changes the motor running sound tone This setting is effective when the carrier frequency set to function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor If the sound level is set too high the output current may become unstable or Note an dad es i mechanical vibration and noise may increase Also these function codes may not be very effective for certain types of motor 9 34 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Analog Output FM Mode selection Analog Output FM Voltage adjustment Analog Output FM Function Analog Output FM Pulse rate
141. y99 Link functions Functions for controlling communication o codes 027 to 059 Optional functions Functions for options Note Note The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details of the o codes refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option For the list of function codes subject to quick setup and their descriptions refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Function Code Tables E Function codes requiring simultaneous keying To modify the data for function code F00 Data Protection H03 Data Initialization H45 Mock Alarm or H97 Clear Alarm Data simultaneous keying is needed involving the 69 ON keys or 699 V keys E Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Some function code data can be changed while the inverter is running whereas others cannot Further depending on the function code modifications may or may not validate immediately For details refer to the Change when running column in Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Function Code Tables For details of function codes refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 1 Function Code Tables 3 13 O U m S O z c a Z I m A m lt 2 oO Figure 3 4 shows the menu transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup Power ON 1 Running mode eue Programming mode Menu List of function codes Function code data ui idus
142. 0 19200 bit s 9600 4800 2400 1200 8 bits 7 bits Even parity Odd parity 1 bit 2 bits No detection 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 No check 1 2 0 1 0 1to60s 0 00 to 1 00 s RS 485 Communication Standard Station address Communications error processing No response error detection Response interval 1 to 31 0 Immediately trip with alarm Trip with alarm Z after running for the period specified by timer yO3 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If the retry fails trip with alarm If it succeeds continue to run 3 Continue to run 0 0 to 60 0 s 3 19200 bps 9600 4800 2400 es 8 bits 7 bits None Even parity Odd parity 1 bit 2 bits No detection to 60s olo jm ol of 0 00 to 1 00 s Maximum temperature of heat sink Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Maximum temperature of heat sink Refer to Menu 5_03 Maximum effective current Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Maximum effective output current Refer to Menu 5 04 Main circuit capacitor lifetime Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor Refer to Menu 5 05 Cooling fan accumulated operation time Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Cumulative run time of cooling fan Refe
143. 0 and auxiliary frequency command 1 and 2 E60 to E62 as manual frequency commands and the command loss detection switching between the normal or inverse operation The multi frequency commands 1 2 and 3 are only applicable to the manual speed command Refer to Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block for explanations of common items For selecting analog input terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function as the PID process command source you need to set data up for function codes E61 to E62 and J02 The multi frequency command 4 C08 8 C12 and 12 C16 are only applicable to PID process command To switch the operation between normal and inverse the logic inverses the polarity of difference between the PID command and its feedback turning the INV command on off or setting data JO1 at 1 or 2 UJ r Q A z gt D E S n ui E Q O z Az Q E O O 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block LED monitor speed monitor tem Keypad operation Reference frequency gt 012 3 Motor speed in r min 1 O I Load shaft speed 4 O I n i 5 I Frequency o o command 1 onstant feeding Slo nS SS rate time commarid L Tu T i ra gt Q t 7TN ig t l Polarity n Polerity I
144. 0 V terminal of the power supply circuit in the detection unit of the overhead photoelectric relay and a frame of the overhead panel Photoelectric relay Frame of ceiling part 0 1pF Seen E panel 2 As a permanent measure move the 24 V power supply from the ground to the overhead unit so that signals are sent to the ground side with relay contacts in the ceiling part 1 The wiring is separated by more than 11 81inch 30 cm 2 When separation is impossible signals can be received and sent with dry contacts etc 3 Do not wire low current signal lines and power lines in parallel device electric Prox imity switch capaci tance type Table A 2 Continued Phenomena A photoelectric relay malfunctioned when the inverter was operated Inverter Power Distance of 131 ft 40 m supply line Amplifier Light Light Photoelectric emitting receiving relay part part lt Possible cause gt Although the inverter and photoelectric relay are separated by a sufficient distance but the power supplies share a common connection it is considered Noise prevention measures 1 Insert a 0 1 uF capacitor between the output common terminal of the amplifier of the photoelectric relay and the frame Light Light emitting receiving that conduction noise entered through the power supply line into the photoelectric relay A proximity switch malfunctioned Inverte
145. 0 and 1 Each bit is set to 1 when the terminal is short circuited with CMY and 0 when it is open The status of the relay contact output terminal 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and 0 when the circuit between 30A and 30C is open For example if Y1 is on Y2 is off and the circuit between 30A and 30C is closed then 77 is displayed on the LED4 to LEDI Table 3 16 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED Table 3 16 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format Bit Input terminal Output 30 terminal A B C Binary 0 0 0 0 Hexa decimal l l on the l l LED monitor LED3 LED2 LED1 No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to B Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control below m Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control Under communications control input commands function code S06 sent via RS 485 or other optional communications can be displayed in two ways with ON OFF of each LED segment and in hexadecimal format The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however
146. 000 kW During deceleration ED 96 i Allowable average loss KW 100 Motor rating KW 3 2 At a constant speed Allowable average loss kW eee x Motor rating kW 4 When the motor decelerates apply expressions 1 and 3 and when it runs at a constant speed expressions 2 and 4 The obtained data differs depending upon the motor s running state 9 2 Overview of Function Codes e 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions Terminal X1 Function E98 Terminal FWD Function Terminal X2 Function E99 Terminal REV Function Terminal X3 Function Terminal X4 Function Terminal X5 Function Function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable digital input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal logic system Active ON ANCAUTION In the case of digital input you can assign commands to the switching means for the run command and its operation and the reference frequency e g SS7 SS2 SS4 SS8 Hz2 Hz1 H7PID IVS and LE Be aware that switching any of such signals may cause a sudden start running or an abrupt change in speed A
147. 1 2 Control Systemic eo neo ee teste bee T UE Nee ER eds 1 11 1 3 Recommended Configuration eene en rennen enne nennen inrer nnns 1 13 Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks esee 2 1 2 2 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad sse 2 2 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes eese eee ee ch e eee tete eo ee eee see ocn 3 1 32 R nning Mode iode Mee tee HE cede iet henna dis MR a Aas E De p EUR ME Eds 3 3 3 2 1 Monitoring the running status sce eneit eene nee ener erinnern nnne nnns 3 3 3 2 2 Setting up frequency and PID commands ssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeneenenren enne nnns 3 4 3 2 3 Running stopping the motor eene nnne nnn nennen nnns 3 9 3 2 4 Jogging Operation ses Ree Maen CER eR gen T e ue Rl eee eR Ee deus 3 9 3 3 Programming Mode r a aa E A E a E a a a Enne en E a Eiran io riei 3 10 3 3 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup sssssssseeen 3 12 3 3 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting esssssssssssseseeeeneenenee 3 16 3 3 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking sessssseeee 3 17 3 3 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring sesesssesesssreeessssessreeessesersreserses 3 18 3 3 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking
148. 17 and DOWN command data 18 should be assigned to the digital input terminals X1 to X5 Enable the digital input of the binary coded decimal BCD code or binary data entered via the DIO interface card option For details refer to the DIO Interface Card Instruction Manual Enable the pulse train entered via the PG interface card option For details refer to the PG Interface Card Instruction Manual Note To input bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 set function xc code C35 to 0 Setting C35 to 1 enables the voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to 10 VDC as 0 V Terminal C1 can be used for current input C1 function or voltage input V2 function depending upon the settings of switch SW7 on the interface PCB and function code E59 n addition to the frequency command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link and multi frequency are provided Tip Using the terminal command HzZ Hz1 assigned to one of the digital input Tip terminals switches between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 Refer to function codes E01 to E05 Operation Method F02 selects the source that specifies a run command for running the motor c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Data for F02 Run Command Source Description Keypad Enables the fun 6o keys to run and stop the motor Ro
149. 2 1026 Auto resetting TRY 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH 1030 Service lifetime alarm LIFE 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 1036 Overload prevention control OLP 1037 Current detected ID 1038 Current detected 2 ID2 1042 PID alarm PID ALM 1049 Switched to motor 2 SWM2 1057 Brake signal BRKS 1080 1081 1082 Reserved for particular manufacturers 1099 Alarm output for any alarm 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 This output signal tells the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency It is also OFF when the DC braking is in operation If this signal is assigned in negative logic Active OFF it can be used as a signal indicating Inverter being stopped m Frequency arrival signal FAR Function code data 1 This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and reference frequency comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30 Refer to the descriptions of E29 and E30 m Frequency detected FDT Function code data 2 This output signal comes ON when the output fre
150. 2 20 20 20 41 25 12s 125 3 5 10 FRNOTOE1S 2U 14 0 5 5 3 5 35 3 20 20 20 6 1 ue 15 FRNotsE1S 2U 22 0 8 0 5 5 51 7 20 2 0 20 9 1 8 0 12 FRNF5OETS 4U 20 20 20 10 20 20 29 05 1 FRNodE1S4U 20 20 20 20 20 2 0 20 11 d Three 0 75 phase gt ERNOOSETS A 20 20 20 189 20 20 20 at to 460V 20 1 25 3 5 Tar mesa antee ras pes as 29 29 bar 1 4 FRAPS 7U 2 0 EE 20 20 20 20 20 Single 0 E sd a 2 0 ERNODTETS IU 2 0 2 0 2 0 64 20 2 0 2 0 14 pne 1 pa Frenoozets7u 2o 20 20 2 29 29 26 ia 3 FRNOOSES 7U 3 5 20 20 18 20 20 20 17 1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring without rack or duct 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires for 60 C 140 F 600 V class of polyethylene insulated HIV wires for 75 C 167 F and 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires for 90 C 194 F LL If environmental requirements such as power supply voltage and ambient temperature differ from those listed above select wires suitable for your system by referring to Table 6 1 and Appendices App F Allowable Current of Insulated Wires 6 5 m m O zi z 0 v m D T T r m o c T m z E If the internal temperature of your power control panel is 40 C 104 F or below Table 6 3 Wire Size for main circuit power input and inverter output Recommended wire size mm Nominal in circui i Power app
151. 3 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 30 1 56 10 20 14 91 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 60 2 35 8 67 10 66 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 6 10 3 00 6 55 11 26 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 9 20 4 85 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 15 0 7 70 5 79 11 22 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 22 2 10 7 5 09 13 66 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 29 0 12 5 4 50 14 70 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 42 0 17 6 3 78 15 12 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 55 0 20 0 3 24 16 37 18 50 to 21 99 67 0 21 9 2 90 17 00 22 00 to 30 00 78 0 25 1 2 70 16 05 460 V Example for FRN __E10 4U Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load R X Rated slip Ce qe one eee Tren P02 A16 TONO P03 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 22 0 20 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 10 0 35 0 27 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 20 0 65 0 50 12 61 13 63 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 20 0 78 10 20 14 91 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 80 1 18 8 67 10 66 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 3 10 1 50 6 55 11 26 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 4 60 2 43 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 7 50 3 85 5 79 11 22 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 11 0 5 35 5 09 13 66 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 Ta 14 5 6 25 4 50 14 70 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 21 0 8 80 3 78 15 12 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 27 5 10 0 3 24 16 37 18 50 to 21 99 34 0 11 0 2 90 17 00 22 00 to 30 00 39 0 12 6 2 70 16 05 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m When HP rating motors P99 1 or A39 1 are selected the motor p
152. 3600s Deceleration 0 01 to 3600 s time 1 Deceleration time 1 0 01 to 3600s Torque boost 1 0 Automatic torque boost Load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 1 1 Constant torque load 1 Variable torque load Torque boost 1 0 Load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 1 0 Variable torque load 2 Proportional torque load 3 to 31 Constant torque load Torque boost 1 Non linear V f pattern 1 Frequency A 26 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage Refer to the Torque Boost Conversion Table on the last page of this appendix for setting torque boost FVR E9S App F Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S FMA voltage output adjustment Analog output FM Voltage adjustment 65 to 10396 65 103 65 99 x FVR E9S s data No of poles of motor 2 to 12 even Motor 1 No of poles 2 to 22 even Coefficient for speed indication 0 01 to 200 0 Coefficient for speed indication 0 01 to 200 00 Motor sound adjustment Carrier frequency 0 1to 15 kHz Motor sound Carrier frequency 0 75 1 to 15 kHz Times of auto reset Auto reset Times Restart mode after momentary power failure 0 Inactive Trip and alarm when powe
153. 37 Single FRNF25E1S 7U 9 DBO 75 2 100 phase FRNFSOEIS 7U 0 044 22 230 V FRNOO1E1S 7U 17 45 0 068 18 FRNOO2EIS 7U DIAS 4i 34 0 075 10 FRNO003EIS 7U l 33 30 0 077 7 9 40 9 2 Overview of Function Codes 10 ED models Int ittent braki Bubsresdo Continuous braking pun 2r ie Power 8 9 100 braking torque Period Less than suppl Inverter type Resistance 100s ae i Q Discharging Braking Allowable Dut Type Qty capacity time average ED kWs s loss kW FRNF12E1S 2U 1000 100 FRNF25E1S 2U 500 75 DB0 75 2C 100 50 0 075 FRNF50E1S 2U 250 37 FRNOO1E1S 2U 133 20 Three FRN002E1S 2U 73 14 DB2 2 2C 40 55 0 110 phase FRN003E1S 2U 50 230 V FRNOOSEIS2U DB3 7 2C 33 140 75 0 185 FRNOO7E1S 2U DBS5 5 2C 20 55 20 0 275 i FRN010E1S 2U DB7 5 2C 15 37 0 375 FRNOISEIS 2U DB11 2C 10 55 10 0 55 FRNO20E1S 2U DB15 2C 8 6 75 0 75 FRNF50E1S 4U 250 37 DB0 75 4C 200 50 0 075 FRNOO1E1S 4U 133 20 FRNO002E1S 4U 73 14 DB2 2 4C 160 55 0 110 Three FRNOO3EIS 4U 50 phase FRNOOSE1S 4U DB3 7 4C 130 140 75 0 185 460 V FRNOO7EIS AU DBS5 5 4C 80 55 20 0 275 T FRNO10E1S 4U DB7 5 4C 60 38 0 375 n c FRNOISEIS 4AU DB11 4C 40 55 10 0 55 Z FRN020E1S 4U DB15 4C 34 4 75 0 75 7 FRNFI2EIS 7U 1000 100 E Single FRNF25E1S 7U 500 7
154. 5 0 20 0 3 25 16 37 18 50 to 21 99 67 0 21 4 2 92 16 58 22 00 to 30 00 78 0 25 1 2 70 16 00 460 V Example for FRN EILI 4U Motor capacity Nominal Rated od R X kW oM aye ll age P02 A16 KW p03 A17 PO6 A20 PO7 A21 POS A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 22 020 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 10 0 35 0 27 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 20 0 65 0 53 12 95 12 92 233 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 15 0 83 10 20 13 66 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 15 8 67 10 76 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 L5 6 55 11 21 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 22 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 5 79 11 25 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 5 28 1431 1 40 7 50 t0 10 99 7 5 4 50 14 68 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 3 78 15 09 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 3 25 16 37 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 2 92 16 58 0 87 22 00 to 30 00 2 70 16 00 0 90 9 81 Rated slip frequency Hz c z O a O Z Q O Og m 02 m When Fuji standard 6 series motors P99 3 or A39 3 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables 230 V Example for FRN EILI 2U Nominal Rated No load Rated slip applied current current frequency motor A A Hz kW Motor capacity kW P02 A16 P03 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 44 0 40 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 68 0 55 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 30 1 00 12 61 13 6
155. 5 O DB0 75 2C 100 50 0 075 oO phase FRNFSOEIS 7U 250 37 E 230 V FRNOOIEIS 7U 133 20 FRNOO2EIS 7U 73 14 DB2 2 2C 40 55 0 110 FRNO003E1S 7U 50 10 9 41 Calculating the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor and configuring the function code data When using a braking resistor other than the ones listed in the above table calculate data to be set to function codes according to the tables and expressions m Discharging capability F50 The discharging capability refers to kWs allowable for a single braking cycle which is obtained by the following expressions 1 Regeneration power during deceleration and 2 Regeneration power at a constant speed based on the braking time and motor rating Data for F50 Function Reserved 1 to 900 kWs Disable the electronic thermal overload protection facility During deceleration Discharging capacity KWs Braking time s Mater rating kW 1 At a constant speed Discharging capacity kWs Braking time s x Motor rating kW 2 m Allowable average loss F51 The allowable average loss refers to resistance allowable for motor continuous operation which is obtained by the following expressions 3 Regeneration power during deceleration and 4 Regeneration power at a constant speed based on the ED 96 and motor rating kW 0 000 Reserved 0 001 to 50 000 0 001 to 50
156. 7 e1 rofe fas re T22 Toza ss oe COOL e eaf ee ee e peffe pene es feefee efer r eo Te re ppm e en pes es opm ops e m e e rept tte i RAE A 22 App F Replacement Information F 2 Terminal arrangements and symbols This section shows the difference in the terminal arrangements and their symbols between the FRENIC Multi series and the replaceable inverter series FVR E9S vs FRENIC Multi FVR E9S FRENIC Multi Three phase 230 V 1 8 to 1 4 HP Three phase 230 V 1 8 to 1 HP owt Y1Y2 aln FM eia epe xd ERES axe xt xo xa xa eev Ri nec mmm prerana V UC R S TJPIPO Ul Vv W ec a Ea Poo OEG oc 0B U Three phase 230 V 1 2 to 5 HP Three phase 230 V 2 to M HP Three phase 460 V 1 2 to 5 HP Three phase 460 V 1 2 to 5 HP R IS TJPLIPPOJDBILUJ V M V Single phase 230 V 1 8 to 1 HP n T pt p v vw oe a M Single phase 230 V 2 to 3 HP Single phase 230 V 2 to 3 HP EE P1 Pco IN DB ine eal v v v es Ws Direction of wire guide FVR E11S vs FRENIC Multi FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Three phase 230 V 1 8 to 1 HP Three phase 230 V 1 8 to 1 HP jy r2fca fawn pap pps pa noe x2x3 ap na ancvajo 112 13 oe alg wr pop caesen u v v es jos Single phase 230 V 1 8 to 1 2 HP e n pero eale v v exjes V
157. 75 w w 2 APL 3 phase i i i i i i 230V 3 phase 460V 1 phase 230V Figure 1 1 1 1 E Semi standard Series Models with built in EMC filter Models with built in PG interface card Models with built in RS 485 communications card Models for synchronous motors Figure 1 2 The highest standards of control and performance in its class B Shortened setting time in slip compensation control Through slip compensation control voltage tuning speed control accuracy at low speeds is improved This minimizes variations in speed control accuracy at times when the load varies and since the time at creep speeds is shortened single cycle tact times can be shortened Variations according to load Conveying distance Figure 1 3 B Equipped with the highest level CPU for its class The highest level CPU of any inverter is used Computation and processing capacity is doubled over the previous inverter improving speed control accuracy CPU speed comparison FVREHS FRENIC Mullti 32MHz Ai has doubled processing Noo come capacity compared with the previous model FRENIC Multi 64MHz Figure 1 4 B Compatible with PG feedback control Example of carrier machine E Without speed feedback operation pattern Load Low X Load High A i The speed just before positioning ud varies so positioning accuracy drops 0 Conveying distance E With speed feedback Improved speed control accurac
158. 78 15 00 to 19 99 18 7 6 36 2 07 29 13 20 00 to 24 99 24 6 4 60 2 09 29 53 25 00 to 29 99 30 0 8 33 1 75 31 49 30 00 to 39 99 36 2 9 88 1 90 32 55 Auto reset Times Auto reset Reset interval H04 and H05 specify the auto reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm for any faults even if any protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state tripped state If the protective function works in excess of the times specified by H04 the inverter will issue an alarm for any faults and not attempt to auto reset the tripped state Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried Alarm status LED monitor displays Alarm status LED monitor displays Overcurrent protection 4 Licor Li 7 Motor overheated FLILI LUI I Overvoltage protection L Lii or Lii Motor overloaded Li forte Heat sink overheated LiH i Inverter overloaded Li Li m Number of reset times H04 H04 specifies the number of reset times for automatically escaping the tripped state When H04 0 the auto reset function will not be activated ANNARNING If the auto reset function has been specified the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped due to a trip fault depending on the cause of the tripping
159. A from 0 to 1 or 69 amp 2 from 1 to 0 keys is required p Even when F00 1 or 3 function code data can be changed via the communications link For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05 Frequency Command 1 C30 Frequency Command 2 F01 or C30 sets the source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference frequency 2 respectively Function Enable J amp 2 keys on the keypad Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable the current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Data for F01 C30 Function Enable the sum of voltage 0 to 10 VDC and current inputs 4 to 20 mA DC given to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function respectively See the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum frequencies Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 A01 the maximum frequency will apply Enable the voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals The UP command data
160. A 20 F 2 Terminal arrangements and symbols essent A 23 E 3 ZFunclion 01 1 arn eredi ente eredi etiettindusseetitebue ess eb emnes A 26 App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Disclaimer This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association JEMA April 1994 It is intended to apply to the domestic market only It is only for reference for the foreign market A 1 Effect of inverters on other devices Inverters have been and are rapidly expanding its application fields This paper describes the effect that inverters have on electronic devices already installed or on devices installed in the same system as inverters as well as introducing noise prevention measures Refer to Section A 3 3 Noise prevention examples for details 1 Effect on AM radios Phenomenon If an inverter operates AM radios may pick up noise radiated from the inverter An inverter has almost no effect on FM radios or television sets Probable cause Radios may receive noise radiated from the inverter Measures Inserting a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter is effective 2 Effect on telephones Phenomenon If an inverter operates nearby telephones may pick up noise radiated from the inverter in conversation so that it may be difficult to hear Probable c
161. ACITIES Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics selection procedure and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models It also helps you select braking resistors Contents 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters ccceccsceessesseesseeseeeseeeeceseessecnsecaeceaecnaecseecaecaecaaecseecaeeeseeeneeneeseeeeerenseees 7 1 7 1 1 Motor output torque characteristics ener nnne nnne rennen nnns 7 1 7 1 2 Selection procedure ee eene ee ER EH EE EE RR de tes 7 4 7 153 Equations for selections isses rne ean e NEG IN RE a AERES 7 7 7 1 3 1 Load torque during constant speed running sse 7 7 EFI Generabequation 5e Oo Tad ei esee e te RE Ge CEU reuse D op e dtd 7 7 2 Obtaining the required force F oo ee ceccesccsseesseeseeeseeeeceecesceeeeseensecesecaecaecsaecseecaeeeseeeseeseeensesss 7 7 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation sss 7 8 1 Calculation of moment of inertia enne enne eher nennen einen 7 8 2 Calculation of the acceleration timerne e E AE E E a E enne 7 10 3 Calculation of the deceleration time eene enne 7 10 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor 7 11 1 Calculation of regenerative energy cescesccssecsecesecssecscecseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeeseeeceeeeeceseenseenaes 7 11 7 1 3 4 Calculating th
162. Automatic control such as auto torque boost and auto energy saving or electronic thermal overload protection for motor uses the motor parameters and characteristics To match the property of a control system with that of the motor select characteristics of the motor and set H03 data Data Initialization to 2 to initialize the old motor parameters stored in the inverter When initialization is complete P03 P06 P07 and P08 data and the old related internal data are automatically updated For P99 enter the following data according to the motor type P99 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard 8 series motors Current standard P99 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard 6 series motors Conventional standard P99 4 Other motors Other manufacturer s or unknown motors f P99 4 Other motors the inverter runs following the motor characteristics of On Note T Fuji standard 8 series The inverter also supports motors rated by HP horse power typical in North America P99 1 c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo 9 2 5 H codes High performance functions Data Initialization H03 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters To change the H03 data it is necessary to press the 69 keys or 69 keys simultaneous keying Data for H03 Function Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained I
163. Bit 0 Braking level calculation limiter LQ Starting frequency Operation Carrier frequency analyzer reduction processor Braking time STM Auto search for H09 idling motor Auto search for idling motor speed Auto search mode Auto search for idling motor speed Auto search delay time Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time H Restart mode Restart mode after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate after momentary ad power failure Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time Note Function codes in the above control block are for motor 1 For motor 2 read the function codes for motor 1 as the function codes for motor 2 referring to the table below Function code for motor 1 Function code for motor 2 F03 F04 FOS F06 FO9 F20 F21 F22 F37 F42 A01 A02 A03 A04 A05 A09 A10 A11 A13 A14 Function code for motor 1 Function code for motor 2 Figure 4 3 2 Control Block Output Stage H68 H80 P02 P03 POG PO7 PO9 P10 P12 P99 A40 A41 A16 A17 A20 A21 A23 A24 A26 A39 UJ r Q A z gt D E S n ui E Q O z Az Q E O O This page is intentionally left blank 4 10 4 4 Control Block Fi
164. Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS 485 communications facility Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details Contents 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication ssessesesseeee eere enne ene nne ne nnne nnne 5 1 5 1 1 RS 485 common specifications standard and optional sse 5 2 5 1 2 RJ 45 connector pin assignment for standard RS 485 communications port sess 5 3 5 1 3 Pin assignment for optional RS 485 Communications Card sse 5 4 5 1 4 Cable for RS 485 communications port nennen enne nennen nns 5 4 5 1 5 Communications support devices nennen enne enne nennen nnne nnne ns 5 5 5 2 Oyerview of FRENIC LEoadet t PERENNE E QS 5 6 5 Specificatlongz sc oec ru rtt enit ipte e eet e ath 5 6 5 22 Connection s sies inre S t ao cede d ae EE CA T eta RE E Ee I erre cien 5 7 522 3 EunctiOnoyervi6Wu dort dpe ttt uf ia t bert ia 5 7 5 2 32 Setting of function code sse sede E eei e e E eet ets 5 7 5 2 9 2 Muli Monito serit oet ene lathe e aditu b teet bete ug 5 8 5 2 3 3 Running status Monitor oeste tice pie eui rede e ete e ERR iere E REA 5 9 52 34 Test TUMHE asa ooe o e Re e GLO eR CR Rt eode eee D SER 5 10 5 2 3 5 Real time trace Displaying running status of an inverter in waveforms sssusss 5 11 5 1 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication Overv
165. Command E65 Internal Frequency 100 Command f1x0 1 3 In the diagram above fl is the level of the analog frequency command sampled at any given time The sampling is repeated at regular intervals to continually monitor the wiring connection of the analog frequency command Note Avoid an abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command The abrupt change may be interpreted as a wire break Setting E65 data at 999 Disable allows the Reference loss detected signal REF OFF to be issued but does not allow the reference frequency to change the inverter runs at the analog frequency command as specified When E65 0 or 999 the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is fl x 0 2 When E65 100 95 or higher the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x 1 The reference loss detection 1s not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment filter time constants C33 C38 and C43 Terminal FWD Function E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function Terminal REV Function E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function For details about command assignment to terminals FWD and REV refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 9 69 c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo 9 2 3 C codes Control functions C01 to C03 C04 Jump Frequency 1 2 and 3 Jump Frequency
166. D tip penes 8 1 8 121 Three phase 230 V icis eene need eee EU Ee e RA ENT dH Re e een 8 1 8 112 Three phase 460 Vii ee e ie RR qe RAR AR HA ee OL is 8 2 8 1 3 Single phase 230 V sisse ete e EH EUER RD e Redde ede ce EU a READ 8 3 8 2 Common Specifications esI Ua EA ae ES 8 4 8 3 Terminal Specifications eene eene nnne nren nennen eren ISE iins Dasr oia en enin nes 8 8 8 3 1 Terminal functions ine eoe e Ra e Tc edt ivi e i tee Go Th dp s 8 8 8 3 3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications essere 8 19 8 32 M in circuit termirals reete eet e de qiti iun 8 19 8 3 2 2 Control circuit terminals nnne 8 20 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment sss nnne 8 21 8 4 1 Operating environmeht eee e ER Ee EN e A A Ut Pe Re EE ea e hae 8 21 8 42 Storage environment eene eee E Re Pe EUR T E EU e Ye e Ee PRA End 8 22 5 42 Temporary Stora Enea haa ere eo dort vo eG feti abate edv eben 8 22 8 1 2 2 Long term Storage oeieo k e terea nee eine ee e e rege E epe eges 8 22 8 5 External Dimernsi0187 5 oae De be ee ae ced te oq on al ees LO ee ae 8 23 8 5 T Standard models etd e dE e RU E P re ERE eben 8 23 8 52 Standard keypad ew ena Rd I IS 8 26 8 6 Connection E DIENA 1a nT E ener enne nnne nennen E 8 27 8 6 1 Running the inverter with keypad sese ener enne nennen nnne 8 27 8 6 2 Running the inverter by terminal commands sese e
167. DT signal comes ON when it drops below the Frequency detection level minus Hysteresis width specified by E32 it goes OFF You need to assign the Frequency detected output signal FDT function code data 2 to one of digital output terminals Data setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Output frequency Reference frequency Detection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 Release level Frequency detected i FDT CON Time 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Overload Early Warning Current Detection Level Overload Early Warning Current Detection Timer E37 Current Detection 2 Level Current Detection 2 Timer These function codes define the detection level and time for the Motor overload early warning OL Current detected JD and Current detected 2 ID2 output signals m Motor overload early warning signal OL The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition alarm code 7 of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 In typical cases set E34 data to 80 to 90 against F11 data Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level Specify also the thermal characteristics of the motor with F10 Select motor characteristics and F12 Thermal time constant To utilize this feature you need to assign OL data
168. E L4 E I EU SH 3 wire 5 5mm cable 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Cable length m Excerpt from J IEE Japan Vol 107 No 7 1987 Figure C 2 Measured Example of Wiring Length and Peak Value of Motor Terminal Voltage Effect of surge voltages The surge voltages originating in LC resonance of wiring may be applied to the motor terminals and depending on their magnitude sometimes cause damage to the motor insulation When the motor is driven with a 230 V class inverter the dielectric strength of the insulation is no problem since the peak value at the motor terminal voltage increases twice due to the surge voltages the DC voltage is only about 300 V But in case of a 460 V class inverter the DC voltage is approximately 600 V and depending on the wiring length the surge voltages may greatly increase and sometimes result in damage to the insulation Countermeasures against surge voltages When driving a motor with a 460 V class inverter the following methods are countermeasures against damage to the motor insulation by the surge voltages 1 Method using motors with enhanced insulation Enhanced insulation of a motor winding allows its surge withstanding to be improved 2 Method to suppress surge voltages There are two methods for suppressing the surge voltages one is to reduce the voltage rise time and another is to reduce the voltage peak value 1 Output reactor If wiring length 1s relatively short
169. E37 E38 E39 E40 E41 E42 E43 E45 E46 E47 E48 E50 E51 E52 E59 E61 E62 E63 E65 Fi i i 0 Frequency Arrival 0 0 to 10 0 0 1 Hysteresis width Frequency Detection FDT Detection level Hysteresis width Overload Early Warning Current Detection Level Current Detection 2 LED Monitor Item selection LCD Monitor 3 Item selection Language selection LED Monitor Speed monitor item Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data Keypad Menu display mode Terminal C1 Signal Definition C1 V2 Function Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function C1 function Terminal C1 Extended Function V2 function Reference Loss Detection Continuous running frequency 0 0 to 400 0 100 of 9 61 the motor 0 00 Disable X rated Current value of 1 to 20096 of the inverter rated current current 0 01 to 600 001 cor es TY 1000 0 01 A Y Y1 100 of ili MET rated a EC ER A A OL 9 62 R 9 63 0 Speed monitor select by E48 9 64 3 Output current 4 Output voltage 8 Calculated torque 9 Input power 10 PID command 12 PID feedback amount 13 Timer 14 PID output 15 Load factor 16 Motor output 21 Reserved 2 22 Reserved 2 0 Running status rotational direction and operation guide 9 65 1 Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque 0 Japanese Y Y 1 9 66 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Spanish Italian
170. Figure A 3 Conduction Noise 2 Induction noise When wires or signal lines of peripheral devices are brought close to the wires on the input and output sides of the inverter through which noise current is flowing noise will be induced into those wires and signal lines of the devices by electromagnetic induction Figure A 4 or electrostatic induction Figure A 5 This is called induction noise Power Inverter Electronic device Signalline Sensor Figure A 4 Electromagnetic Induced Noise Inverter Figure A 5 Electrostatic Induced Noise 3 Radiation noise Noise generated in an inverter may be radiated through the air from wires that act as antennas at the input and output sides of the inverter so as to affect peripheral devices This noise is called radiation noise amp as shown below Not only wires but motor frames or control system panels containing inverters may also act as antennas Power supply Electronic device Figure A 6 Radiation Noise A 3 Noise prevention The more noise prevention is strengthened the more effective However with the use of appropriate measures noise problems may be resolved easily It is necessary to implement economical noise prevention according to the noise level and the equipment conditions 1 Noise prevention prior to installation Before installing an inverter in your control panel or installing an inverter panel you need to consider noise pr
171. H09 Starting Mode Auto search 0 Disable Y 9 88 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start H11 Deceleration Mode 0 Normal deceleration Y Y 9 90 pue c cesa es eal PT Instantaneous Overcurrent 0 Disable Y Y 1 MEMME Mode selection Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure 0 1 to 10 0 0 1 Y Y1 Depending 9 24 Restart time Y2 on the 9 91 inverter capacity Frequency fall rate 0 00 Deceleration time selected by F08 0 01 Hz s Y Y iss Hai el 999 Follow the current limit command fai 999 Automaticall determined by inverter H26 i Mode selection 0 Disable 9 91 1 Enable With PTC the inverter immediately trips with 7 displayed H27 Level 0 00 to 5 00 H28 Droop Control 60 0 to 0 0 0 1 9 92 H30 Communications Link Function Frequency command Run command 9 93 F01 C30 F02 RS 485 F02 F01 C30 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 option F02 RS 485 option RS 485 F01 C30 RS 485 option RS 485 RS 485 option RS 485 option H42 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal 1 v N J 9 94 Mode selection NOARWNAOD eo H43 Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Indication of cumulative run time of cooling fan for replacement L 1 1 v N H44 Startup Times of Motor 1 Indication of cumulative start
172. HEMI CON handied by Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Frequency meter TRM 45 FM 60 Frequency setter RJ 13 WAR3W 1kQ Surge killer FLS 323 control panels etc Absorbs external surges and noise preventing malfunction of electronic devices used in Analog frequency meter 45 60 mm square Handied by Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Frequency setting device Handled by Fuji Electric Technica Co Figure 6 1 Quick Overview of Options 6 1 Winterface card PG feedback card OPC E1 PG Carries out frequency setting speed control and position control through input of pulse train in accordance with PG feedback Applicable PG specifications Power supply 50V 100mA max Output Signal Open collector or complementary Maximum output pulse frequency 30 kHz or lower DIO card OPC E1 DIO Used in cases where you desire to add more DI and DO signals to the FRENIC Multi unit RS 485 communications card for branching OPC E1 RS Connects to a host device master such as a personal computer or PLC for controling FRENIC Multi as a subordinate device slave This board is in addition to the RS 485 communications function built into the FRENIC Multi Caution This optional card cannot be connected to the keypad or assistance loader Connected units 1 host device 31 inverters Electrical specifications EIA RS 485 Synchronization method Asynchronous start stop Communicati
173. High Performance Compact Inverter FRENIC Multi User s Manual Copyright O 2007 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface This manual provides all the information on the FRENIC Multi series of inverters including its operating procedure operation modes and selection of peripheral equipment Carefully read this manual for proper use Incorrect handling of the inverter may prevent the inverter and or related equipment from operating correctly shorten their lives or cause problems The table below lists the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC Multi Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary Name Description Product scope features specifications external drawings and options of the Catalog product Acceptance inspection mounting amp wiring of the inverter operation using the Instruction Manual keypad running the motor for a test troubleshooting and maintenance and inspection The materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use Japanese Guidel
174. Hysteresis width These function codes enable the inverter to jump over three different points on the output frequency in order to skip resonance caused by the motor speed and natural frequency of the driven machinery While you are increasing the reference frequency the moment the reference frequency reaches the bottom of the jump frequency band the inverter keeps the output at that bottom frequency When the reference frequency exceeds the upper limit of the jump frequency band the internal reference frequency takes on the value of the reference frequency When you are decreasing the reference frequency the situation will be reversed When more than two jump frequency bands overlap the inverter actually takes the lowest frequency within the overlapped bands as the bottom frequency and the highest as the upper limit Refer to the figure on the lower right Internal reference Internal reference frequency frequency Jump frequency Band C04 Actual Jump 4 Jump frequency Bana Jump jump frequency C04 ot ala s band Rand Jump Jump C03 C04 frequency 2 frequency iEn frequency 2 C02 Band C02 Jump frequency 1 C04 ZUR frequency 1 C01 C01 Reference frequency Reference frequency m Jump frequencies 1 2 and 3 C01 C02 and C03 Specify the center of the jump frequency band Data setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Setting to 0 0 results in no jump frequency band m Jump frequency hystere
175. ID commands LL The actual setting is the same as that of function code F18 For details refer to the description of F18 Cnote Note that function codes C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 are shared by hts frequency commands m Bias value C51 Data setting range 100 00 to 100 00 m Bias base point C52 Data setting range 0 00 to 100 00 C53 Selection of Normal Inverse Operation Frequency command 1 C53 switches the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 F01 between normal and inverse For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05 Switch normal inverse operation terminal command IVS function code data 21 9 2 Overview of Function Codes 9 2 4 P codes Motor 1 parameters Motor 1 No of poles A15 Motor 2 No of poles P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor Enter the value given on the nameplate of the motor This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor refer to E43 The following expression is used for the conversion 120 No of poles Motor 1 Rated capacity A16 Motor 2 Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Motor speed r min x Frequency Hz When P99 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 30 00 When P99 1 Motor 1 Rated current A17 Motor 2 Rated current P03 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the
176. Item displayed Full scale Output frequency Maximum frequency F03 A01 Output current Inverter rated current x 200 Calculated torque Motor rated torque x 200 c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo LCD Monitor Language selection E46 specifies the language to display on the multi function keypad as follows Data for E46 Language Japanese English German French Spanish Italian LCD Monitor Contrast control E47 adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor on the multi function keypad as follows Data for E47 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LED Monitor Speed monitor item E43 LED Monitor Item selection Refer to the description of E43 Coefficient for Speed Indication E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time Refer to the description of E39 est Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data E51 specifies a display coefficient multiplication factor for displaying the input watt hour data 5 7 in a part of maintenance information on the keypad Input watt hour data Display coefficient E51 data x Input watt hour kWh Note Setting E51 data to 0 000 clears the input watt hour and its data to 0 After Note clearing be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value otherwise input watt hour data will not be accumulated 9 2 Overview of Function Codes c Keypad Menu display mode E52 provides a choice of three menu dis
177. J01 3 Dancer control and J62 2 or 3 Ratio compensation enabled the PID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary reference frequency and may vary within 300 of the frequency The monitor displays the PID output in a converted absolute value To indicate the value up to the full scale of 300 set F30 data to 33 9 W Pulse rate F33 dedicated to FMP F33 specifies the number of pulses at which the output of the monitored item selected reaches 100 in accordance with the specifications of the counter to be connected 9 2 Overview of Function Codes F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 F09 Torque Boost 1 A13 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 Refer to the descriptions of function code F09 Stop Frequency Holding time F25 Stop Frequency Refer to the description of function code F25 Torque Limiter 1 Limiting level for driving E16 Torque Limiter 2 Limiting level for driving Torque Limiter 1 Limiting level for braking E17 Torque Limiter 2 Limiting level for braking If the inverter s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the driving torque limiter F40 E16 and the braking torque limiter F41 E17 the inverter controls the output frequency and limits the output torque for preventing a stall Specify the limiting levels at which the torque limiter becomes activated as the percentage of the motor rated torque Tip
178. MCCB Molded case circuit breaker X1 GFCI Ground fault circuit interrupter X2 SINE MC Magnetic contactor X3 swi DCR DC reactor X4 DBR Braking resistor X5 CM RS 485 port PLC option Note 1 When connecting an optional DC reactor DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Note 2 Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with an overcurrent protection function in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Note 3 Install a magnetic contactor MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or GFCI when necessary Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter Note 4 THR function can be used by assigning code 9 external alarm to any ofthe terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV function code E01 to E05 E98 or E99 8 27 8 6 2 Running the inverter by terminal commands The diagram below shows a basic connection example for running the inverter with terminal commands Note 2 MCCB or Note 3 1 M eae Power e M P1 P DB N Three phase d LO L1 R U G single phase 200 to 240 V sosok ee Q5 MS or three phase P LO 380 to 480 V
179. Magnetic contactor LNAWdINOA WHAHdIdAd ONILOATAS Molded case circuit breaker MCCB or ground fault circuit Magnetic contactor Inverter interrupter GFCI Three phase power supply 200 to 230 V 50 60 Hz Figure 6 2 External Views of Molded Case Circuit Breaker Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Magnetic Contactor and Connection Example 6 9 Table 6 4 Rated Current of Molded Case Circuit Breaker Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter and Magnetic Contactor Nominal MCCB GFCI Magnetic contactor type Sod applied e Rated current A MC1 for input circuit Magnetic contactor type voltage motor DC reactor DCR DC reactor DCR MC2 for output circuit HP w DCR w o DCR w DCR w o DCR SC 05 Three phase 230V SC 4 0 SC 5 1 SC N1 SC N2 Three SC 05 phase 5 _ FRNOO5E1S 4U 460V FRNOO7E1S 4U SC 4 0 SC 5 1 Single phase SC 05 230V RNOO3E1S TU The above table lists the rated current of MCCBs and GFCIs to be used in the power control panel with an internal temperature of lower than 50 C 122 F The rated current is factored by a correction coefficient of 0 85 as the MCCBs and GFCIs original rated current is specified when using them in an ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F or lower Select an MCCB and or GFCI suitable for the actual short circuit breaking capacity needed for your power systems For the selection of the MC type it is assumed that the 600 V HIV allowable ambient temperature 75 C 167 F wir
180. NO20E1S 2U DB15 2 8 6 75 0 375 FRNF50E1S 4U 9 0 044 22 FRNO001E1S 4U Eum 4 cui 17 45 0 068 18 FRNOO2E1S 4U 34 0 075 10 Three FRNOOS3E1S 4U peee 169 33 30 0 077 7 phase FRNOO5E1S 4U DB3 7 4 130 37 20 0 093 460 V FRNO07E1S 4U DB5 5 4 80 55 0 138 FRNO10E1S 4U DB7 5 4 60 38 0 188 5 FRNO15E1S 4U DB11 4 40 55 10 0 275 FRNO20E1S 4U DB15 4 34 4 75 0 375 FRNF12E1S 7U FRNF25E1S 7U 9 po 0 037 si Single DBO 75 2 100 phase FRNF50E1S 7U 0 044 22 230 V FRNOO1E1S 7U 17 45 0 068 18 FRNOO2E1S 7U 34 0 075 10 FRNOOS3E1S 7U DESCR 33 30 0 077 7 6 14 6 4 Selecting Options 1 2 10 ED model Braking resistor B P DB G P Inverter Figure 6 7 Braking Resistor 10 ED Model and Connection Example Table 6 7 Braking Resistor 10 ED Model Pawar Continuous braking Repetitive braking supply Inverter type Type Q ty Resistance 100 braking torque each cycle is less than 100 s voltage Q Discharging Braking time Average allowable Duty cycle capability kWs s loss kW ED FRNF12E1S 2U 1000 100 E CEN ee DBO 75 2C 100 50 au 0 075 m m FRNF50E1S 2U 250 37 m FRNOO1E1S 2U 133 20 9 Three FENDOZETSU 5222C 40 55 n 0 110 i 6 phase FRNOO3E1S 2U 50 i 230 V FRNOOSE1S 2U DB3 7 2C 33 140 75 0 185 m FRN007E1S 2U DB5 5 2C 20 55 20 0 275
181. P11 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 P12 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Rated value 9 79 of Fuji standard P99 Motor 1 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 9 8 9 1 Function Code Tables H codes High Performance Functions Change Refer Code Name Data setting range it when Data Default to copying setting running page H03 Data Initialization Disable initialization 9 80 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Initialize motor 1 parameters Initialize motor 2 parameters H04 Times 0 Disable times 9 84 or Hl a H05 Reset interval 0 5 to 20 0 O ee H06 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control 0 Disable Always in operation 9 85 pem rs i sll al H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 0 Linear 9 86 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong 3 Curvilinear H08 Rotational Direction Limitation 0 Disable Y 9 87 1 Enable Reverse rotation inhibited HLHH 2 Enable Forward rotation inhibited
182. PACITIES This chapter provides you with information about the inverter output torque characteristics selection procedure and equations for calculating capacities to help you select optimal motor and inverter models It also helps you select braking resistors vi Part 5 Specifications Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings control system and terminal functions for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment external dimensions examples of basic connection diagrams and details of the protective functions Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES This chapter contains overview lists of seven groups of function codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters and details of each function code Appendices Glossary Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual Note This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents CT This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations LII This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information vii CONTENTS Part 1 General Information Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Multi kl ROARS feed creer ised e eo ertet oerte ER He aee ene te EE e eee ede 1 1
183. RS 485 communication in addition to the standard RS 485 communication via the RJ 45 connector for connecting the keypad The main functions include the following Connecting the inverter to host equipment such as a PC or PLC which enables the inverter to be controlled as a slave device Operating the inverters by frequency command setting forward reverse running stopping coast to stop and resetting etc Monitoring the operation status of the inverter e g output frequency output current and alarm information etc Setting function code data Table 6 14 Transmission Specifications Item Specifications Communication protocol SX protocol Modbus RTU 2 i Fuji general purpose for exclusive use with Conforming to Wisertecurat col FRENIC Loader Modicon s Modbus RTU E Electrical specifications EIA RS 485 Maximum number of units Host 1 unit Inverter 31 units connected Transmission rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 bps Synchronization system Asynchronous start stop system Transmission method Half duplex Maximum length of p 1600 ft 500 m communication network 5 Inverter support loader software FRENIC Loader is support software which enables the inverter to be operated via the RS 485 communications facility The main functions include the following Easy editing of function code data Monitoring the operation statuses of the inverter such as I O monitor and
184. ST E02 8 Reset alarm RST 8 Trip command external fault THR 9 Enable external alarm trip THR 9 Freq set 2 Freq set Hz2 Hz1 11 Select frequency command 2 1 Ll 10 Motor 2 Motor 1 M2 M1 Hz2 Hz1 X3 terminal 11 DC brake command DCBRK Terminal X3 12 Select motor 2 motor 4 M2 M1 function 12 Torque limiter 2 Torque limiter 1 function 13 Enable DC braking DCBRK E03 TL2 TL1 E03 14 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 13 UP command UP 17 UP Increase output frequency UP paru RM RS 14 DOWN command DOWN 18 DOWN Decrease output frequency X4 terminal 15 Write enable for keypad WE KP Terminal X4 DOWN function 16 PID control cancel Hz PID function 19 Enable data change with keypad E04 17 Inverse mode changeover VS E04 WE KP 18 Link enable LE 20 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 Switch normal inverse operation IVS X5 terminal Terminal X5 24 Enable communications link via function function RS 485 or field bus LE E05 E05 RS 485 standard Bus option 25 Universal DI U DI Acceleration 0 01 to 3600 s Acceleration 0 01 to 3600 s E10 E10 time 2 time 2 E11 Deceleration E11 Deceleration time 2 time 2 Torque limiter 2 20 to 200 Torque limiter 2 20 to 200 E16 her 999 No limit E16 Limiting level 999 Disable Driving we Cts coq for driving Braking 0 Automatic deceleration control Automatic 0 Disable deceleration He Mode E17 sele
185. T terminal command ON etc Resetting can be done by the same way as resetting an alarm m Upper level alarm AH J12 J12 specifies the upper limit of the alarm AH in percentage 96 of the feedback amount m Lower level alarm AL J13 J13 specifies the lower limit of the alarm AL in percentage of the feedback amount Note The value displayed 96 is the ratio of the upper lower limit to the full scale 10 V ote or 20 mA of the feedback amount in the case of a gain of 100 Upper level alarm AH and lower level alarm AL also apply to the following alarms How to handle the alarm Description Select alarm output J11 Upper limit ON when AH lt PV Absolute value J13 AL 0 absolute alarm Lower limit ON when PV lt AL J12 AH 100 absolute Upper limit ON when SV AH lt PV Deviation alarm J13 AL 100 deviation Lower limit ON when PV lt SV AL J12 AH 100 deviation Upper lower limit ON when SV PV gt AL J13 AL J12 AH deviation Parameter setting c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Upper lower range ON when SV AL PV Deviation alarm DO inversed limit deviation SV t AL Upper lower range ON when AL lt PV AH Absolute value DO inversed limit absolute alarm Upper lowerrange ON when SV AL PV Deviation alarm DO inversed limit deviation SV AH 9 113 J18 PID Control Uppe
186. To switch the inverter s output torque limiter between torque limiter 1 F40 F41 and torque limiter 2 E16 E17 use the terminal command TLZ TLI assigned to a digital input terminal Refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 CN la The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters Control Mode Selection 1 H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions A14 Control Mode Selection 2 F42 specifies the control mode of the inverter to control a motor Data for F42 Control mode V f control with slip compensation active Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface m V f control In this control the inverter controls a motor by the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo m Slip compensation Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation facility first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevent
187. U 5 98 152 4 02 102 1 97 50 O S a O Zz 4 33 110 D 9 63 3 82 97 BB D1 D2 0 28 7 4 020x9 24 5 12 130 Main nameplate Power Dimensions inch mm supply Inverter type voltage D 2 De Three FRNF50E1S 4U 4 96 126 1 57 40 pin FRNOO1E1S 4U 5 91 150 239 99 2 52 4 LL DC ax 8 23 Unit inch mm 5 12 130 Main nameplate e Power Dimensions inch mm supply Inverter type voltage D D1 D2 Three FRN002E1S 2U phase 230V FRNOO3E1S 2U 5 91 150 3 39 86 Three FRNOO2E1S 4U phase 2 52 64 460V FRNOOSE1S 4U Single phase FRNOO2E1S 7U 6 30 160 3 78 96 230V 5 51 140 T EE 5 95 151 5 04 128 3 43 87 2 52 64 7 09 180 Power supply voltage Inverter type Three phase 230 V FRNOO5E1S 2U Three phase 460 V FRNOO5E1S 4U Single phase 230 V FRNO03E1S 7U 8 24 8 5 External Dimensions Unit inch mm 7 09 180 6 46 164 2 0 24 66 3 19 81 3 03 77 0 20 5 8 66 220 Power supply voltage Inverter type FRNOO7E1S 2U FRNO10E1S 2U FRNOO7E1S 4U Three phase 230 V 2 0 39 610 Three phase 460 V sS FRNO10E1S 4U E i n U m Q TI C p o Z o
188. a length y05 and y15 y05 and y15 specify the character length Data for y05 for transmission and y15 Data length Setting for FRENIC Loader 0 8 bits Loader sets the length in 8 bits automatically The same applies to the 1 7 bits Modbus RTU protocol m Parity check y06 and y16 y06 and y16 specify the property of the Data for y06 parity bit and y16 Setting for FRENIC Loader None Loader sets it to the even parity 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU automatically Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU m Stop bits yO7 and y17 y07 and y17 specify the number of stop bits Data for y07 Stop bi dy17 op bit s Setting for FRENIC Loader we y 0 1 Loader sets it to 1 bit automatically 2 bits 1 bit For the Modbus RTU protocol the stop bits are automatically determined associated with the property of parity bits So no setting is required 9 121 c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo m No response error detection time yO8 and y18 y08 and y18 specify the time interval from Data for y08 i the inverter detecting no access until it and y18 PURA enters communications error alarm mode due to network failure and processes the communications error This applies to a 1 to 60s mechanical system that always accesses its station within a predetermined interval during communications using the RS 485
189. a setting range Brake OFF frequency 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 s 9 117 c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Turning on the brake To assure the service life of brake body the inverter checks the motor speed lowering enough less than one specified monitoring that the run command turns OFF and the output frequency lowers than one specified for the time long enough and turn on the brake terminal command BRKS OFF Function code Data setting range Brake ON frequency 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 s The braking signal control 1s only applicable to motor 1 If the motor switching Nolo function selects motor 2 the braking signal always remains at state of turning on When an event such as an occurrence of alarm and turning the coast to stop terminal command BX ON shuts down the inverter the braking signal turns on immediately ina fi 4 J69 Brake OFF Nc J71 Brake ON frequency Res hide roquency x Perenananasangacs frequency F25 Stop frequency utput frequency m F24 Starting frequency 1 F39 Stop frequency Holding time Holding time i J68 Releasing current y onomea RE rr eee i pir a uu eee Output current Mense s i ON SP aes 9u se i i 9N Brake signal BRKS ne a a J70 Brake OFF timer J72 Brake ON timer These are reserved for particular manufacturers Do not access them 9 118 9 2 Overview
190. aay Editi O imiter Offset Reference loss 4 detection i Normal inverse x operation m Gain sf thermistor C32 X C34 t Hardware Mode Normal inverse switch selection ane operation SW8 ON H26 1 T O 0 0 0 Sain Asi C37 C39 I H27 iie RE GHY al x Normal inverse PIG rar operation thermistor 1 Level Gain 7 a UPIDOWN control 8 Initial frequency setting UP d Pom UP DOWN DOWN control command DOWN O O4 3 D W O card L DI O card input terminal 9 O OH option Pulse train 73 PG card PG card input terminal option Standard keypad OFF if y98 1 3 RJ 45 port RS 485 or H30 4 5 8 Host equipment oo Frequency command via communications OFF if y98 1 3 4 or H30 1 3 7 l RS485 3 Host equipment communications C option card OFF if j m H30 1 3to5 Last 7 8 command 3 to take effect Host equipment Field bus option card Oo Figure 4 1 1 Drive Frequency Command Block Input Stage 4 2 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block Multi frequency 8 Multi frequency 9 C13 oo o 000606000006000 oO g EO Multi frequency 10 Select frequency Enable Select Ready for joggi command 2 1 communications link multi frequency C JOG abr a Hz2 Hz1 via RS 485 or field bus ss1 Ss2
191. ables To use Menu 0 Quick Setup you need to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter 3 3 Programming Mode Listed below are the function codes including those not subject to quick setup available on the FRENIC Multi A function code is displayed on the LED monitor on the keypad in the following format Lo orm LILI ID number in each function code group Function code group Table 3 9 Function Codes Available on FRENIC Multi Function Code Group Function Codes Function Description F codes F00 to F51 Fundamental Functions concerning basic motor functions running E codes E01 to E99 Extension terminal Functions concerning the assignment functions of control circuit terminals Functions concerning the display of the LED monitor C codes C01 to C53 Control functions Functions associated with frequency settings P codes P01 to P99 Motor 1 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics parameters such as capacity of the motor H03 to H98 High performance Highly added value functions functions Functions for sophisticated control A01 to A46 Motor 2 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics parameters such as capacity of the motor J codes J01 to J86 Application functions Functions for applications such as PID control y codes y01 to
192. access manual speed commands frequency command with J and keys if it is set to any other you can access the PID process command with those keys Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 5 PID Process Control Block Setting the PID process command with J and V keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 N O keys on keypad 2 Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E43 0 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID process command with the N V key To enable the PID process command to be modified with the 9 amp key first switch to Running mode 3 Press the J V key to display the PID process command The lowest digit and its decimal point blinks on the LED monitor 4 To change the PID process command press the 9 V key again The PID process command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory It is retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID process command source and then go back to the via keypad PID process command Also it is retained in the memory even while the inverter is powered off and will be used as the initial PID process command next time the inverter is powered on O U m O Z C D z 4 I m A m lt gt ju Tip Even if multi frequency is selected as a PID process command S84 or SS8 ON you still can set the process command using the k
193. activation of these limiters Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor Discharging capability Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor Allowable average loss These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor Set F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss respectively Those values differ depending on the specifications of the braking resistor as listed on the following pages Note Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor the electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm 7 5 7 even if the actual temperature rise is not enough If it happens review the relationship between the performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes 9 39 a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo The table below lists the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor These values depend upon the inverter and braking resistor models m External Braking Resistors Standard models The thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor acts as a thermal protector of the motor for overheat so assign an Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR to any of digital input terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV and connect that terminal and its common terminal
194. ad current Rated slip frequency compensation response time 2 to 22 0 01 to 11 0 kw 0 00 to 100 00 A 0 1 2 0 1 0 00 to 50 00 A 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 15 00 Hz Set A23 and A25 to 100 0 01 to 10 00 s Torque Boost Conversion Table E9S E11S FRENIC Multi E9S E11S FRENIC Multi F08 E09 F09 Data for H50 1 10 of data for F04 Torque boost pattern of FVR E9S E11S Output voltage Base voltage 10096 Data for H51 Data for F05 x 0 100 F65 A05 A05 0 0 Data for F05 x 0 108 0 6 to 0 996 Data for F05 x 0 116 1 3 to 1 8 Data for F05 x 0 125 1 9 to 2 8 Data for F05 x 0 133 2 6 to 3 796 Data for F05 x 0 141 3 2 to 4 696 Data for F05 x 0 149 3 8 to 5 496 Data for F05 x 0 157 4 5 to 6 3 Data for F05 x 0 166 5 1 to 7 396 Data for F05 x 0 174 5 7 to 8 296 Data for F05 x 0 182 6 4 to 9 196 Data for F05 x 0 190 7 0 to 10 096 Data for F05 x 0 198 7 7 to 10 9 Data for F05 x 0 207 8 3 to 11 996 Data for F05 x 0 215 8 9 to 12 896 Data for F05 x 0 223 9 6 to 13 796 Data for F05 x 0 231 10 2 to 14 696 Data for F05 x 0 239 10 8 to 15 496 Data for F05 x 0 248 11 5 to 16 496 Data for F05 x 0 256 12 1 to 17 396
195. aking current 9 2 Overview of Function Codes C Tip It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an Enable DC braking P terminal command DCBRK As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque In general specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip frequency of motor If you set it at an extremely high value control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases ANCAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism C Note Injuries could occur Starting Frequency 1 A12 Starting Frequency 2 Starting Frequency 1 Holding time Stop Frequency F39 Stop Frequency Holding time At the startup of an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1 specified by F23 The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency as the starting frequency In addition F24 specifies the holding time fo
196. al C1 20 to 4 mA 0 01 to 10 00 1 to 100076 P Gain 0 000 to 10 000 0 0 Inactive 0 1 to 3600 s Integral time 0 0 Disable 0 1 to 3600 0 s 0 00 Inactive 0 01 to 10 0 s D Differential time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 10 00 s 0 0 to 60 0 s Feedback filter 0 0 to 60 0 s PTC thermistor Mode select Level 0 Inactive 1 Active Thermistor Mode selection 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 00 to 5 00 V Level 0 00 to 5 00 V Droop operation 9 9 to 0 0 Hz A 39 Droop control 9 9 to 0 0 Hz FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Serial link Function select X Valid Invalid Code Monitor Frequency Operation command command x H X 3 X X Communications link function Mode selection X Valid Invalid Code Monitor Frequency Run command command X 3 X RS 485 Address Mode select on no response error Timer Baud rate Data length Parity check Stop bits No response error detection time Response interval 1 to 31 0 Trip and alarm amp 1 Operation for H33 timer and alarm rt crag 2 Operation for H33 timer and retry to communicate If the retry fails then the inverter trips 4 4 3 Continuous operation 0 0 to 60 0 s
197. al command BX Coast to a stop OFF and ON or at the restart by auto reset the inverter applies the delay time specified by H13 The inverter will not start unless the time specified by H13 has elapsed even if the starting conditions are satisfied Power failure Recovery Y rj DC link bus voltage Motor speed Output frequency Output frequency eo Note Be sure to auto tune the inverter preceding the start of auto search for the idling lees motor speed When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency the inverter disables auto search and starts in normal mode nauto search with the restart after momentary power failure enabled F14 4 or 5 and the allowable momentary power failure time specified H16 turning a run command ON will start auto search even if the time specified by H16 has elapsed During auto search if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs the inverter restarts the suspended auto search a c z O a O Z Q O Og m 07 Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected designed performance depending on conditions including the load motor parameters power cable length and other externally determined events When the inverter is equipped with any of output circuit filters OFL OOO 2 and 4 in the secondary lines it cannot perform auto search Use the filter OFL LILILI
198. als digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches are shown in Figure 8 10 To access the slide switches remove the terminal cover and keypad For details on how to remove the terminal cover refer to the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual Chapter 2 Section 2 3 1 Removing the terminal cover and the main circuit terminal block cover and Chapter 1 Section 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks Figure 1 4 Table 8 1 lists the function of each slide switch Table 8 1 Function of Each Slide Switch Slide Switch Function Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE To make the digital input terminal X1 to X5 FWD or REV serve as a current sink turn SW1 to the SINK position To make them serve as a current source turn SWI to the SOURCE position Factory default SINK Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter on and off To connect a keypad to the inverter turn SW3 to OFF Factory default If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a terminating device turn SW3 to ON Switches the output mode of the output terminal FM between analog voltage and pulse output When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code F29 SW6 Data for F29 Analog voltage output FMA 0 Factory default Pulse output FMP SW Switches property o
199. and CME Torque limiter During constant speed 0 No limit Active 20 to 180 Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for driving 20 to 180 999 Disable Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for braking 20 to 180 999 Disable Terminal X5 function 14 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for driving 20 to 200 999 Disable Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for braking 20 to 200 999 Disable Terminal Y2 function 21 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Note Short circuit between terminals X5 and Y2 and between CM and CME Braking torque 0 Braking torque Low 1 Braking torque High Bias frequency 400 to 400 Hz Bias Frequency command 1 100 0 to 100 0 FVR EQS s data x 100 Maximum frequency 1 F03 Gain For frequency setting signal 0 00 to 250 Analog input adjustment for 12 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 Frequency limiter High 0 to 400 Hz Frequency limiter High 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Frequency limiter Low 0 to 400 Hz Frequency limiter Low 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Motor characteristics Output current fluctuation damping gain for motor 1 0 00 to 0 40 Usually no change is necessary Data initialization 0 Disable initialization 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Data initialization 0 Disable initialization 1 Initialize
200. and improve the power factor of inverter Using a DCR improves the input power factor to approximately 90 to 95 e At the time of shipping a jumper bar is connected across terminals P1 and P on the Note terminal block Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR e Ifa DCR is not going to be used do not remove the jumper bar Power supply FRENIC Multi Figure 6 9 External View of a DC Reactor DCR and Connection Example m m O zi z 9 U m D T T r m o c T m z Table 6 9 DC Reactors DCRs Power Nominal DC reactor DCR supply app ied Inverter type voltage motor T Fd Inductance Coil resistance Generated loss HP nee mH mQ W 18 FRNF12b1S 2U T8 DCR2 0 2 1 5 20 SE ENSE 1 6 a CI phase 6 7 8 8 75 o o5 20 14 98 9r 08 FRno20ets 2u nonas er oa 343 phase eee DCR4 3 7 I l a n 8 1 E rmwoiersau ocean 25 22 a 7 pwes oce a f e L3 N N Singe 71 prre ru Focras so ro as 2 8 Note 1 Generated losses listed in the above table are approximate values that are calculated according to the following conditions The power supply is three phase 230 V 460 V 50 Hz with 0 interphase voltage unbalance ratio The power supply capacity uses the larger of either 500 kVA or 10 times the rated capacity of the inverter The motor is a 4 pole standard model at full load 100 An AC r
201. andard standard Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link standard option card Via RS 485 communications link Inverter itself F02 option card Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link standard Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications link option card standard Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link option card option card Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link option card a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Command sources specified by y98 Data for y98 Frequency command Follow H30 data Run command Follow H30 data Via field bus option Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via field bus option Via field bus option Combination of command sources Via field bus option Frequency command Inverter itself Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link option card Via field bus option H30 0 Inverter itself y98 0 H30 1 y98 0 H30 4 H30 0 1 or 4 y98 1 Via RS 485 communications link standard H30 2 y98 0 H30 3 y98 0 H30 5 y98 0 H30 2 3 or 5 y98 1 Via RS 485 communications link option card H30 6 y98 0 o o M 3 o n g S E E o o 5 ia H30 7 y98 0 H30 8 y98 0 H30 6 7 or 8 y98 1
202. ar base E Triangular prism Tetrahedron with an equilateral triangular base Mass W kg Moment of inertia J kgm baxis aaxis IW A 1 a fd es J 2 W D24 5 A b 713 c axis 2d Je We Lo Lo LiD baxis aaxis db 1 2 2 J 2C We L 4 D b73 T J W Lo Ly Le Main metal density at 20 C p kg m Iron 7860 Copper 8940 Aluminum 2700 7 9 07 m r m O d z 0 O v d z 2 r O O D 2 Z o Z lt mi E m E O 0 gt Q d m op 3 Fora load running horizontally Assume a carrier table driven by a motor as shown in Figure 7 7 If the table speed is o m s when the motor speed is Ny r min then an equivalent distance from the shaft is equal to 60 v 2c Ny m The moment of inertia of the table and load to the shaft is calculated as follows _ 60 v E PO UNS W W kg m 7 9 2 Calculation of the acceleration time Figure 7 9 shows a general load model Assume that a motor drives a load via a reduction gear with efficiency ng The time required to accelerate this load in stop state to a speed of Ny r min is calculated with the following equation Ji JMe 27 e Nu 0 s TM x ls 60 7 10 tacc where Ji Motor shaft moment of inertia kg m Jo Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft kg m tw Minimum motor output torque in driving motor N m tL Ma
203. aracteristic factor Characteristic factor 76 Base frequency x 3396 Base frequency x 3396 a2 F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated In general set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency i e 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of motor 1 P03 To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set F11 to 0 00 Disable 9 22 9 2 Overview of Function Codes E Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor If the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12 the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload The thermal time constant for general purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx 5 minutes by factory default Data setting range 0 5 to 75 0 minutes in increments of 0 1 minute Example When the F12 data is set at 5 0 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm condition alarm code 7 when the output current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual driving time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the value specified as the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated cur
204. arameters are as listed in the following tables HP stands for horsepower which is a unit for motor power mainly used in US 230V Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load 94R X Rated slip ee Se Oe La HP Hz P02 A16 0 01 to 0 11 0 44 0 40 13 79 11 75 2 50 0 12 to 0 24 0 68 0 55 12 96 12 67 2 50 0 25 to 0 49 1 40 1 12 11 02 13 84 2 50 0 50 to 0 99 2 00 6 15 8 80 2 50 1 00 to 1 99 3 00 3 96 8 86 2 50 2 00 to 2 99 5 80 4 29 7 74 2 50 3 00 to 4 99 7 90 3 15 20 81 5 00 to 7 49 12 6 3 34 23 57 7 50 to 9 99 18 6 2 65 28 9 10 00 to 14 99 25 3 2 43 30 78 15 00 to 19 99 37 3 2 07 29 13 20 00 to 24 99 49 1 2 09 29 53 25 00 to 29 99 60 0 1 75 31 49 30 00 to 39 99 72 4 1 90 32 55 P03 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 460 V Motor capacity Noranal Rated Ne load AR o x Rated slip applied current current frequency e mote lt CD A 9 S Hz HP P02 A16 P03 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 m c z O a O Z Q O Og m Q 0 01 to 0 11 0 22 0 20 13 79 11 75 2 50 0 12 to 0 24 0 34 0 27 12 96 12 67 2 50 0 25 to 0 49 0 70 0 56 11 02 13 84 2 50 0 50 to 0 99 1 00 0 61 6 15 8 80 2 50 1 00 to 1 99 1 50 0 77 3 96 8 86 2 50 2 00 to 2 99 2 90 1 40 4 29 7 74 2 50 3 00 to 4 99 4 00 1 79 3 15 20 81 5 00 to 7 49 6 30 2 39 3 34 23 57 7 50 to 9 99 9 30 3 12 2 65 28 91 10 00 to 14 99 12 7 4 37 2 43 30
205. arm occurs TIE Factory default of H13 Restart time in seconds 9 27 W Restart after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentary power failure if the inverter output frequency and the idling motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating the overcurrent limiter If it happens the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the idling motor speed according to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action for the output frequency fall 0 00 Follow the deceleration time specified by F08 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting of the PI controller in the current limiter of the current limit control block shown in Figure 4 3 1 in Section 4 4 The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter Note If the frequency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output frequency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering the inverter overload prevention control ns Frequency Limiter High Frequency Limiter Low H63 Low Limiter Mode selection F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency r
206. ary power failure Limits the current by hardware to prevent an overcurrent trip from being caused by fast o 9 m Q I S d o Z 27 Control Item Slip compensation Explanation Compensates for decrease in speed according to the load enabling stable operation Time constant can be changed Possible to enable or disable slip compensation during acceleration deceleration or in constant output range Remarks Droop control Decrease the speed according to the load torque Torque limiter Controls the output torque lower than the set limit value Can be switched to the second torque limit with digital input signal Soft start filter function is available when switching the torque control to 1 2 Software current limiter Keeps the current under the preset value during operation by software Overload stop Detects torque or current If the detected value exceeds the preset one this function stops the motor in any of the following modes decelerate to stop coast to a stop and hit mechanical stop according to the function code J65 data PID control PID process control and PID dancer control are available Process command Keypad analog input terminals 12 and C1 and RS 485 communications Feedback value Analog input terminals 12 and C1 Alarm output absolute value alarm deviation alarm Normal operation inverse operation Anti reset windup function
207. ause A high frequency leakage current radiated from the inverter and motors enters shielded telephone cables causing noise Measures It is effective to commonly connect the grounding terminals of the motors and return the common grounding line to the grounding terminal of the inverter 3 Effect on proximity switches Phenomenon If an inverter operates proximity switches capacitance type may malfunction Probable cause The capacitance type proximity switches may provide inferior noise immunity Measures It is effective to connect a filter to the input terminals of the inverter or change the power supply treatment of the proximity switches The proximity switches can be replaced with superior noise immunity types such as magnetic types 4 Effect on pressure sensors Phenomenon If an inverter operates pressure sensors may malfunction Probable cause Noise may penetrate through a grounding wire into the signal line Measures It is effective to install a noise filter on the power supply side of the inverter or to change the wiring 5 Effect on position detectors pulse encoders Phenomenon If an inverter operates pulse encoders may produce erroneous pulses that shift the stop position of a machine Probable cause Erroneous pulses are liable to occur when the signal lines of the PG and power lines are bundled together Measure The influence of induction noise and radiation noise can be reduced by separating the PG signal lines and p
208. bance also becomes slow The shorter the integral time the faster the response Setting too short integral time however makes the inverter output tend to oscillate against the external disturbance A Deviation i Time 3 I I MV I i Time m Differential time J05 J05 specifies the differential time for the PID processor Data setting range 0 00 to 600 00 s 0 00 means that the differential component is ineffective D Differential action An operation that the MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo differential value of the deviation is called D action that outputs the manipulated value that differentiates the deviation D action makes the inverter quickly react to a rapid change of deviation The effectiveness of D action is expressed by differential time as parameter that is JO5 data Setting a long differential time will quickly suppress oscillation caused by P action when a deviation occurs Too long differential time makes the inverter output oscillation more Setting short differential time will weakens the suppression effect when the deviation occurs A Deviation i Time A MV gt Time 9 109 The combined use of P I and D actions are described below 1 PI control PI control which is a combination of P and I actions is generally used to minimize the remaining deviation caused by P action PI cont
209. block to feed the proper DC current to the motor for the DC braking 4 11 LED monitor speed monitor tem Keypad operation Reference frequency Q Motor speed in r min 3l O 4o command l Line speed command 5 O Constant feeding Lo rate time command ee 4 5 PID Process Control Block Frequency command 1 RJ 45 port RS 485 RS485 2 Host equipment communications option card Host equipment lH 2 o 7o Frequency command via OFF ify98 1 3 pae or H30 1 3 7 M S01 OFF if H30 1 3105 Last 5 7 8 command Field bus option card to take effect 0o Figure 4 4 1 PID Process Control Block Input Stage 4 12 E Oo 12 Pee Iu AE SIG C31 12 Fiter Gain Bias gt 7 ion Mode selection C32 X C34 CF18 X C50 Saleh Cte eee tat CAED Ce X50 c1 O O O TO O x Hardware ct 8 i 7 Gain Bias switch C1 function fundion PE dius ji C1 V2 fundion C1 V2 function Filter Offset Hardware PTC themistor switch Mode selection 63 SW8 ON H26 1 D oe O O O Aralm UH H27 Compa UPIDOWN control Ere theniser rator Initial frequency setting Le
210. cally switch its output frequency to ones of the torque limiter and continues to run The terminal command TL2 TL1 switches the level of torque limiting For the braking torque it limits the frequency control amount according to data of the function code H76 Upon activating of regeneration power suppression the inverter automatically switches its output frequency to ones of the regeneration power suppression mode and continues to run while lengthening the deceleration time consequently more than specified one For the braking torque it limits the frequency control amount according to data of the function code H76 as well as the torque limiting Upon activating of the current limiter the inverter switches automatically its output frequency to ones of the current limiter and continues to run Define the slip compensation involving the rated slip of the motor P12 the slip compensation gain for driving P09 and braking P11 separately for driving and braking and also the response to the slip compensation as a response time to the slip compensation P10 UJ r Q A z gt D E S n TI E Q O z Az r r O O The voltage calculator determines the output voltage of the inverter The calculator adjusts the output voltage to control the motor output torque Ifthe DC braking control is enabled the logic switches the voltage and frequency control components to the ones determined by the DC braking
211. canceled The inverter will start operation in the normal starting sequence If the Coast to a stop terminal command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode If a run command is entered with power supply applied the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency Note 9 25 During a momentary power failure the motor slows down After power is restored the inverter restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original output frequency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be enabled H12 1 Power failure Recovery F14 4 V V 4 DC link bus Undervoltage voltage US a a TE a Searching for TE motor speed Output frequency Motor speed a Acceleration i Auto restarting after 4 l momentary power failure o E IPF Time E Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time H16 H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration 0 0 to 30 0 seconds from an occurrence of a momentary power failure undervoltage until the inverter is to be restarted Specify the coast to stop time during which the mach
212. cator the LED E on O off monitor 1 Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED indicators Function Unit Meaning of displayed value code data for E43 Monitor items o U m o Z c E Z I m A m lt gt jw Speed monitor 0 Output f we eee SELL DOA Okw Frequency actually being output E48 0 compensation Output frequency coon 5 E W after slip Wiii Hz OA Ok Frequency actually being output E48 1 compensation pen SOLLI MHz OA Okw Reference frequency being set E48 2 Output frequency Hz x 120 Motor speed GL Mpz MA Okw TOUT POI E48 3 For motor 2 read P01 as A15 Load shaft speed HL MHz MA Okw Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 4 Line speed Sit Oz WA Bkw Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 5 Constant feeding 2 E50 B rate time Bec EHE Output frequency Hz x E39 E48 6 Output current A LlHz BA Okw Current output from the inverter in RMS Output voltage 2 Onz OA Okw Voltage output from the inverter in RMS Motor output torque in Calculated value Input power fic LDHz OA kw Input power to the inverter Calculated torque OnHz OA Okw 3 4 8 9 PID command PID command feedback amount 3 4 Oz OA Okw transformed to that of virtual physical value of the object to be controlled PID feedback e g temperature amount L Oz OA Okw Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for 3
213. ce with the electronic thermal a overload overload protection setting E Protects general purpose motors over the entire frequency range F10 1 Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency range s F10 2 B The operation level and thermal time constant can be set by F11 E and F12 pl m For motor 2 read F10 to F12 as A06 to A08 S e PTC A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor LH Yes Z thermistor protection Connect a PTC thermistor between terminals C1 and 11 and set the function codes and slide switch on the interface PCB accordingly Overload Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the inverter early is stopped by the electronic thermal overload protection for the warning motor Stall prevention Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is active Instantaneous overcurrent limiting Operates if the inverter s output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limit level avoiding tripping of the inverter during constant speed operation or during acceleration Alarm relay The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter Yes output issues an alarm and stops the inverter output for any fault lt Alarm reset gt The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the E key or by the digital input signal RST lt Saving the alarm history and detailed data gt The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and displayed Memory error The inve
214. cients specified by E40 and E41 you can specify 0 to 10096 of the PID command 100 for PID dancer control in an easy to understand converted command format For details of operation refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD PID command 1 Terminals 12 C1 C1 function C1 V2 function In addition to J02 setting it is necessary to select PID command 1 for analog input specified by any of E61 to E63 function code data 3 For details refer to the descriptions of E61 to E63 Terminal command UP DOWN Using the UP or DOWN command in conjunction with PID display coefficients specified by E40 and E41 you can specify 0 to 100 of the PID command 100 for PID dancer control in an easy to understand converted command format c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Q In addition to J02 setting it 1s necessary to assign UP and DOWN commands to any of terminals X1 through X5 with E01 through E05 function code data 17 18 For details of UP DOWN operation refer to the assignment of the UP and DOWN commands Command via communications link Use function code S13 that specifies the communications linked PID command The transmission data of 20000 decimal is equal to 100 maximum frequency of the PID command For details of the communications format refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEHA48b Other than the remote command selection by J02 the multi frequency C08 4 s
215. ck filter Anti reset windup Select alarm output Upper level alarm AH Lower level alarm AL Upper limit of PID process output Lower limit of PID process output Speed command filter Dancer reference position Detection width of dancer position deviation P Gain 2 Integral time 2 D Differential time 2 PID control block selection Detection value Detection level Mode selection Operation condition Timer Braking Signal Brake OFF current Brake OFF frequency Brake OFF timer Brake ON frequency Brake ON timer Positioning Control Start timer EIE Disable 9 Ep Enable Process control normal operation Enable Process control inverse operation Enable Dancer control UP DOWN keys on keypad PID command 1 Terminal command UP DOWN control Command via communications link 0 000 to 30 000 1 0 001 memo OC Ss N o to 200 pit Absolute value alarm Absolute value alarm with Hold Absolute value alarm with Latch Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch Deviation alarm Deviation alarm with Hold Deviation alarm with Latch Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch B 0 T 100 to 100 100 to 100 999 The F15 data applies 150 to 150 0 00 to 5 00 100 to 100 0 Disable switching PID constant 1 to 100 CIEE 1 3 1 a 1
216. command because of a detected broken wire etc this function issues an alarm and continues the inverter operation at the preset reference frequency specified as a ratio to the frequency just before the detection Protection Upon detecting a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 against ms this function stops the inverter output momentary If restart after momentary power failure is selected this function power failure invokes a restart process when power has been restored within a predetermined period Not applicable 8 32 8 7 Protective Functions LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overload In the event of overheating of the heat sink or an overload prevention condition alarm code 7 or Li Li the output frequency of control the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping Hardware error The inverter is stopped when poor connection between the EH Yes control printed circuit board control PCB and power printed circuit board power PCB interface printed circuit board interface PCB or option card or short circuit between terminals 13 and 11 is detected Mock alarm Simulated alarm 1s output to check the fault sequence Er Yes Not applicable 8 33 o UU m Q I S d o Z 27 Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES This chapter contains overview lists of function codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters and
217. ction 20 to 200 Torque limiter 2 20 to 200 999 No limit E17 Limiting level 999 Disable for braking Y1 terminal 0 Inverter running RUN Terminal Y1 0 Inverter running RUN function 1 Frequency equivalence signal FAR function 1 Frequency arrival signal FAR Function 2 Frequency level detection FDT 2 Frequency detected FDT E20 3 Undervoltage detection signal LU E20 3 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped 4 Torque polarity B D LU 5 Torque limiting TL 4 Torque polarity detected D B 6 Auto resetting IPF 5 Inverter output limiting IOL Y2 terminal 7 Overload early warning OL Terminal Y2 6 Auto restarting after momentary power function 8 Lifetime alarm main circuit capacitor function failure IPF E21 LIFE E21 7 Motor overload early warning OL 9 2nd frequency equivalence detection 30 Service life alarm LIFE FAR2 21 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Frequency 0 01 to 10 0 s Frequency 0 01 to 10 0 s E29 equivalence E29 arrival delay delay time A 36 FVR E11S App F Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S FAR function signal Hysteresis FDT function signal Level Hysteresis 0 0 to 10 0 Hz Frequency arrival Hysteresis width 0 0 to 10 0 Hz 0 to 400 Hz 0 0 to 30 0 Hz Frequency detection FDT Detection Hysteresis
218. ction Code Tables e eo A e aee be eee opio REC 9 1 92 Overview of Function Codes ose bhi Ree tee bte p nb eene pet 9 14 9 2 1 F codes Fundamental functions sesssssssessessesee eee enne nennen nennen 9 14 9 2 2 E codes Extension terminal functions essere eene 9 43 9 2 3 C codes Control f nctions ure e HERR EI Re EE ER RU De ieee 9 70 9 2 44 P codes Motor 1 parameters esee ege e E EEEE 9 77 9 2 5 H codes High performance functions ccceecceesceescesecesceeeeesecesecnaeceaecaeecaeeeaeeeaeeneeeaeeeeeeneeeerenerens 9 80 9 2 6 A codes Motor 2 parameters nennen eren enne nnne nennen nennen 9 102 9 2 7 J codes Application functions enne enne ener nnne nnne nnns 9 104 9 2 8 y codes Link functions essen ener enne enne ener nennen nenne 9 119 App A A l A 2 A 3 App B B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 App C App D App E App F Fl F2 F3 Appendices Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise A 1 Effect of inverters on other devices cesceseesseesceeseeeseeeeceseeeseceeeeseeeseeeseceaecesecnsecsaecaaenaecaecnaecaseceeenes A 1 NOISE RS A 2 W ILEA AE 01 a PA ddr et EE E E E N E e tS s A 4 Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters A 12 Generating mechanism of surge voltages ccccecceesseeseesseescesseeeeceseceseeesecaecsaecaaecaecaecaaecaeeeaeeeneeneeeas A 12 Effect of Surge
219. ction level specified by J64 for the period specified by J67 the inverter activates the overload stop function according to operation specified by J65 Use this function for such as system protection from applying a load that cannot be allowed by the system characteristics or any reason on the system design or system in Ratio 96 Overload Stop Detection value Overload Stop Detection level Overload Stop Mode selection Overload Stop Operation condition which the motor spindle is locked by a mechanical stopper m Detection value J63 J63 specifies the detection value of status index to be monitored Data for J63 Detection value Output torque Subtraction a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Description To improve the accuracy of torque calculation be sure to auto tune the inverter for the applied motor This setting covers the driving torque only Output current m Detection level J64 The no load current to the motor always flows Specify J64 Detection level correctly considering the no load current of the applied motor J64 specifies the detection level putting the rated torque and current of the motor as 100 9 115 m Mode selection J65 J65 specifies operation when the load amount exceeds that of one specified by J64 Data for J65 Description Disable The inverter cancels the overload stop function The inverter decelerate to stops the motor by the D
220. ctionally equivalent to active OFF signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system An active ON signal can be switched to active OFF signal and vice versa with the function code data setting To set the negative logic system for an I O terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code Some signals cannot switch to active OFF depending upon their assigned functions Example Coast to a stop command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X5 using any of function codes E01 through E05 Function code data BX 7 Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop Active ON 1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop Active OFF 9 2 9 1 Function Code Tables The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters F codes Fundamental Functions Code F00 F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12 F14 F15 F16 F18 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 tm TUTTO Data Protection Disable both data protection and digital reference protection Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection Enable both data protection and digital reference protection UP DOWN keys on keypad Voltage input to terminal 12 10
221. ctronic thermal overload protection after the preset operation level current continuously flows This is an adjustable function code data to meet the property of a motor that is not manufactured by Fuji Electric Related function codes F12 and A08 Torque boost If a general purpose motor is run with an inverter voltage drops will have a pronounced effect in a low frequency region reducing the motor output torque In a low frequency range therefore to increase the motor output torque it is necessary to augment the output voltage This process of voltage compensation is called torque boost Related function codes F09 and A05 Output voltage V Torque boost 0 Output frequency Hz Transistor output A control signal that generates predefined data from within an inverter via a transistor open collector Trip In response to an overvoltage overcurrent or any other unusual condition actuation of an inverter s protective circuit to stop the inverter output V f characteristic A characteristic expression of the variations in output voltage V V and relative to variations in output frequency f Hz To achieve efficient motor operation an appropriate V f voltage frequency characteristic helps a motor produce its output torque matching the torque characteristics of a load V f control The rotating speed N r min of a motor can be stated in an expression as N 2120xf q s p where f Output
222. cy for matching the current operation situation The control block section which is the very brain of the inverter allows you to customize the inverter s driving patterns throughout the function code data settings Main circuit gt Converter 1 DC link bus capacitor lt Control block gt Accelerator decelerator processor Dynamic torque vector controller Frequency with flux estimator command or voltage calculator Current detection Figure 1 24 Schematic Overview Block Diagram of FRENIC Multi 1 3 Recommended Configuration 1 3 Recommended Configuration To control a motor with an inverter correctly you should consider the rated capacity of both the motor and the inverter and ensure that the combination matches the specifications of the machine or system to be used After selecting the rated capacities select appropriate peripheral equipment for the inverter then connect them to the inverter Figure 1 25 shows the recommended configuration for an inverter and peripheral equipment Three phase power supply or Single phase power supply Molded case circuit breaker MCCB or Ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection Magnetic contactor Braking resistor DC reactor Induction motor Figure 1 25 Recommended Configuration Diagram i9 m o 9 BInIN OIN343 OL NOILONGOYLNI Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS This cha
223. d to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation or similar Tip 2 Drive more than one motor selectively by a single inverter 3 Selectively cut off the motor whose thermal overload relay or equivalent devices have been activated 6 8 6 3 Peripheral Equipment Driving the motor using commercial power lines MCs can also be used to switch the power supply of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial power supply Select the MC so as to satisfy the rated currents listed in Table 6 1 which are the most critical RMS currents for using the inverter Refer to Table 6 4 For switching the motor drive source between the inverter output and commercial power lines use the MC of class AC3 specified by JIS C8325 in the commercial line side 1 2 Connection example and criteria for selection of circuit breakers Figure 6 2 shows a connection example for MCCB or GFCI with overcurrent protection in the inverter input circuit Table 6 4 lists the rated current for the MCCB and corresponding inverter models Table 6 5 lists the applicable grades of GFCI sensitivity ANWARNING Insert an MCCB or GFCI with overcurrent protection recommended for each inverter for its input circuits Do not use an MCCB or GFCI of a higher rating than that recommended ile m D o D Doing so could result in a fire L amp LA nes A Molded case circuit breaker ground fault circuit interrupter
224. d ID2 Function code data 37 38 The ZD or ID2 output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by E34 Current detection Level or E37 Current detection 2 Level for the time longer than the one specified by E35 Current detection Timer or E38 Current detection 2 Timer respectively The minimum ON duration is 100 ms The ZD or ID2 goes OFF when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level These two output signals can be assigned to two different digital output terminals independently if necessary c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL but also for the operation level of the current detection JD Refer to the description of E34 Note m PID alarm PID ALM Function code data 42 Assigning this output signal enables PID control specified by J11 through J13 to output absolute value alarm and deviation alarm m Switched to motor 2 SWM2 Function code data 49 This output signal comes ON when motor 2 is selected with the M2 M1 terminal command assigned to a digital input terminal For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05 Function code data 12 m Brake signal BRKS Function code data 57 This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake Refer to the descriptions of J68 through J72 9 59 m Alarm out
225. d fault circuit interrupter GFCI and magnetic contactor MC 1 1 Functional overview E MCCBs and GFCIs With overcurrent protection Molded Case Circuit Breakers MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between the power supply and inverter s main circuit terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase or L1 L and L2 N for single phase power supply from overload or short circuit which in turn prevents secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters GFCIs function in the same way as MCCBs Built in overcurrent overload protective functions protect the inverter itself from failures related to its input output lines B MCs An MC can be used at both the power input and output sides of the inverter At each side the MC works as described below When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter the MC can also switch the motor drive power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines At the power supply side Insert an MC in the power supply side of the inverter in order to 1 Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power supply generally commercial factory power lines with the protective function built into the inverter or with the external signal input 2 Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due to internal external circuit failures 3 Cut off the inverter from the power supply when the
226. d of this noise is less than approximately 30 to 40 MHz Therefore the noise will affect devices such as AM radios using low frequency band but will not virtually affect FM radios and television sets using higher frequency than this frequency band Figure A 1 Outline of Inverter Configuration App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise 2 Types of noise Noise generated in an inverter 1s propagated through the main circuit wiring to the power supply and the motor so as to affect a wide range of applications from the power supply transformer to the motor The various propagation routes are shown in Figure A 2 According to those routes noises are roughly classified into three types conduction noise induction noise and radiation noise Power supply Radio transformer 4 g A Machine I Electronic device Figure A 2 Noise Propagation Routes 1 Conduction noise Noise generated in an inverter may propagate through the conductor and power supply so as to affect peripheral devices of the inverter Figure A 3 This noise is called conduction noise Some conduction noises will propagate through the main circuit If the ground wires are connected to a common ground conduction noise will propagate through route As shown in route some conduction noises will propagate through signal lines or shielded wires Inverter Power supply device Signal line Sensor
227. dback on the keypad as pressure E40 30 0 that determines the display value at 100 of PID process command or its feedback E41 7 5 that determines the display value at 0 of PID process command or its feedback To control the pressure at 16 kPa on the keypad set the value to 16 0 Value displayed PID display coefficient A H E40 30 0 16 0 p kPa PID process command PID feedback 20 700 1V 343V 5V PID display coefficient B E41 7 5 m Display coefficients for PID dancer positioning command and its feedback J01 3 Under the PID dancer control the PID dancer positioning command and its feedback operate the range within 100 so specify the value at 100 of the PID command or its feedback as coefficient A with E40 and the value at 100 as coefficient B with E41 Value displayed PID display coefficient A b Medeea aSa ch oseeessy PID display coefficient B A PID command 100 0 100 PID feedback m c z O a O Z Q O Og m 07 If the sensor output is unipolar the PID dancer control operates within the range from 0 to 110095 so virtually specify the value at 100 as coefficient B That is suppose b Display value at 095 then Display coefficient B 2b A For details about the PID control refer to the description of JO1 and later I For the display method of the PID command and its f
228. e Analog input An external voltage or current input signal to give the inverter the frequency command The analog voltage 1s applied on the terminal 12 the current on the C1 These terminals are also used to input the signal from the external potentiometer PTC thermistor and PID feedback signals depending on the function code definition Related function codes F01 C30 E59 E61 to E63 and J02 Analog output An analog DC output signal of the monitored data such as the output frequency the current and voltage inside an inverter The signal drives an analog meter installed outside the inverter for indicating the current inverter running status Refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 3 1 functions Terminal Automatic deceleration A control mode in which deceleration time is automatically extended up to 3 times of the commanded time to prevent the inverter from tripping due to an _ overvoltage caused by regenerative power even if a braking resistor is not used Related function code H69 Auto energy saving operation Energy saving operation that automatically drives the motor with lower output voltage when the motor load has been light for minimizing the product of voltage and current electric power Related function codes F37 and A13 AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator control A control that keeps an output voltage constant regardless of variations of the input source voltage or load Base frequency Output vol
229. e m Enable DC braking DCBRK Function code data 13 This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter s digital input Refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 for DC braking m Select torque limiter level TL2 TL 1 Function code data 14 This terminal command switches between torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 and torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 as listed below If no TLZ TLI terminal command is assigned torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 takes effect by default Input terminal command n TL2 TLI Torque limiter level c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 Torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 m UP Increase output frequency and DOWN Decrease output frequency commands UP and DOWN Function code data 17 18 Frequency setting When the UP DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON causes the output frequency to increase or decrease respectively within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below UP DOWN Data 17 Data 18 Function Keep the current output frequency Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time currently specified Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time currently specified Keep the current output frequency The UP DOWN control is available in two modes one mode H61 0 in
230. e 0 000 to 30 000 multiple P Proportional action An operation in which an MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the deviation is called P action which outputs a manipulated value in proportion to deviation However the manipulated variable alone cannot eliminate deviation Gain is data that determines the system response level against the deviation in P action An increase in gain speeds up response but an excessive gain may oscillate the inverter output A decrease in gain delays response but it stabilizes the inverter output A Deviation T i ai i Time 3 MV m Time 9 108 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Integral time J04 J04 specifies the integral time for the PID processor Data setting range 0 0 to 3600 0 s 0 0 means that the integral component is ineffective I Integral action An operation that the change rate of an MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the integral value of deviation is called I action which outputs the manipulated value that integrates the deviation Therefore I action is effective in bringing the feedback amount close to the commanded value For the system whose deviation rapidly changes however this action cannot make it react quickly The effectiveness of I action is expressed by integral time as parameter that is J04 data The longer the integral time the slower the response The reaction to the external distur
231. e RMS rating of the motor nennen 7 12 72 Selecting a Braking Resistor 43 sect aR Re e MI AR GAR AAG Oa a o IRR Ete ape Rese 7 13 7 2 1 Selection procedure eee diee tee ee ete i RR veda e Eee ee ra e eH edd 7 13 7 2 2 NOtes Om selection e cR REB NNI 7 13 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters When selecting a general purpose inverter first select a motor and then inverter as follows 1 Key point for selecting a motor Determine what kind of load machine is to be used calculate its moment of inertia and then select the appropriate motor capacity 2 Key point for selecting an inverter Taking into account the operation requirements e g acceleration time deceleration time and frequency in operation of the load machine to be driven by the motor selected in 1 above calculate the acceleration deceleration braking torque This section describes the selection procedure for 1 and 2 above First it explains the output torque obtained by using the motor driven by the inverter FRENIC Multi 7 1 1 Motor output torque characteristics Figures 7 1 and 7 2 graph the output torque characteristics of motors at the rated output frequency individually for 50 Hz and 60 Hz base The horizontal and vertical axes show the output frequency and output torque 96 respectively Curves a through f depend on the running conditions 250 Q gt o E d 200 180 150 100 50
232. e a mechanical brake at the same time Note The similar function is the current limiter specified by F43 and F44 The current limiter F43 F44 implements the current control by software so an operation delay occurs When you have enabled the current limiter F43 F44 also enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 to obtain a quick response current limiting Depending on the load extremely short acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency causing the system oscillation hunting or activating the inverter overvoltage trip alarm 7 When specifying the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load 9 90 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Frequency fall rate F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Allowable momentary power failure time F14 For configuring these function codes restart time frequency fall rate and allowable momentary power failure time refer to the description of F14 Thermistor Mode selection H27 Thermistor Level These function codes specify the PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor The thermistor is used to protect the motor from overheating or
233. e changed Data protection 0 Disable data protection and digital reference protection 1 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection Frequency command 1 0 Setting by keypad panel operation Frequency command 1 0 UP DOWN keys on keypad 1 Setting by voltage and current input Frequency command 1 3 Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function Operation method 0 Keypad operation Motor rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV 1 Operation by external input Operation method 0 RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV digital input Maximum 50 to 400 Hz frequency 1 Maximum frequency 1 50 0 to 400 0 Hz Base frequency 50 to 400 Hz 1 Base frequency 50 0 to 400 0 Hz Rated voltage 10V The output voltage in proportion to the power supply 230 V 0 80 to 240 V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 80 to 240 V for 230V 160 to 480 V for 460 V 0 V Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage voltage is set 460 V 0 320 to 480 V Maximum output voltage 1 80 to 240 V for 230V If F05 0 set the same voltage as F05 data If F05 0 you can set an arbitrary value 160 to 480 V for 460 V Acceleration 2 0 01 to 3600 s time 1 Acceleration time 1 0 01 to
234. e current s return trip it flowed through a grounded pole transformer and noise entered the telephone by electrostatic induction A photoelectric relay malfunctioned when the inverter runs the motor The inverter and motor are installed in the same place for overhead traveling Inverter Power 3s Photoelectric supply line relay Panel in ceiling part _ Power supply part of photoelectric relay 24 V Panel on the ground lt Possible cause gt It is considered that induction noise entered the photoelectric relay since the inverter s input power supply line and the photoelectric relay s wiring are in parallel separated by approximately 0 98inch 25mm over a distance of 98 to 131 ft 30 to 40m Due to conditions of the installation these lines cannot be separated Continued Noise prevention measures 1 Connect the ground terminals of the motors in a common connection Return to the inverter panel and insert a 1 uF capacitor between the input terminal of the inverter and ground 1 The effect of the inductive filter and LC filter may not be expected because of sound frequency component 2 In the case of a V connection power supply transformer in a 230V system it is necessary to connect capacitors as shown in the following figure because of different potentials to ground Power supply transformer 1 As a temporary measure Insert a 0 1 uF capacitor between the
235. e dancer reference position the dancer reference position detection bandwidth J58 the inverter switches PID constants from the combination of J03 J04 and J05 to that of J59 J60 and J61 respectively in its PID processor Giving a boost to the system response by raising the P gain may improve the system performance in the dancer roll positioning accuracy m Detection width of dancer position deviation J58 J58 specifies the bandwidth in 1 to 100 Specification of 0 does not switch PID constants m P Gain 2 J59 m Integral time 2 J60 m D Differential time 2 J61 Descriptions for J59 J60 and J61 are the same as those of PID control P Gain J03 I Integral time J04 and D Differential time J05 respectively 9 114 9 2 Overview of Function Codes J62 PID Control PID control block selection This function code allows you to select either adding or subtracting the PID dancer control processor output to the primary speed command and the PID processor output for the primary speed command either controls by the ratio or compensates by the absolute value Hz Data for J62 Control function Decimal Bit 1 Control value type Operation for the primary speed command Absolute value Hz Addition Absolute value Hz Subtraction Ratio 96 Addition J63 J64 J65 J66 J67 Overload Stop Timer When the monitored status index of the load exceeds the dete
236. e item number e g 4_ and data e g Output current for any other item displayed using the 9 and V keys 6 Press the e key to return to a list of alarm codes Press the e key again to return to the menu Table 3 19 Alarm Information Displayed LED monitor shows Item displayed Description item No s Pi Output frequency Output frequency N Output current Output current i T N Output voltage Output voltage Pa n N Calculated torque Calculated motor output torque Pe IN N Reference frequency Frequency specified by frequency command This shows the rotational direction being output forward 7 reverse Rotational direction This shows the running status in hexadecimal Refer to Bi Displaying running status in Section 3 3 4 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Running status Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 Cumulative run time When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the numb
237. e motor so that this RMS current will not exceed the rated current of the motor NMAX Motor speed Acceleration and deceleration torque Motor required torque Load current Figure 7 10 Sample of the Repetitive Operation First calculate the required torque of each part based on the speed pattern Then using the torque current curve of the motor convert the torque to the motor current The equivalent RMS current Ieq can be finally calculated by the following equation h eti th tzt t3 I4 t4tIs t leq gS da ud ie oen 7 15 tj t t2 t t3 t tat ts tg The torque current curve for the dedicated motor 1s not available for actual calculation Therefore calculate the motor current I from the load torque 1 using the following equation 7 16 Then calculate the equivalent current Ieq 2 I s x ur Imioo A 7 16 Where 1 is the load torque Itoo is the torque current and 15100 is exciting current 7 12 7 2 Selecting a Braking Resistor 7 2 Selecting a Braking Resistor 7 2 1 Selection procedure The following three requirements must be satisfied simultaneously 1 The maximum braking torque should not exceed values listed in Tables 6 6 to 6 8 in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors To use the maximum braking torque exceeding values in those tables select the braking resistor having one class larger capacity 2 The discharge energy for a single braking action should n
238. e primary frequency command C entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 5 Primary Frequency Command Specified with A QO Keys and Requirements PID Communi control LED Frequency Multi Multi cations Mode monitor command 1 frequency frequency link selection E43 F01 SS2 SSI operation JO LE Pressing ANA IY keys controls OFF Final frequency PID command modified enabled by PID output ON Keypad primary PID command disabled Frequency OFF Final frequency PID command modified enabled by PID output Other than the above ON Current primary PID command disabled Frequency Link disabled F01 0 LE OFF SS2 SS1 OFF Primary frequency command from keypad Frequency setting O other than above Command via link B is Multi frequency command Final frequency command PID cancel Hz PID ON PID output as frequency command 3 8 3 2 Running Mode 3 2 3 Running stopping the motor By factory default pressing the fur key starts KEYPAD running the motor in the forward direction and o7 CONTROL PRG MODE pressing the 6o key decelerates the motor to stop nme cs The fur key is enabled only in Running mode The motor rotational direction can be selected by changing the setting of functio
239. e the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s Noise When an inverter 1s used with a general purpose motor the motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher level of wind roaring sound In running special motors High speed motors If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a high speed motor test run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check for safe operation Explosion proof motors When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance Submersible motors and pumps These motors have a higher rated current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is higher than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the electronic thermal overcurrent protection for motor Brake motors For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their power supply for brake must be supplied from the inverter s primary circuit If the power supply for brake is connected to the inverter s output circuit by mistake the brake will not work Do not use inverters for driving motors
240. e tuning P05 A19 No load current P06 A20 R1 P07 A21 X P08 A22 Slip compensation gain for driving P09 A23 Slip compensation response time P10 A24 Slip compensation gain for braking P11 A25 Rated slip frequency P12 A26 Motor Selection P99 A39 Slip Compensation Operating conditions H68 A40 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor H80 A41 Cumulative Motor Run Time H94 A45 Startup Times of Motor H44 A46 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Motor 2 imposes functional restrictions on the following function codes Confirm the settings of those function codes before use Functions Restrictions Related function codes Non linear V f pattern Disabled Linear V f pattern only H50 to H53 Starting frequency Starting frequency holding time not F24 supported Stop frequency Stop frequency holding time not F39 supported Overload early warning Disabled E34 and E35 Droop control Disabled H28 UP DOWN control Disabled Fixed at default setting 0 H61 PID control Disabled JO1 Braking signal Disabled J68 to J72 Software current limiter Disabled F43 and F44 Rotation direction limitation Disabled H08 Overload stop Disabled J63 to J67 To run motor 2 with the M2 M1 terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the M2 MI should not be delayed 10 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 10 ms motor 1 will be driven by default Not
241. eactor ACR is not connected 6 18 6 4 Selecting Options 3 AC reactors ACRs Usean ACR when the converter part of the inverter should supply very stable DC power for example in DC link bus operation shared PN operation Generally ACRs are used for correction of voltage waveform and power factor or for power supply matching but not for suppressing harmonic components in the power lines For suppressing harmonic components use a DCR An ACR should be also used when the power supply is extremely unstable for example when the power supply involves an extremely large interphase voltage unbalance MCCB AC reactor Magnetic contactor Inverter GFCI ACR With overcurrent protection Figure 6 10 External View of AC Reactor ACR and Connection Example Table 6 10 AC Reactor ACR Nominal AC reactor ACR applied motor Rated current Reactance mQ phase Type HP A 60 Hz Power supply voltage Generated loss FRNOO1E1S 2U ACR2 0 75A FFRNoO2E1S 20_ ACR215A 3 Three 230V 1 2 3 10 H 15 iE fal N o a LNAWdINOA 1vsaHdlead ONILOATAS m s BW phase 3 FRNOOSE1S 2U JACR22 2A n 213 256 16 3 12 FRNFSOE1S4U ona 75 2 5 1920 2300 5 FRN001E1S 4U 10 2 FRN002E1S 4U ACR4 1 5A 1160 1390 11 phase FRN005E1S 4U ACR4 3 7A 615 17 9 f Sngle 1 2 FRNF50 15 7U ACR2 0 75A 493 phase 7 5 10 15 20 N o o oO o N 230V 1
242. eady for jogging 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK 1014 Select torque limiter level TLZ TL1 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 1021 Switch nomal inverse operation IVS 1024 Enable communications link via LE RS 485 or field bus 1025 Universal DI U DI 26 1026 Enable auto search for idling motor STM speed at starting 30 1030 Force to stop STOP 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential PID RST components 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 42 1042 Reserved 2 43 1043 Reserved 2 44 1044 Reserved 2 45 1045 Reserved 2 Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively E10 Acceleration Time 2 0 00 to 3600 n 9 18 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring extemal soft 9 55 E11 Deceleration Time 2 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring extemal soft start T Limiting level for driving 999 Disable 9 55 999 Disable o E20 Terminal Y 1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the correspondin
243. ecelerate qiston specified deceleration time The inverter shuts down the output immediately and the tt t Coan IO siop motor coast to stops The inverter decelerates the motor with the torque limit operation and is controlling the output current to keep the hold toque until the run command turned OFF Make the mechanical brake turn on before turning the run command OFF The inverter issues an alarm JOL or IOL2 during the mechanical stopper operation Mechanical stopper Cote e Once the overload stop function is activated the inverter holds it and cannot accelerate the motor again To reaccelerate the motor turn the run command OFF and ON again f J65 3 the inverter ignores the driving toque limit operation already specified Configuration examples Operation Selection J65 1 or 2 Mechanical stopper Y Motor speed Output frequency Decelerate to stop Coast to stop Detection Level J64 2d p Time J67 Output current Output torque Operation selection J65 3 Mechanical stopper y Motor speed Output frequency Torque limit Detection Level J64 Output Torque Output Current E control 9 116 m Operation condition J66 9 2 Overview of Function Codes J66 specifies the inverter s operation Data for J66 Applicable operation mode state to apply the overload stop function Note that carefully specify it so as not t
244. ecognized Data for y02 and y12 Function Immediately trip after showing an RS 485 communications error 5 77 for y02 and for y12 The inverter stops with alarm issue Run during the time set on the error processing timer y03 y13 display an RS 485 communications error 4 for y02 and for y12 and then stop operation The inverter stops with alarm issue Retry transmission during the time set on the error processing timer y03 y13 If communications link is recovered continue operation Otherwise display an RS 485 communications error E 4 for y02 and for y12 and stop operation The inverter stops with alarm issue Continue to run even when a communications error occurs For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual m Timer yO3 and y13 y03 or y13 specifies an error processing timer When the set timer count has elapsed because of no response on other end etc if a response request was issued the inverter interprets that an error occurs See the section of No response error detection time y08 y18 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 s 9 120 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Baud rate y04 and y14 y04 and y14 specify the transmission speed Data for y04 for RS 485 communications and y14 Setting for FRENIC Loader Set the same transmission speed as that specified by the connected PC Transmission speed bps m Dat
245. ed Terminal Grounding p supply Inverter type torque torque Refer to motor screw S1ze screw size voltage HP Ib in N m Ib in N m 1 8 FRNFI2EIS 2U 1 4 FRNF2SEIS U M35 1060012 M35 106 12 FigureA 1 2 FRNF50E1S 2U 1 FRNOOIEIS 2U Three 2 FRNOO2EIS 2U phase 5 FRNO0O3EIS 2U M4 15 9 1 8 M4 15 9 1 8 Figure B 230 V 5 FRNOOSE1S 2U 7 5 FRNO07E1S 2U T ENOUET M5 33 6 3 8 M5 33 6 3 8 PONY 15 FRNOISEIS 2U 3 ROUE SU M6 51 3 5 8 M6 51 3 5 8 1 2 FRNF50E1S 4U 1 FRNOOIEIS 4U 2 FRNOO2EIS 4U M4 15 9 1 8 M4 15 9 1 8 Figure B Three 3 FRNO03E1S 4U phase 5 FRNOOSE1S 4U on 460 V 7 5 FRNOO7E1S 4U m M 33 6 3 8 M 33 6 3 8 m 10 FRNO10E1S 4U 2 ie i ae pene 9 15 FRNOISEIS 4U o 2 EENGXGEISM M6 51 3 5 8 M6 51 3 5 8 S 1 8 FRNF12E1S 7U Oo 1 4 FRNF25E1S 7U zZ M3 5 10 6 1 2 M3 5 10 6 1 2 F D o rod 1 2 FRNFSOEIS 7U 152 TE ees 3 id 1 FRNOOIEIS 7U PRAWU M4 15 9 1 8 M4 15 9 1 8 Figure E 3 FRN003E1S 7U ANED PES i Pigire 8 19 8 3 2 2 Control circuit terminals The control circuit terminal arrangement screw sizes and tightening torque are shown below Dad Screw size M3 Tightening torque 4 4 to 5 3 Ib in 0 5 to 0 6 N m Screwdriver type Flat screwdriver 0 6 x 3 5 mm CPDPEIIS Table 8 3 Control Circuit Terminals Allowable wire size AWG26 to AWGI6 0 14 to 1 5 mm Wire strip length Ferrule terminal for Europe type
246. eedback refer to the description of E43 LED Display Filter E42 specifies a filter time constant to be applied for displaying the output frequency output current and other running status monitored on the LED monitor on the keypad If it is difficult to read data displayed on the monitor due to load fluctuation or other causes increase this filter time constant LED Monitor Item selection E48 LED Monitor Item selection E43 specifies the monitoring item to be displayed on the LED monitor Data for E43 Function Displays the following Description Speed monitor Selected by the sub item of function code E48 Output current Inverter output current expressed in RMS A Output voltage Inverter output voltage expressed in RMS V Calculated torque Output torque of the motor 0 3 4 8 9 Input power Inverter s input power kW PID command value frequency Refer to E40 and E41 PID feedback amount Refer to E40 and E41 Timer value for timer operation Remaining time of timer operation specified s PID output value 100 at maximum frequency Load factor Inverter s load factor Motor output Motor output kW If 0 Disable is set for function code J01 appears on the LED monitor Specifying the speed monitor with E43 provides a choice of speed monitoring formats selectable with E48 LED Monitor D
247. efine the speed monitoring format on the LED monitor as listed below Data for E48 Display format of the sub item Output frequency before slip compensation Expressed in Hz Output frequency after slip compensation Expressed in Hz Reference frequency Expressed in Hz Motor speed in r min 120 Number of poles P01 x Frequency Hz Load shaft speed in r min Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Line speed in m min Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Constant feeding rate time min Coefficient for speed indication E50 Frequency Hz x Coefficient for constant feeding rate time E39 9 2 Overview of Function Codes LCD Monitor Item selection E45 specifies the LCD monitor display mode to be applied when the inverter using the multi function keypad is in Running mode Data for E45 Function 0 Running status rotational direction and operation guide 1 Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque Example of display for E45 0 during running LED monitor indicators Running Rotational status direction Operation guide a A a Indicators for FWD REV STOP REM LOC running status and source of operation Output frequency Bar charts Output current Calculated torque O A A A a aA FWD REV STOP REM LOG Full scale values on bar charts
248. electric line can be reduced App B Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters Disclaimer This document provides you with a summary of the Technical Document of the Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association JEMA March 1995 It is intended to apply to the domestic market only It is only for reference for the foreign market B 1 Preface When an inverter drives a motor surge voltages generated by switching the inverter elements are superimposed on the inverter output voltage and applied to the motor terminals If the surge voltages are too high they may have an effect on the motor insulation and some cases have resulted in damage For preventing such cases this document describes the generating mechanism of the surge voltages and countermeasures against them LL Refer to A 2 1 Inverter noise for details of the principle of inverter operation Generating mechanism of surge voltages As the inverter rectifies a commercial power source voltage and smoothes into a DC voltage the magnitude E of the DC voltage becomes about 42 times that of the source voltage about 620 V in case of an input voltage of 440 VAC The peak value of the output voltage is usually close to this DC voltage value But as there exists inductance L and stray capacitance C in wiring between the inverter and the motor the voltage variation due to switching the inverter elements causes a surge voltage or
249. en e ue er e SL LE Ep e 9 eb db nu i f ud Figure 3 4 Menu Transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup Tip Through a multi function keypad you can add or delete function codes that are subject to Quick Setup For details refer to the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual Once you have added or deleted function codes for Quick Setup through a multi function keypad they will remain valid even after you switch to a standard keypad To restore the function code settings subject to Quick Setup to their factory defaults initialize the whole data using function code H03 data 1 3 3 Programming Mode Basic key operation This section gives a description of the basic key operation following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 5 This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default CI amp keys on keypad F01 0 to Current input to terminal C1 Cl function 4 to 20 mA DC F01 2 1 Turn the inverter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example 7c is displayed 2 Ifanything other than Frm is displayed use the 9 and amp keys to display Erm 3 Press the key to proceed to a list of f
250. ent electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from deterioration The package must be airtight to protect the inverter from moisture Add a drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70 If the inverter has been installed to the equipment or panel at construction sites where it may be subjected to humidity dust or dirt then temporarily remove the inverter and store it in the environment specified in Table 8 7 Precautions for storage over 1 year If the inverter has not been powered on for a long time the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate Power the inverters on once a year and keep the inverters powering on for 30 to 60 minutes Do not connect the inverters to the load circuit secondary side or run the inverter 8 22 8 5 External Dimensions 8 5 External Dimensions 8 5 1 Standard models The diagrams below show external dimensions of the FRENIC Multi series of inverters according to the type Unit inch mm 4 72 120 Dimensions inch mm supply Inverter type voltage D p1 ps Three ERNF12E1S 2U 362 92 0 39 10 Q phase LERNE25E18 2U Cr nee ae z 230 V FRNF50E1S 2U 4 21 107 0 98 25 o FRN001E1S 2U 5 2 132 1 97 50 o F FRNF12E1S 7U RA FRNF25E1S 7U 2682 92 3 93 g2 03910 o P30v FRNFSOE1S 7U 4 21 107 0 98 25 az FRNOO1E1S 7
251. ent of inertia is an important element in the acceleration and deceleration First calculation method of moment of inertia is described then those for acceleration and deceleration time are explained T 1 Calculation of moment of inertia For an object that rotates around the shaft virtually divide the object into small segments and square the distance from the shaft to each segment Then sum the squares of the distances and the masses of the segments to calculate the moment of inertia J2X Wien kg m 7 7 The following describes equations to calculate moment of inertia having different shaped loads or load systems 1 Hollow cylinder and solid cylinder The common shape of a rotating body is hollow cylinder The moment of inertia J kg m around the hollow cylinder center axis can be calculated as follows where the outer and inner diameters are Di and D m and total mass is W kg in Figure 7 8 W D D 8 For a similar shape a solid cylinder calculate the moment of inertia as D is 0 J P kg m 7 8 Figure 7 8 Hollow Cylinder 2 Fora general rotating body Table 7 1 lists the calculation equations of moment of inertia of various rotating bodies including the above cylindrical rotating body 7 8 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters Table 7 1 Moment of Inertia of Various Rotating Bodies Mass W kg Moment of inertia J kg n Hollow cylinder Square cone Pyramid rectangul
252. equency 8 l Gain Bias lo c37 XC39 c51 C52 Multi frequency LN 1 l sl si ee x c1 v2 function x Gain C42 X C44 2 Gain C37 X C39 Biss ear X cae C52 PID feedback amount en i s D PID control Feedback filter Figure 4 5 1 PID Dancer Control Block Input Stage 4 16 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block Select frequency Enable command 2 1 communications link Select multi frequency Hz2 Hz1 via RS 485 or fieldbus SS1 SS2 LE PID RST Frequency G zi limiter High E So ol l im icati OQ Primary command nme Communications x function 02612 Loader link v 2 ion F16 1 3 to 5 7 8 Frequency limiter Low Multi frequency 1 Multi frequency 2 O Multi frequency 3 TO ae 4 i9uI Cancel PID l control Ii Hz PID 2 E f Ne 7 Auxiliary frequency setting 1 Auxiliary frequency setting 2 PID control Anti reset windup zt Hold PID integral C0 J10 pip component control ms DID Upper limit of PID T Bif 0 PID control process output n PID output pole Reset PID integral and differential components MV Ratio PID control P Gain PID control Integral time PID control D Differential time PID control P Gain 2 n PID control Integral time 2 PID control D Differential time 2 PID control
253. er circuits This class of wire is hard to twist so using it for the control signal circuits is not recommended Maximum ambient temperature for this wire is 60 C 140 F E 600 V grade heat resistant PVC insulated wires or 600 V polyethylene insulated wires HIV wires As wires in this class are smaller in diameter and more flexible than IV wires and can be used at a higher ambient temperature 75 C 167 F they can be used for both of the main power and control signal circuits To use this class of wire for the control circuits you need to correctly twist the wires and keep the wiring length for equipment being connected as short as possible E 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires Use this class of wire mainly for power and grounding circuits These wires are smaller in diameter and more flexible than those of the IV and HIV classes of wires meaning that these wires can be used to save on space and increase operation efficiency of your power system even in high temperature environments The maximum allowable ambient temperature for this class of wires is 90 C 194 F The Boardlex wire range available from Furukawa Electric Co Ltd satisfies these requirements E Shielded Twisted cables for internal wiring of electronic electric equipment Use this category of cables for the control circuits of the inverter so as to prevent the signal lines from being affected by noise from external sources including the power input output l
254. er of run commands issued 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 No of startups to 9 999 is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit DC link b It na cd ae Unit V volts LED monitor shows 3 3 Programming Mode Table 3 19 Alarm Information Displayed continued Item displayed Max temperature of heat sink Description Shows the temperature of the heat sink Unit C Terminal I O signal status displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Terminal input signal status in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status in hexadecimal format Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals Refer to BI Displaying control I O signal terminals in Section 3 3 5 Checking I O signal status for details No of consecutive occurrences This is the number of times the same alarm occurs consecutively Multiple alarm 1 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 1 1s displayed if no alarms have occurred Multiple alarm 2 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 2 1s displayed if no alarms have occurred Terminal I O signal status under communications contr
255. eration functions worked only to control the motor s loss to keep it at a minimum in accordance with the load condition In the newly developed FRENIC Multi Series the focus has been switched away from the motor alone to both the motor and the inverter as electrical products As a result we incorporated a new control system optimum and minimum power control that minimizes the power consumed by the inverter itself inverter loss and the loss of the motor Way of thinking concerning power used Optimum control of the entire system Power Optimum supply Kioton control Power supply Figure 1 15 B Smooth starts through the auto search In the case where a fan is not being run by the inverter but is turning free the fan s speed is checked regardless of its rotational direction and operation of the fan is picked up to start the fan smoothly This function is convenient in such cases as when switching instantaneously from commercial power supply to the inverter 1500 rimin speed SIC Cg RU Figure 1 16 1 7 B Equipped with a full range of PID control functions Differential alarm and absolute value alarm outputs have been added for PID regulator which carry out process controls such as temperature pressure and flowrate control In addition an anti reset windup function to prevent PID control overshoot and other PID control functions which can be adjusted easily through PID output
256. erminating 8 Vcc RJ 45 resistor SW3 connector RJ 45 connector Note Pins 1 2 7 and 8 on the RJ 45 connector are exclusively assigned to power supply and grounding for keypads When connecting other devices to the RJ 45 connector take care not to use those pins Failure to do so may cause a short circuit hazard Do not connect the FVR E11S series of inverters since the pin assignment of the keypad is different from that of the FRENIC Multi series Doing so could result in an inverter damage l NOLLVOINNNWNODS 98r SHY HONOYHL ONINNNY 5 3 5 1 3 Pin assignment for optional RS 485 Communications Card The RS 485 Communications Card has two RJ 45 connectors for multi drop connection Each RJ 45 connector has the pin assignment as listed below Signal name Function No connection Reserved for keypad power source Remarks Shield terminal Internally connecting SDs RS 485 data RS 485 data Built in terminating resistor 112Q Open close by SW9 For details about SW9 refer to RS 485 Communication User s Manual 5 1 4 Cable for RS 485 communications port For connection with the RS 485 communications port be sure to use an appropriate cable and a converter that meet the applicable specifications For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual 5 4 5 1 Overview on RS 485 Communication 5 1 5 Communications support devices This section provides information neces
257. erved Reserved Reserved These are reserved for particular manufacturers Do not access them Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 A45 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1 This feature is useful for management and maintenance of the mechanical system H94 allows you to set the cumulative run time of the motor to the desired value For example specifying 0 clears the cumulative run time of the motor ON The H94 data is in hexadecimal notation It appears in decimal notation on the t ea ea keypad DC Braking Braking response mode F20 to F22 DC Braking 1 Braking staring frequency Braking level and Braking time A09 to A11 DC Braking 2 Braking staring frequency Braking level and Braking time For setting of DC braking refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 9 98 9 2 Overview of Function Codes STOP Key Priority Start Check Function H96 specifies a functional combination of STOP key priority and Start check function as listed below Data for H96 STOP key priority Start check function Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable m STOP key priority Even when run commands are entered from the digital input terminals or via the RS 485 communications link link operation pressing the 69 key forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor After that 4 5 appears on the LED monitor m Start chec
258. es Application Functions J codes Link Functions y codes and Option Functions o codes To determine the property of each function code set data to the function code This manual does not contain the descriptions of Option Function o codes For Option Function o codes refer to the instruction manual for each option The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on page 9 3 and subsequent pages B Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Notation Change when running Validating and saving function code data Possible If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with e and 2 keys the change will immediately take effect however the change is not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the e key If you press the key without pressing the em key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with e and V keys the change will not take effect Pressing the amp key will make the change take effect and save it into the veneers memory Impossible aa c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo B Copying data The data copying feat
259. es not protect the frequency settings or PID speed command specified by the J and amp keys m Cancel PID control Hz PID Function code data 20 Turning this terminal command ON disables the PID control If the PID control is disabled with this command the inverter runs the motor with the reference frequency manually set by any of the multi frequency keypad analog input etc 27 OFF Enable PID control ON Disable PID control Enable manual settings m Switch normal inverse operation VS Function code data 21 This terminal command switches the output frequency control between normal proportional to the input value and inverse in PID process control and manual frequency command To select the inverse operation turn the IVS ON Output frequency Inverse 10096 s Pa Normal 096 OV 10V Analog input voltage 4mA 20 mA Analog input current The normal inverse switching operation is useful for air conditioners that require switching between cooling and heating In cooling the speed of the fan motor output frequency of the inverter 1s increased to lower the temperature In heating it is reduced to lower the temperature This switching is realized by this IVS terminal command Tip 9 52 9 2 Overview of Function Codes When the inverter is driven by an external analog frequency command sources terminals 12 and C1 Switching normal inverse operation can apply only to the analog fre
260. es 5 2 5 1 2 RJ 45 connector pin assignment for standard RS 485 communications port 5 3 5 1 3 Pin assignment for optional RS 485 Communications Card eee 5 4 5 1 4 Cable for RS 485 communications port eene enne enne 5 4 5 1 5 Communications support devices enne ener erret nn enint nenne 5 5 52 Overview of FRENIC Eoadet u nione antur ee d n ee eto b 5 6 5 2 Specificationsiisisessieeee ee ee P EU I tee lla ee Y eee i Tee eee ets 5 6 5 22 f CONNCCHON Gs ssa se esate Bist te eno s tee Ante eo fonti hoa sereni nd 5 7 2 3 Function OVOEVIEW aieo eet bee tee eee iive eee Ci e at e eot die apertae 5 7 5 23 Setting of function code se ede ee RN ERN S Tete RENE Er ERES 5 7 5 2 3 2 Multi ti nitot neinet tinea ice RO aaa eine tee dre rey a bete 5 8 5 2 3 3 R niing Status monitor se eR REESE REESE REESE 5 9 5 2 3 4 TTeSt r ri lg c Sons sess ted een aec e E 5 10 5 2 3 5 Real time trace Displaying running status of an inverter in Waveforms ssssssse 5 11 Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT 6 1 Configuring the FRENIC Multi essere ener enne nter nene tenere enne e nnne nere n rennen 6 1 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals sese eere 6 2 6 2 T Recommended wies 4 5 mart oak ee Ral ee aieadoes ie das St Re 6 4 6 3 Peripheral Equipment unsere t e te ee ei aoe dee hock 6 8 o 4 Selecting Options uso oeebng
261. es for the power input output ofthe inverter are used If an MC type for another class of wires is selected the wire size suitable for the terminal size of both the inverter and the MC type should be taken into account Use GFCIs with overcurrent protection To protect your power systems from secondary accidents caused by the broken inverter use an MCCB and or GFCI with the rated current listed in the above table Do not use an MCCB or GFCI with a rating higher than that listed 6 10 6 3 Peripheral Equipment Table 6 5 lists the relationship between the rated leakage current sensitivity of GFCIs with overcurrent protection and wiring length of the inverter output circuits Note that the sensitivity levels listed in the table are estimated values based on the results obtained by the test setup in the Fuji laboratory where each inverter drives a single motor Table 6 5 Rated Current Sensitivity of Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter GFCI Nominal applied and H motor 331 98 764 ft 328i 656 ft 984 ft 3 10 m 30 m 50 m 100 m 200 m Power Wiring length and current sensitivity Three 200 mA phase 230 V Three phase 460 V 500 mA Single phase 230V 200 mA Values listed above were obtained using Fuji GFCI EG or SG series applied to the test setup The rated current of applicable motor rating indicates values for Fuji standard
262. es on the following pages f initialized motor parameters revert to the default data specified for each of the V f settings listed below To use motors whose base frequency rated voltage or number of poles is different non Fuji motors or other series of motors change the data to the rated current printed on the nameplate P99 00r4 Fuji standard 8 series motor 4 poles 200 V 50 Hz or 400 V 50 Hz P99 3 Fuji standard 6 series motor 4 poles 200 V 50 Hz or 400 V 50 Hz P99 1 HP rating motor 4 poles 230 V 60 Hz or 460 V 60 Hz 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m When Fuji standard 8 series motors P99 0 or A39 0 or other motors P99 4 or A39 4 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables 230 V Example for FRN EILI 2U Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load R X Rated slip applied current current frequency ii C X SNR ER P02 A16 kW P03 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 44 0 40 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 68 0 55 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 30 1 06 12 95 12 92 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 30 1 66 10 20 13 66 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 60 2 30 8 67 10 76 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 6 10 3 01 6 55 11 21 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 9 20 4 85 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 15 0 7 67 5 79 11 25 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 22 5 11 0 5 28 14 31 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 29 0 12 5 4 50 14 68 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 42 0 17 7 3 78 15 09 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 5
263. espectively H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low level specified by F16 as follows f H63 0 the output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16 If H63 1 the inverter decelerates to stop the motor Data setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Reference frequency Maximum frequency F03 A01 Frequency limiter High F15 Frequency limiter Low F16 i Reference 0 100 frequency H63 0 Reference frequency Maximum frequency t F03 A01 Frequency limiter High F15 Frequency limiter Low F16 Reference 0 100 frequency H63 1 9 2 Overview of Function Codes When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the reference frequency be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 A01 accordingly Note Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control F15 gt F16 F15 gt F23 A12 and F15 gt F25 F03 A01 gt F16 where F23 A12 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency If you specify any wrong data for these function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally Bias Frequency command 1 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 Bias base point Gain and Gain base point When any analog input for frequency command 1 F01 is used it is possible to define the relationship between the analog input and
264. et value r min Motor speed r min Load shaft speed set value r min Load shaft speed r min Line speed set value m min Line speed m min Constant feeding rate time set value min Constant feeding rate time running min Remarks Life early warning The life early warning of the main circuit capacitors capacitors on the PC boards and the cooling fan can be displayed An external output is issued in a transistor output signal Cumulative run time Shows the cumulative running hours of the motor and inverter I O check Displays the input output signal status of the inverter Power monitor Displays input power momentary accumulated power electricity cost accumulated power x displayed coefficient Trip error code Displays the cause of trip by codes Li Motor 1 overload e LIL Overcurrent during acceleration 7 Motor 2 overload e Li Overcurrent during deceleration L Inverter overload m e Li Overcurrent at constant speed r Memory error eL 7 Input phase loss Ere Keypad communication error e LLI Undervoltage e Er 3 CPU error EP 2 d rs e Lim Output phase loss Em Optional communication error e Lii Overvoltage during acceleration 75 Option error e Lilim Overvoltage during deceleration 4 4 Operation error e Lii Overvoltage at constant speed r Tuning error e Li Overheating of the heat sink Er RS 485 communication error
265. etitdar t bebe iiit 8 2 8 3 Single phase 230 V i isicing eed eee E Ede ie e eL LRL t 8 3 82 Common Specificatiofis onset OO a n t Ri GO I e t b RO E HORSE 8 4 83 Terminal Specifications ceteris rette lave Ie bee re ede ie ede e ined dede NER 8 8 8 3 1 Terminal functions 5s Reed Me n Re ERO E Ie DER TRE NI 8 8 8 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications 8 19 8 3 2 1 Main circuit terminals eese enne n nnne enne 8 19 8 3 2 2 Control circuit terminals eee enne nnne nnne 8 20 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment sse eene nnns 8 21 8 4 1 Operating environment eren nennen enne entretenir entree nnne ne enne nnne ennt 8 21 8 42 Storage environment 2 recle te ed e IA ERI 8 22 SA Dale Temporary SIOFABG 4 erento ree FO o aree E eoe Pea eie ee 8 22 8 4 2 2 Long term Storage one ede ee o des Pe e p HE ae vei ae eec ipe E 8 22 5 External Dimensions 5e eleison iilis eiue 8 23 8 5 1 Standard models eire ep nte ee t eere cte ed Sele 8 23 8 3 2 Standard keypad x ote adt tee adea o oed be aout uites 8 26 8 6 Connection Diagrams ise ree date ES dase E SEE EKE devs RU EEG 8 27 8 6 1 Running the inverter with keypad esee ener nennen nennen nnne 8 27 8 6 0 Running the inverter by terminal commands esseeseseeeeeeeee nennen 8 28 87 ProtectiveEUnctions esee notion A ee tei bti tit siet 8 30 Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES 9 1 Fun
266. etting page H68 Slip Compensation 1 Enable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 9 37 Operating conditions Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 9 96 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above H69 Automatic Deceleration Disable 9 97 Mode selection Enable Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 Enable Not canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 H70 Overload Prevention Control 0 00 Follow deceleration time specified by F08 E11 0 01 to 100 0 999 Disable H71 9 98 H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment 9 97 limit for braking 9 98 H80 9 98 H89 H90 H91 ea EE H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 14 Changeorresetthecumulaivedata CT WT UN TON J i i H95 DC Braking 0 Slow 9 32 Braking response mode 1 Quick 9 98 H96 STOP Key Priority Start Check STOP key priority Start check function 9 99 Function Disable Disable A Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable i e AA es 1 Clear alarm data and return to zero 9 99 H98 Protection Maintenance Function 0 to 31 Display data on the keypad s LED monitor in decimal format 9 99 In each bit O for disabled 1 for enabled Mode selection Bit 0 Lower the carrier frequency automatically Bit 1 Detect input phase loss Bit 2 Detect output phase loss
267. evention Once noise problems occur it will cost additional materials and time for solving them Noise prevention prior to installation includes 1 Separating the wiring of main circuits and control circuits 2 Putting main circuit wiring into a metal conduit pipe 3 Using shielded wires or twisted shielded wires for control circuits 4 Implementing appropriate grounding work and grounding wiring These noise prevention measures can avoid most noise problems App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise 2 Implementation of noise prevention measures There are two types of noise prevention measures one for noise propagation routes and the other for noise receiving sides that are affected by noise The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the receiving side include Separating the main circuit wiring from the control circuit wiring avoiding noise effect The basic measures for lessening the effect of noise at the generating side include 1 Inserting a noise filter that reduces the noise level 2 Applying a metal conduit pipe or metal control panel that will confine noise and 3 Applying an insulated transformer for the power supply that cuts off the noise propagation route Table A 1 lists the noise prevention measures their goals and propagation routes Table A 1 Noise Prevention Measures Goal of noise prevention Conduction route measures Confine noise Noise prevention met
268. eypad When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the 9 amp key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID process command currently selected while you cannot change the setting On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID process command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is displayed Ii s 4 Decimal point Table 3 2 PID Process Command Manually Set with N Q Key and Requirements PID control PID control Mode Remote command LED Monitor selection SV E43 JO1 J02 Multi RES frequency With 9 V key SS4 SS8 PID process command by keypad Other than 0 ON or OFF PID process command currently selected Other than 0 3 5 Setting up the frequency command with O and V keys under PID process control When function code F01 is set to 0 N V keys on keypad and frequency command 1 is selected as a manual speed command when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link or multi frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the 3 amp keys In Programming or Alarm mode the 9 keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running mode Table 3 3 lists the c
269. f RS 485 errors option Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in optional RS 485 communication since the power is turned on Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Content of RS 485 communications error option Shows the most recent error that has occurred in optional RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Option s ROM version Shows the option s ROM version as a 4 digit code Cumulative motor run time Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the motor The display method is the same as for Cumulative run time 5 77 above 3 28 3 3 Programming Mode 3 3 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information Menu 6 Alarm Information shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code Further it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred Figure 3 10 shows the menu transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information and Table 3 19 lists the details of the alarm information Power ON Programming mode 1 L 1 1 I 1 1 I moo 1 1 L 1 1 L 1 1 Pac List of alarm codes Running status info at the time an alarm occurred Item Output frequency ca ugue a oo Switching at approx 1 second intervals 2 C daro RUIN e ESSET 1 oui SALLI Li RI F Item Output current
270. f the input terminal C1 for C1 V2 or PTC SWS When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code E59 and H26 Data Data SI AE for E59 for H26 Analog frequency setting in current Factory default e DE Analog frequency setting in voltage V2 OFF PTC thermistor input Cl ON 2 m Q I S J o Z 77 Figure 8 10 shows the location of slide switches for the input output terminal configuration default SWG SW7 SWS wt Fu amp FMPI C1 V2 IOFF ONISINK SOURCE Factory 0A 308 306 default SOURCE O Lo LB Figure 8 10 Location of the Slide Switches 8 3 Terminal Specifications 8 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications 8 3 2 1 Main circuit terminals The table below shows the main circuit screw sizes tightening torque and terminal arrangements Note that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types Two terminals designed for grounding shown as the symbol G in Figures A to E make no distinction between a power supply source a primary circuit and a motor a secondary circuit Table 8 2 Main Circuit Terminal Properties Power Nominal Tightening Tightening appli
271. f the inverter s input power m Base Frequency 1 F04 Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor m Rated Voltage at Base Frequency F05 Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If 0 is set the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the inverter The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage If the data is set to anything other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the auto torque boost settings auto energy saving or slip compensation is active the voltage settings should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor 9 16 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Frequency H50 and H52 Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern Setting 0 0 to H50 or H52 disables the non linear V f pattern operation m Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Voltage H51 and H53 Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern m Maximum Output Voltage F06 Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 F03 Note f F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 is set to 0 settings of H50 through H53 and F06 do not take effect When the non linear point is below the base frequency the linear V f pattern applies when it 1s above the output voltage is kept constant
272. fects please refer to the accompanying guidelines Panel mount adapter MA E1 00 This adapter makes the latest inverters interchangeable with older inverter modets manufactured by Fuji Electric Mounting adapter for external cooling available soon PB E1 00 This is an adapter for relocating the inverter s cooling fan to the outside of the control panel ile m D o D LNAWdINOA TWHAHdIdAd ONILO3 T3S 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals This section contains information needed to select wires for connecting the inverter to commercial power lines motor or any of the optional peripheral equipment The level of electric noise issued from the inverter or received by the inverter from external sources may vary depending upon wiring and routing To solve such noise related problems refer to Appendix A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Select wires that satisfy the following requirements Sufficient capacity to flow the rated average current allowable current capacity Protective coordination with an MCCB or GFCI with overcurrent protection in the overcurrent Zone Voltage loss due to the wire length is within the allowable range Suitable for the type and size of terminals of the optional equipment to be used Recommended wires are listed below Use these wires unless otherwise specified E 600 V class of vinyl insulated wires IV wires Use this class of wire for the pow
273. frequency p Number of poles s Slippage On the basis of this expression varying the output frequency varies the speed of the motor However simply varying the output frequency f Hz would result in an overheated motor or would not allow the motor to demonstrate its optimum utility 1f the output voltage V V remains constant For this reason the output voltage V must be varied with the output frequency f by using an inverter This scheme of control is called V f control Variable torque load A squared torque load is characterized by 1 A change in the required torque in proportion to the square of the number of revolutions per minute 2 A power requirement that decreases in proportion to the cube of the decrease in the number of revolutions per minute Required power kW Rotating speed r min x Torque N em 9 55 Related function code F37 and A13 Applications Fans and pumps v Required torque Ib in N m Required power o Required torque Required power HP kW Rotating speed of load machine Voltage and frequency variations Variations in the input voltage or frequency within permissible limits Variations outside these limits might cause an inverter or motor to fail G 6 High Performance Compact Inverter FRENIC Multi User s Manual First Edition June 2007 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Fuji Electric Corp of America The purpose of this manual is
274. from the PG on the motor shaft to control the motor speed with high accuracy In the slip compensation and dynamic torque vector control the inverter uses the Note i m motor parameters to control its speed Therefore the following conditions should be satisfied if not the inverter may not get the proper performance from the motor A single motor should be controlled It is difficult to apply this control to a group motor driving system Motor parameters P02 P03 and P06 to P12 are properly configured or they are fully auto tuned The rating of the motor to be controlled should be two ranks lower than that of the inverter If not the output current detection sensibility of the motor lowers causing it difficult to accurately control the motor The wiring between the inverter output and motor input terminals should not exceed 164 ft 50 m in length A long wiring run could not suppress the earth leakage current since the cable s electrostatic capacitance against the earth increases causing it difficult to accurately control the motor speed 9 38 EE 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Current Limiter Mode selection Current Limiter Level When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter F44 the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output current Refer to the description of function code H12 If F43 1 the current
275. from the discharging capability that can be discharged at one time Note that the torque value varies according to the inverter capacity q g pacity Selecting an optimal brake unit enables a braking torque value to be selected comparatively freely in the range below the short time maximum torque in the driving mode as shown in curve f For braking related values when the inverter and braking resistor are normally combined refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors o m r m O a z 0 O s a gt r O O D gt Z Og z lt m yy m Z Oo 2 gt O a m 7 7 3 7 1 2 Selection procedure Figure 7 3 shows the general selection procedure for optimal inverters Items numbered 1 through 5 are described on the following pages You may easily select inverter capacity if there are no restrictions on acceleration and deceleration times If there are any restrictions on acceleration or deceleration time or acceleration and deceleration are frequent then the selection procedure is more complex START Load torque calculation during 1 constant speed running 1 Select capacity under the condition of Constant speed Rated torque running torque No Acceleration and deceleration time restricted Yes Acceleration time calculation cecenecu 2 Raise the capacity class Acceleration time calculation 2 The calculated time is correct
276. g Curvilinear constant output maximum capacity Shutoff of the run command lets the motor coast to a stop Deceleration time exclusively applied to the force to stop command STOP can be specified setting range 0 00 to 3600 s This setting automatically cancels the S curve setting Acceleration deceleration time during jogging operation can be set Setting range 0 00 to 3600 s 0 to 10094 Jogging operation Auto restart after momentary power failure Hardware current limiter amp key standard keypad amp amp amp keys optional multi function keypad or digital input signals The acceleration and deceleration times dedicated for jogging can be set and they are common Restart at 0 Hz restart from the frequency used before momentary power failure can be selected Motor speed at restart can be searched and restarted load variation or momentary power failure which cannot be covered by the software current limiter This limiter can be canceled 8 5 Specifies the high and low limits in Hz Setting range 0 to 400 Hz Bias of reference frequency and PID command can be independently set setting range Analog input gain can be set between 0 and 200 Three operation points and their common jump width 0 to 30 0 Hz can be set The inverter operates and stops for the time set with the keypad 1 cycle operation Restarts the inverter without stopping the motor after moment
277. g function to ES 9 55 Z terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C as listed below Oo O 0 m 02 E21 Teminal Y2 Function 0 1000 Inverter running E27 Teminal 30A B C Function 1 1001 Frequency arrival signal 2 1002 Frequency detected 3 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped 1004 Torque polarity detected 1005 Inverter output limiting 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure 1007 Motor overload early waming 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY 1021 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2 1026 Auto resetting TRY 1028 Heat sink overheat early waming OH 1030 Serice lifetime alarm LIFE 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 1036 Overload prevention control OLP 1037 Current detected ID 1038 Current detected 2 1D2 1042 PID alarm PID ALM 1049 Switched to motor 2 SWM2 1057 Brake signal BRKS 1080 Reserved 2 1081 Reserved 2 1082 Reserved 2 1099 Alarm output for any alarm ALM Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 9 5 E code continued Code E29 E30 E31 E32 E34 E35
278. g output FM Mode selection 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA 2 Output in pulse 0 to 6000 p s FMP FMA Voltage adjust Function 0 to 200 Output frequency 1 before slip compensation Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback value DC link circuit voltage Analog output FM Voltage adjustment Function 0 to 200 FMA Output frequency 1 before slip compensation Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV DC link bus voltage FMP terminal Pulse rate Voltage adjust Function 300 to 6000 p s at full scale Analog output FM Pulse rate 300 to 6000 p s FMP Pulse rate at 100 output 0 Analog output FM Mode selection 2 Output in pulse 0 to 6000 p s FMP 1 to 200 Analog output FM Mode selection 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA 0 to 8 as same as those of F31 A 34 Analog output FM Voltage adjustment Function 1 to 200 FMA FVR E11S App F Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S 30Ry operation mode 0 The relay 30 exci
279. ge at base frequency and at maximum output frequency 160 to 500 V 460 V The AVR control can be turned ON or OFF Non linear V f setting 2 points Desired voltage 0 to 500 V and frequency 0 to 400 Hz can be set Torque boost Auto torque boost for constant torque load Manual torque boost Desired torque boost 0 0 to 20 096 can be set Select application load with the function code F37 A13 Variable torque load or constant torque load Starting torque 200 or over Reference frequency 0 5 Hz with slip compensation and auto torque boost Start stop operation Keypad Start and stop with and keys standard keypad Start and stop with amp 3 amp amp and 69 keys optional multi function keypad External signals digital inputs Forward Reverse rotation stop command capable of 3 wire operation coast to stop command external alarm alarm reset etc Link operation Operation through RS 485 or field bus option communications Switching operation command Link switching 8 4 Control Item Frequency command 8 2 Common Specifications Explanation Keypad J and keys with data protection function Analog input Analog input can be set with external voltage current input 0to 10 VDC 0 to 100 terminals 12 C1 V2 function 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 terminal C1 Note Terminal C1 can be switched to input 0 to 10 VDC 0 t
280. gures 4 3 1 and 4 3 2 show schematic block diagrams input and output stages respectively that explain the processes in which the inverter drives the motor according to the final run command FWD or REV and the drive frequency command sent from the drive frequency command block or the PID control block Additional and supplemental information is given below The logic shown in the upper left part of the block diagram processes the final reference frequency so that it is inverted x 1 for reverse rotation of the motor or is replaced with 0 zero for stopping the motor Ifthe droop control H28 is enabled the droop characteristics owing a load torque will take effect The rotation direction limiter H08 limits polarity forward or reverse of the final frequency command reference and helps the inverter take effect of anti forward rotation or anti reverse rotation function The acceleration deceleration processor determines the output frequency of the inverter by referring to data of related function codes If the output frequency exceeds the upper limit given by the frequency limiter High F15 the controller automatically limits the output frequency at the upper limit f the overload prevention control is enabled the logic automatically switches the output frequency to the enabled side of overload suppression control and controls the output frequency accordingly Upon activating of the torque limiter the inverter automati
281. h mode as follows In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter output frequency Hz output current A output voltage V etc Pressing this key displays the function code and sets the data entered with e and QO keys Pressing this key displays the details of the problem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED monitor In Programming mode a n Alarm mode RUN key Press this key to run the motor STOP key Press this key to stop the motor AmO UP and DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor LED Indicators RUN LED Lights when any run command to the inverter is active KEYPAD CONTROL LED Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by the key F02 0 2 or 3 In Programming and Alarm modes you cannot run the inverter even if the indicator lights Unit and mode expression by the three LED indicators The three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them Unit kW A Hz r min and m min While the inverter is in Programming mode the LEDs of Hz and kW light 2 2 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad B LED monitor In Running mode the LED monitor displays running status info
282. h no change in the output frequency within the specified frequency band in order to skip the resonance point of a machine resonance frequency Related function codes C01 to C04 Keypad operation To use a keypad to run an inverter Line speed Running speed of an object e g conveyor driven by the motor The unit is meter per minute m min Load shaft speed Number of revolutions per minute r min of a rotating load driven by the motor such as a fan Main circuit terminals Power input output terminals of an inverter which includes terminals to connect the power supply motor DC reactor braking resistor and other power components Maximum frequency The output frequency commanded by the input of the maximum value of a frequency setup signal for example 10 V for a voltage input range of 0 to 10 V or 20 mA for a current input range of 4 to 20 mA Related function codes F03 and A01 Modbus RTU Communication protocol used in global FA network market which is developed by Modicon Inc USA Momentary voltage drop immunity The minimum voltage V and time ms that permit continued rotation of the motor after a momentary voltage drop momentary power failure Multi frequency selection To preset frequencies up to 15 stages then select them at some later time using external signals Related function codes E01 to E05 C05 to C19 Nominal applied motor Rated output in kW of a general purpose m
283. he equipment rating ANCAUTION The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur Note Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing F15 data specifying a frequency limiter high Base Frequency 1 H50 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency A02 Base Frequency 2 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 H51 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Voltage A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 Maximum Output Voltage 1 H52 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency H53 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Voltage A04 Maximum Output Voltage 2 These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 through H53 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an insufficient output voltage and a decrease in output torque This feature is used to increase the voltage with the maximum output voltage 1 to prevent this problem from happening Note however that you cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage o
284. he run command source is digital input F02 1 Ready for jogging Disable Normal operation Jogging operation Pressing the amp 9 key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging For the jogging by the keypad the inverter jogs only when the amp 9 key is held down Releasing the amp 9 key decelerates to stop During jogging the frequency specified by C20 Jogging Frequency and the acceleration deceleration time specified by H54 ACC DEC Time apply The inverter s status transition between ready for jogging and normal Note ipis operation is possible only when the inverter is stopped To start jogging operation with the JOG terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the JOG should not be delayed 100 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 100 ms the inverter does not jog the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo m Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Function code data 11 Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 If no HzZ Hz1 terminal command is assigned the frequency sourced by F01 takes effect by default Input terminal command Fre uenc command Source Hz2 Hz1 quency Follow F01 Frequency command 1 Follow C30 Frequency command 2 m Select motor 2 moto
285. he time with the and V keys Frequency command 2 0 to 8 as same as those of F01 Frequency command 2 Refer to FVR E11S s F01 Offset Terminal 12 5 0 to 5 0 Terminal C1 5 0 to 5 0 Analog input adjustment for 12 Offset Analog Input adjustment for C1 Offset 5 0 to 5 0 5 0 to 5 0 Analog setting signal filter 0 00 to 5 00s P Motor 1 parameters FVR E11S Analog Input adjustment for 12 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 s FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Functi on code Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Motor 1 Number of poles Capacity Rated current Tuning On line tuning No load current R1 setting Slip compensation control Slip compensation response time 2to 14 P01 0 01 to 5 50 kW 3 7 kW or less 0 01 to 11 0 kW 5 5 7 5 kW 0 00 to 99 9A 0 Inactive 1 Active R1 and X 2 Active R1 X and lo 0 Inactive 1 Active 0 00 to 99 9A 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 15 00 Hz 0 01 to 10 00 s A 38 Motor 1 No of poles Rated slip frequency Slip compensation response time 2to 22 0 01 to 11 0 kW 0 00 to 99 9A 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped 2 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped and
286. hod Separate main circuit from control circuit Minimize wiring distance Avoid parallel and bundled wiring Wiring and Use appropriate installation grounding Use shielded wire and twisted shielded wire Use shielded cable in main circuit se metal conduit pipe Appropriate arrangement Control of devices in panel l icd Metal control panel Anti noise Line filter i device Insulation transformer Use a passive capacitor Measures at for control circuit noise Use ferrite core for receiving control circuit sides Line filter Separate power supply systems Lower the carrier frequency Y Effective Y Effective conditionally Blank Not effective A 5 What follows is noise prevention measures for the inverter drive configuration 1 Wiring and grounding As shown in Figure A 7 separate the main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring as far as possible regardless of being located inside or outside the system control panel containing an inverter Use shielded wires and twisted shielded wires that will block out extraneous noises and minimize the wiring distance Also avoid bundled wiring of the main circuit and control circuit or parallel wiring Shielding plate steel plate Shielding plate steel plate Signal line Power line Signal line In a case of duct In a case of rack Figure A 7 Separate Wiring For the main circuit wiring use a metal conduit pipe and connect its wires to the
287. housands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again DC link bus voltage Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit Unit V volts Max temperature of heat sink Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour Unit C Temperatures below 20 C 68 F are displayed as 20 C Max effective output current Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour Unit A amperes Capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor in based on the capacitance when shipping as 100 Refer to the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details Unit Cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic capacitors mounted on the printed circuit boards Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 99 99 Shown in units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 99990 hours the count stops and the display remains at 99 99
288. i series to be 100 If this value is greater than 100 it means that the mounting area required for the FRENIC Multi series is smaller than that of other series Volume Multi Allows comparing the volume of the FRENIC Multi series with that of the conventional inverter series in percentage assuming the volume of the FRENIC Multi series to be 100 If this value is greater than 100 it means that the volume of the FRENIC Multi is smaller than that of other series In the FRENIC Multi columns dimensions in shaded boxes denote that they are smaller than those of FVR E9S and FVR EI1S series Inthe FVR E9S and FVR E11S columns underlined and bolded dimensions denote that they are smaller than those of the FRENIC Multi series F 1 1 Standard models FVR E9S vs FRENIC Multi FVR E9S IP20 Ambient temperature 50 C App F Replacement Information FRENIC Multi IP20 Ambient temperature 50 C Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor kW External dimensions mm Mounting area Volume Mount External dimensions mm ing area 2 m x10 sal one fs AOA Pos pep rer wool e e va 5 e o ie pef ia fef CES fas oa oo ie paf ie pers fe feefee e ee Tie Fr ues 2s ves mo ros v s o 75 e sa ase eo
289. ic duty cycle is shorter than 100 sec Calculate the average loss to determine rated values 2 When the periodic duty cycle is 100 sec or longer The allowable braking energy depends on the maximum regenerative braking capacity The allowable values are listed in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors Motor RMS current For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 4 In metal processing machine and materials handling machines requiring positioning control highly frequent running for a short time is repeated In this case calculate the maximum equivalent RMS current value effective value of current not to exceed the allowable value rated current for the motor 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 7 1 3 Equations for selections 7 1 3 1 Load torque during constant speed running 1 General equation The frictional force acting on a horizontally moved load must be calculated Calculation for driving a load along a straight line with the motor is shown below Where the force to move a load linearly at constant speed v m s is F N and the motor speed for driving this is Nw r min the required motor output torque tm N m is as follows 60 F tu Nem 7 1 2 Te Nm Nc where ng is Reduction gear efficiency When the inverter brakes the motor efficiency works inversely so the required motor torque should be calculated as follows 60 v area N m 72 TM 60 0 2rNm in
290. iew on RS 485 Communication Detaching the standard keypad from the FRENIC Multi inverter and using the standard RJ 45 connector modular jack as an RS 485 communications port brings about the following enhancements in functionality and operation B Remote operation from a keypad at the remote location Using an extension cable to connect the standard keypad or an optional multi function keypad to the RJ 45 port allows you to mount the keypad on a panel located far from the inverter enabling remote operation The maximum length of the extension cable is 20 m B Operation by FRENIC Loader The Windows based PC can be connected to the standard RS 485 communications port via a suitable converter Through the RS 485 communications facility you may run FRENIC Loader on the PC to edit the function code data and monitor the running status information of the inverter B Control via host equipment You can use a personal computer PC or a PLC as host higher level equipment and through it control the inverter as its subordinate device Protocols for managing a network including inverters include the Modbus RTU protocol compliant to the protocol established by Modicon Inc that is widely used in FA markets and the Fuji general purpose inverter protocol that supports the FRENIC Multi and conventional series of inverters Connecting the keypad automatically switches to the keypad protocol there is no need to Note modify the function code setting
291. ified level between the peak and bottom frequencies Related function codes F15 F16 and H64 G 3 Frequency resolution The minimum step or increment in which output frequency is varied rather than continuously Function code Code to customize the inverter Setting function codes realizes the potential capability of the inverter to meet it for the individual power system applications Gain for frequency setting A frequency setting gain enables varying the slope of the output of the frequency set with an analog input signal Related function codes C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor Stands for Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor that enables the inverter section to switch high voltage current DC power in very high speed and to output pulse train Interphase unbalance A condition of an AC input voltage supply voltage that states the voltage balance of each phase in an expression as Interphase voltage unbalance _ Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V Inverse mode operation A mode of operation in which the output frequency lowers as the analog input signal level rises Jogging operation A special operation mode of inverters in which a motor jogs forward or reverse for a short time at a slower speed than usual operating modes Related function codes C20 and H54 Jump frequencies Frequencies that have a certain output wit
292. iginating in LC resonance and results in the addition of high voltage to the motor terminals Refer to Figure C 1 This voltage sometimes reaches up to about twice that of the inverter DC voltage 620 V x 2 approximately 1 200 V depending on a switching speed of the inverter elements and wiring conditions Surge voltage N y bi E i I 620 VDC ih i le Figure C 1 Voltage Waveform of Individual Portions Commercial power supply Inverter A measured example in Figure C 2 illustrates the relation of a peak value of the motor terminal voltage with a wiring length between the inverter and the motor From this it can be confirmed that the peak value of the motor terminal voltage ascends as the wiring length increases and becomes saturated at about twice the inverter DC voltage The shorter a pulse rise time becomes the higher the motor terminal voltage rises even in the case of a short wiring length App B Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters B 2 B 3 F tr 0 1 us IGBT corresponds to tr 0 1 to 0 3 ps Bipolar transistor corresponds to x x tr 0 3to 1 ps g A 29 7 WF _ The case when an output reactor and or a filter 2 EH are inserted corresponds to 9 gt U S tr gt 1 ys z 8 1 r urge voltage rds gt Voltage urge voltage magnification factor F4 5 AN 9 LIE Magnification factor against DC voltage E 5G ym Rise time A D
293. igure 4 2 Drive Command Block 4 6 4 3 Drive Command Block Figure 4 2 shows the processes that generate the final drive commands FWD Drive the motor in the forward direction and REV Drive the motor in reverse direction through the various run commands and switching steps by means of function codes Additional and supplemental information is given below For the inverter operation given by the amp n 69 key on the standard keypad the generator holds the run command ON upon depression of the fun key decides the motor rotation direction according to the run forward command FWD or the run reverse command REV and releases the hold state upon depression of the 69 key For the inverter operation given by the 9 fe Eo key on the multi function keypad the generator holds the command ON upon depression of the wo rev key and releases the hold state upon depression of the 6 key The 3 wire operation terminal command HLD holds the run forward terminal command FWD and the run reverse terminal command REV This allows you to run the inverter in 3 Wire Operation Refer to the function code E01 in Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES for details If you do not assign the 3 wire operation command HLD to any digital input terminals the 2 Wire Operation using the commands FWD and REV will take effect S06 2 byte data of bit 15 through bit 0 programmable bitwise the operation command via the communications link includes Bit
294. iliary analog frequency input to be Auxiliary frequency added to all frequency commands including command 2 frequency command 1 frequency command 2 and multi frequency commands This input includes temperature pressure or other PID command 1 commands to apply under the PID control Function code J02 should be also configured This input includes the feedback of the PID teedbacksamoun temperature or pressure under the PID control Note If these terminals have been set up to have the same data the operation priority is i given in the following order E61 gt E62 gt E63 Selecting the UP DOWN control F01 C30 7 ignores auxiliary frequency command 1 and 2 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Reference Loss Detection Continuous running frequency When the analog frequency command entered through terminals 12 and C1 CI V2 function has dropped below 10 of the expected frequency command within 400 ms the inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency When the frequency command level in voltage or current returns to a level higher than that specified by E65 the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continues to run following the frequency command Frequency Command by Analog Input Reference Loss Detected REF OFF i Preset Frequency
295. ime Acceleration deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration weak when the frequency change is 10 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 5 100 90 100 2 x 5 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 1 x reference acceleration or deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration strong when the frequency change is 20 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 10 100 80 100 2 x 10 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 2 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 9 86 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Curvilinear acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency constant torque but it slows down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the maximum performance of the motor ee eee Acc torque Acc output kW Output frequency Base frequency F04 Output frequency i A Hee elt The figures at left show the FO3 A01 acceleration characteristics Base Similar characteristics apply frequency to the deceleration F04 A02 Cote Cho mac Time m Reference Acc time ose an appropriate acceleration deceleration time taking into account the hinery s l
296. in the EMC Directives emissions For details make connections in accordance with the Installation Manual Power filter RNFoooo oo This filter can be used for the same purpose as the EMC compliant filter described above but it does not comply with the EMC Directives Handled by Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Output circuit filter OFL 000 00 This filter is connected to the output circuits of low noise type inverters carrier frequency BkHz to 15kHz 6kHz or greater in 30kW or higher circuits and is used for the following purposes Suppresses fluctuation of motor terminal voltages Prevents damage to motor insulation due to surge voltage in 460 V class series inverters Suppresses leak current in output side wiring Reduces leak current when multiple motors are run side by side or when there is long distance wiring Suppresses radiation noise and induction noise from output side wiring If the wiring length in a plant etc is long it is effective as a countermeasure for noise reduction When this filter i connected be sure to set the carrier frequency F26 at 8kHz or higher 6kHz or higher for 30kW or larger model OFL o00 4A This filter is connected to the inverter output circuit for the following purposes Suppresses fluctuation of motor terminal voltages Prevents damage to motor insulation due to surge voltage in 400 V class series inverters Suppresses radiation noise and induction noise fr
297. ine for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage Refer to this manual Appendix B for details on this guideline Safety precautions Read this manual and the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the product and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual AW ARNING Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to ACAUTION dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times ACAUTION This product is not designed for use in appliances and machinery on which lives depend Consult your Fuji Electric representative before considering the FRENIC Multi series of inverters for equipment and machinery related to nuclear power control aerospace uses medical uses or transportation When the product is to be
298. ine system and facility can be tolerated If the power is restored within the specified duration the inverter restarts in the restart mode specified by F14 If the power is restored after the specified duration the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage f Undervoltage level Time reserved to restart BE No power Pr ESL about 0 3 to 0 6 s Run command ON Operation case 1 ME Restart Run command rr Operation case 2 m ji me H ON Start of normal running 9 26 9 2 Overview of Function Codes If H16 Allowable momentary power failure time is set to 999 restart will take place until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure 50 V for 230 V class series and 100 V for 460 V class series If the DC link bus voltage drops below the allowable voltage the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Note The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of undervoltage until it reaches the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity the presence of options and other factors W Auto restart after momentary power failure Restart time H13 H13 s
299. ines of the inverter themselves Even ifthe signal lines are inside the power control panel always use this category of cables when the length of wiring is longer than normal Cables satisfying these requirements are the Furukawa s BEAMEX S shielded cables of the XEBV and XEWV ranges 6 2 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals Currents Flowing across the Inverter Terminals Table 6 1 summarizes average effective electric currents flowing across the terminals of each inverter model for ease of reference when selecting peripheral equipment options and electric wires for each inverter including supplied power voltage and applicable motor rating Table 6 1 Currents Flowing through Inverter Nominal 220 V 230 V 440 V 460 V 60 Hz GP applied DC link Braking resistor Input RMS current A DC link Braking resistor voltage motor DC reactor DCR bus current circuit current DC reactor DCR bus current circuit current HP wo DOR A 1 8 0 82 0 51 0 55 1 1 1 1 0 82 1 4 12 1 2 1 2 1 16 Three 36 230V 2 X phase 3 3 5 76 83 123 132 9 3 10 1 3 5 5 17 1 2 E Three 3 18 38 43 71 82 46 63 18 5 phase asov T5 32 86 vos 18 7 72 128 ii 32 1 1 1 9 nee ae 0 82 1 58 63 Inverter efficiency is calculated using values suitable for each inverter model The input route mean square RMS current is calculated according to the following condition
300. ing information and the function code data H30 and y98 specify the sources of those commands inverter itself and computers or PLCs via the RS 485 communications link or field bus H30 is for the RS 485 communications link y98 for the field bus LE Inverter itself OFF r RS 485 communications link i Standard RJ 45 RS 485 communications link O Option card Field bus ni Selected command ro Frequency command ON Run command If no LE is assigned the command source selected by H30 y98 will apply Option Command sources selectable Command sources Description Inverter itself Sources except RS 485 communications link and field bus Frequency command source Specified by F01 C30 or multi frequency command Run command source Via the keypad or digital input terminals selected by F02 Via RS 485 communications link standard Via the standard RJ 45 port used for connecting a keypad Via RS 485 communications link option card Via RS 485 communications link option card Via field bus option Via field bus option using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP Command sources specified by H30 Mode selection Data for H30 Frequency command Inverter itself F01 C30 Run command Inverter itself F02 standard Via RS 485 communications link Inverter itself F02 Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications link st
301. ing level for driving F40 Torque Limiter 1 Limiting level for driving E pg E17 Torque Limiter 2 Limiting level for braking F41 Torque Limiter 1 Limiting level for braking Refer to the descriptions of function codes F40 and F41 Terminal Y1 Function Terminal Y2 Function N E27 Terminal 30A B C Function Relay output E20 E21 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 and Y2 are transistor outputs and terminals 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo f Note When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm SL would be recognized while the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON usi
302. inverter operation one of the regenerative energy sources is the kinetic energy that is generated at the time an object is moved by an inertial force Kinetic energy of a moving object When an object with moment of inertia J kg m rotates at a speed N r min its kinetic energy is as follows J 2x N 2 E J 7 12 2 z0 VJ 7 12 x J N J 7 12 TOP AE J 7 12 When this object is decelerated to a speed N r min the output energy is as follows _J 22 N 2m N1 J J 7 13 J N ND D 7 13 1824 The energy regenerated to the inverter as shown in Figure 7 9 is calculated from the reduction gear efficiency ngand motor efficiency tyas follows P 553 eno mess N O 7 14 n m m m O d z o O Q gt 2 O O A gt z U z lt m a m E O gt Q E m n 7 11 7 1 3 4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor In case of the load which is repeatedly and very frequently driven by a motor the motor current fluctuates largely and enters the short time rating range of the motor repeatedly Therefore you have to review the allowable thermal rating of the motor The heat value is assumed to be approximately proportional to the square of the motor current If an inverter drives a motor in duty cycles that are much shorter than the thermal time constant of the motor calculate the equivalent RMS current as mentioned below and select th
303. ion times are longer than the specified times Refer to the description of H07 for details Specifying an improperly short acceleration deceleration time may activate the current limiter torque limiter or anti regenerative control resulting in a longer acceleration deceleration time than the specified one Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 and acceleration deceleration time 2 E10 E11 are switched by terminal command RTI assigned to any of the digital Ce Ge input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E05 Torque Boost 1 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 A05 Torque Boost 2 F37 specifies V f pattern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation for optimizing the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load F09 specifies the type of torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque Data for F37 V f pattern Variable torque V f pattern Linear V f pattern Torque boost F09 Torque boost specified by F09 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving Disable Applicable load Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed General purpose fans and pumps Constant torque load Constant torque load To be selected 1f a motor may be over excited at no load Variable torque V f pattern Linear V f pattern Torque boost specified by F09 Auto torque boos
304. ircuit wiring to the air a line filter and power supply transformer should be used refer to Figure A 10 Line filters are available in these types the simplified type such as a capacitive filter to be connected in parallel to the power supply line and an inductive filter to be connected in series to the power supply line and the orthodox type such as an LC filter to meet radio noise regulations Use them according to the targeted effect for reducing noise Power supply transformers include common insulated transformers shielded transformers and noise cutting transformers These transformers have different effectiveness in blocking noise propagation Inverter Inverter Inverter Power supply Power supply a Capacitive filter b Inductive filter c LC filter zero phase reactor Figure A 10 Various Filters and their Connection 4 Noise prevention measures at the receiving side It is important to strengthen the noise immunity of those electronic devices installed in the same control panel as the inverter or located near an inverter Line filters and shielded or twisted shielded wires are used to block the penetration of noise in the signal lines of these devices The following treatments are also implemented 1 Lower the circuit impedance by connecting capacitors or resistors to the input and output terminals of the signal circuit in parallel 2 Increase the circuit impedance for
305. ise enters into an AM radio broadcast 500 to 1500 kHz Pole transformer Possible cause gt The AM radio may receive noise radiated from the power line at the power supply side of the inverter 1 Install inductive filters at the input and output sides of the inverter Power Supply Inductive filter Ferrite ring Inductive filter Ferrite ring The number of turns of the zero phase reactor or ferrite ring should be as large as possible In addition wiring between the inverter and the zero phase reactor or ferrite ring should be as short as possible within 1m When further improvement is necessary install LC filters LC LC filter filter Input side Output side Power supply 1 The radiation noise of the wiring can be reduced 2 The conduction noise to the power supply side can be reduced Note Sufficient improvement may not be expected in narrow regions such as between mountains 1 The radiation noise of the wiring can be reduced device Tele phone ina common private residence App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Table A 2 Phenomena When driving a ventilation fan with an inverter noise enters a telephone in a private residence at a distance of 131ft 40m lt Possible cause A high frequency leakage current from the inverter and motor flowed to grounded part of the telephone cable shield During th
306. k and energy 7 Pressure and stress 1 kgf m 9 8 N m 9 8 1 mmAqg 9 8 Pa 9 8 N m 9 8 W s 1 Pa 1 N m 2 0 102 mmAq 1 bar 100000 Pa 1 02 kg em 4 Power 1 kg cm 98000 Pa 980 mbar 1 kgf m s 9 8 N m s 9 8 J s 1 atmospheric pressure 1013 mbar 9 8 W 760 mmHg 101300 Pa 1 N m s 1 J s 1 W 1 033 kg cm 0 102 kgf m s 5 Rotation speed 1 r min L rad s 0 1047 rad s 1 rad s r min 9 549 r min n 2 Calculation formula 1 Torque power and rotation speed 2n 60 e P W 1 026 N r min T kgf e m e P W N r min t Nem P W N r min P W N r min t Nem 9 55 T kgf m 0 974 2 Kinetic energy EQ eco kgem N G min EQ GD kg m N r min 730 3 Torque of linear moving load Driving mode N m 0 159 UAI EN Ny r min ng 5 T kgfem uU 159 a e kgf Ny G min ng Braking mode Nod x0 159 0m o Ny r min ng e T kgfem 0 159 UU RH F kgf Ny r min ng App D Conversion from SI Units 4 Acceleration torque Driving mode t Nem J kg m AN r min 9 55 T kgef m XE Braking mode t Nem At S ng GD kg m2 _ AN r min At s NG J kgem AN r min ng 9 55 T kgf m TE 5 Acceleration time tacc 8 At s GD
307. k function For safety this function checks whether any run command has been turned ON or not in each of the following situations If it has been turned ON the inverter does not start up with alarm code nfl ln r displayed on the LED monitor When the power to the inverter is turned ON When the e key is pressed to release the alarm status or when the Reset alarm terminal command RST digital input is turned ON When the run command source is switched by the Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus terminal command LE digital input H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 Mock Alarm H97 clears all alarm data alarm history and relevant information of alarms that have occurred in running of the inverter and mock alarms that have been caused by H45 at the time of machine setup both of which are saved in the inverter memory Setting the H97 data to 1 clears the saved alarm data Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of S key 9 key After that the H97 data automatically reverts to 0 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection H98 specifies whether to enable or disable a automatic lowering of carrier frequency b input phase loss protection c output phase loss protection and d judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor as well as specifying the judgment threshold on the life of the DC link bus capacitor in a style of combination Bit 0 to Bit 4 Automatic lowering
308. kg m2 AN r min ng At s J J5 ng kg m AN r min tM 7 TL Ng N m 9 55 GD GDj ng kg m AN r min tacc S TM Tr ng kgf m 375 6 Deceleration time Ji tJ5 ng kg m AN r min tpec S tM t ng Nem 9 55 GD GD5 eng kgem AN r min tpec S amp TM TL rg kgf m 375 App E Allowable Current of Insulated Wires The tables below list the allowable current of IV wires HIV wires and 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires B IV wires Maximum allowable temperature 60 C 140 F Table F 1 a Allowable Current of Insulated Wires Aerial wiring Wiring in the duct Max 3 wires in one duct Wire size reference value 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 F 50 C 122 F 55 C 131 F 35 C 95 F 40 C 104 F 45 C 113 50 C 122 F mm up to 30 C lox0 91 lox0 82 lox0 71 lox0 58 lox0 40 lox0 63 lox0 57 lox0 49 lox0 40 lo A A A A A A 5 5 44 40 34 28 20 30 27 24 19 27 37 49 61 88 98 395 69 556 650 745 842 97 658 782 927 250 55 s 5 45 39 322 227 350 316 272 222 40 75 ez eo 528 4 305 469 424 365 298 2 x 100 288 203 313 283 243 198 2x10 658 s 539 4e se 269 414 375 322 263 2x200 72 m en 5 45 320 492 445 383 312 2x250 843 760 658 537 380 584 528 454 370 2x325 628 444 682 617 530 433 2x400 720 509 782
309. lectronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable 1 Active for 4 pole standard motor 2 Active for 4 pole inverter motor Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Select motor characteristics 1 For general purpose motors with shaft driven fan 2 For inverter driven motors non ventilated motors or motors with forced cooling fan Electric thermal overload relay for motor 2 Level 20 to 135 of the inverter rated current in Ampere Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Overload detection level 20 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor Electric thermal overload relay for motor 2 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 10 min Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 10 0 min Torque vector control 2 0 Inactive 1 Active Control mode selection 2 0 Disable V f operation with slip compensation inactive 1 Enable Dynamic torque vector operation Motor 2 Number of No load current compensation control 2 compensation response time 0 01 to 5 50 kW 3 7 kW or less 0 01 to 11 0 kW 5 5 7 5 kW 0 00 to 99 9 A 0 1 2 0 1 0 00 to 99 9A 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 15 00 Hz 0 01 to 10 00 s A 41 Motor 2 No of poles No lo
310. lied Main circuit power input L1 R L2 S L3 T or L1 L L2 N Inverter output U V W supply Inverter type w DC reactor DCR w o DC reactor DCR voltage Tap a sare curent e ee ere Current Roa T re current 08 15 3 0 5 0 Three 8 0 phase UE 230V 5 17 25 10 _ FRNot0E1S 20 5 20 20 288 80 55 35 427 55 35 20 33 15 _ FRNoT5E1S 2U 80 55 35 422 140 80 56 007 8o 55 55 47 20 rFRNozoE1S 2U 14 0 80 55 576 220 140 140 801 140 80 55 60 L 1 2 FRNF50E1S 4U 15 1 FRNOO1E1S 4U 20 20 2 5 20 20 37 Three 2 0 55 phase 9 0 460V 13 20 18 24 20 FRNO20E1S 4U 35 20 20 288 80 55 35 438 3 5 35 2 0 30 2 0 0 8 sal 15 ale 3 0 o 5 0 8 0 T 1 Assuming the use of aerial wiring without rack or duct 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires for 60 C 140 F 600 V class of polyethylene insulated HIV wires for 75 C 167 F and 600 V cross linked polyethylene insulated wires for 90 C 194 F 6 6 6 2 Selecting Wires and Crimp Terminals B if the internal temperature of your power control panel is 40 C 104 F or below Table 6 3 Cont for DC reactor braking resistor control circuit and inverter grounding 2 Recommended wire size mm Nominal DC reactor Brakin a Inverter groundin 2 applied Inverter type IPC DB ecl i voltage motor Allowable temp 1 emp 4 Allowable temp 1 P Tere Fe ere
311. ling fan shortens its life the cooling fan is kept running for 10 minutes once it is started H06 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON OFF Data for H06 Cooling fan ON OFF Disable Always in operation Enable ON OFF controllable 9 85 H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 specifies the acceleration and deceleration Data for H07 Accl Decel pattern atterns patterns to control output frequency 3 p Tv E y Linear Default S curve Weak S curve Strong Curvilinear Linear acceleration deceleration The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curve acceleration deceleration To reduce an impact that acceleration deceleration would make on the machine the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor in both the acceleration deceleration starting and ending zones Two types of S curve acceleration deceleration are available 5 weak and 10 strong of the maximum frequency which are shared by the four inflection points The acceleration deceleration time command determines the duration of acceleration deceleration in the linear period hence the actual acceleration deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration deceleration time Output frequency Acc time Dec time Reference i Reference Maximum Acc time Dec time frequency iem Ro F03 A01 T
312. link FRENIC Loader S01 and S05 Pollen HAO and y 75 dag Via RS 485 communications link Follow H30 and y98 data FRENIC Loader 06 Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link FRENIC Loader S01 and S05 FRENIC Loader S06 aa c z O a O Z Q O Og m Q 9 123 Appendices Contents App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise ssssssssseeees A 1 A Effect of inverters on other devices a n E O aaea A 1 LOEO MC EE Em A 2 A3 c NOISe prevention i5 epa ne ui A 4 App B Effect on Insulation of General purpose Motors Driven with 460 V Class Inverters A 12 B 1 Generating mechanism of surge Voltages cecccesccesscesecesecesecseecseeeseeeseeeeeereneeeseceaeesceseenseeeaeenaes A 12 B2 Effectof surge voltagessza cds cde nek ehe HERR LEN e RD MEE e e I Shen aE OES ERER A 13 B 3 Countermeasures against surge voltages ccecceesceescesscesecesecaecneecaeecaeeeseeeeeeeeseenseeeaecnaeenaeenaeesees A 13 B 4 Regarding existing equipment ener tnter nennen rr en trennen nne A 14 App C Inverter Generating LoSs ceci eee eei eie ine et i e e de ee SE A 15 App D Conversion from SL Units ER URN RR RR ee A 16 App E Allowable Current of Insulated Wires sese nnne A 18 App E Replacement Inforim tiofi tei UE EO ER Rm ied A 20 EK External dimensions comparison tables sss eene enne
313. lowable continuous drive current of the motor Slip compensation 0 0 to 5 0 Hz Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving 100 0 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for braking 100 0 Motor 1 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 5 00 Hz Torque vector control 0 Inactive 1 Active A 30 Control mode selection 1 0 Disable V f operation with slip compensation inactive 1 Enable Dynamic torque vector operation App F Replacement Information FVR E9S FRENIC Multi Data setting range Name Data setting range Name Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S Motor capacity 0 With 1 rank higher capacity Motor 1 0 01 to 11 00 KW 1 With same rank Rated 2 With 1 rank lower capacity capacity 3 With 2 ranks lower capacity Motor 1 0 00 to 99 9 A Motor 1 0 00 to 100 0A Rated current Rated current Motor 1 0 00 to 99 9A Motor 1 0 00 to 50 00A No load No load current current Motor 2 0 00 to 99 9A Motor 2 0 00 to 100 0A Rated current Rated current Tuning 0 Inactive Motor 2 0 Disable 1 Active Auto tuning 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped Motor 1 0 00 to 50 0096 Motor 1 R1 R1 Motor 1 0 00 to 50 00 Motor 1 X X Torque limit 0 to 999 response At constant speed Torque limit 0 to 999 response At acceleration deceleration 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 50 00 A 31
314. lti series and the recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral equipment Chapter 2 PARTS NAMES AND FUNCTIONS This chapter contains external views of the FRENIC Multi series and an overview ofterminal blocks including a description of the LED display and keys on the keypad Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status set function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data Part 2 Driving the Motor Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Chapter 5 RUNNING THROUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION This chapter describes an overview of inverter operation through the RS 485 communications facility Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual or RS 485 Communications Card OPC E1 RS Installation Manual for details Part 3 Peripheral Equipment and Options Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT This chapter describes how to use a range of peripheral equipment and options FRENIC Multi s configuration with them and requirements and precautions for selecting wires and crimp terminals Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CA
315. lue 0 DC link bus voltage Eo Universal AO lo 131 Motor output SJ 14 Test analog output PID command SV lo 16l PID output MV 19 Figure 4 6 Terminal FM Output Selector The block diagram in Figure 4 6 shows the process for selecting and processing the internal signals to be output to analog pulse output terminals FM Combination of function code F29 data and selection of the hardware switch SW6 on the interface PCB specifies a property of the analog pulse output FM terminal for an analog voltage or a pulse train To select information to be transferred to the analog pulse output terminal FM use the function code F31 For its analog output voltage output the function code F30 can define the full scale of the output that just matches with the full scale of the connected voltmeter in the external equipment For the pulse train output the function code F33 defines rate of the output pulse count s for the 10096 output matching resolution of the counter connected in the external equipment Setting function code F31 to 10 Universal AO enables data output from the host equipment via the communications link on FM The calibration analog output F31 14 refers to an output of the FM s full scale voltage or pulse that adjusts the scale of the connected meter 4 19 UJ r Q A z gt D E S n ui E Q O z Az Q E O O
316. m 50 60 Hz pe Grounding ren Te ec ce Note 5 3 Potentiometer power supply 9 13 lPTC 3 2 p Voltage input for setting ii 9112 DCO to 10 V a ug Analog i V SW8 C1 input t f Current voltage input gt A iae o7 WT for setting yt 11 V2 DC 4 to 20 mA DCO to 10 V E j FMA 30C f id FT 30B Meter H rM 30 30A 1d T FMP SW6 871 5 FWD Y1 i REV Y2 L j CM CMY T r Lisa o 9 Digital input i i E SOURCE t i i1 11 X3 swt p gt M 1 X4 ab ax t 7 XS Lj MCCB Molded case circuit breaker q CM GFCI Ground fault circuit interrupter Note 6 5 MC Magnetic contactor ed DCR DC reactor 7 PLC P DBR Braking resistor 8 28 CM THR Note 4 Grounding terminal Control circuit Alarm output for any fault Transistor output Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 8 6 Connection Diagrams When connecting an optional DC reactor DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with an overcurrent protection function in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Install a magnetic contactor MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from
317. m III 600 MHz or later Note 2 OS Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP Memory 32 MB or more RAM 64 MB or more is recommended Hard disk 5 MB or more free space COM port 2 g D g S o a gt f D on ge ua Ss S D a o RS 232C or USB Conversion to RS 485 communication required to connect inverters Monitor resolution XVGA 800 x 600 or higher 1024 x 768 16 bit color or higher is recommended COM port evel COM2 COM3 COM4 COMS COM6 COM7 COM8 PC COM ports assigned to Loader Transmission rate 38400 IRANU 9600 4800 and 2400 bps 19200 bps or more is recommended Note 3 Character length Prefixed Stop bit length Prefixed Parity Prefixed No of retries Transmission requirements None or HW to 10 No of retry times before detecting communications error Timeout setting 100 ms 300 ms 500 ms W to 9 0 s or 10 0 to 60 0 s This setting should be longer than the response interval time set by function code y09 of the inverter Note 1 FRENIC Loader cannot be used with inverters that do not support SX protocol protocol for handling Loader commands With special order made inverters FRENIC Loader may not be able to display some function codes normally To use FRENIC Loader on FRENIC Mini series of inverters an RS 485 Communications Card Option OPC C1 RS is required 5 6
318. motor 4 poles 50 Hz and 230 V three phase The leakage current is calculated based on grounding of the single wire for 230 V class A connection and the neutral point grounding for 460 V class Y connection power lines Values listed above are calculated based on the static capacitance to the earth when the 600 V class of vinyl insulated IV wires are used in a wiring through metal conduit pipes Wiring length is the total length of wiring between the inverter and motor If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the total length of wiring between the inverter and motors 6 11 m m O zi z 9 m D T T r m o c T m z 2 Surge killers A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightning and noise from the power supply lines Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise The applicable model of surge killer is the FSL 323 Figure 6 3 shows its external dimensions and a connection example Refer to the catalog Fuji Noise Suppressors SH310 Japanese edition only for details These products are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd 1 02 Mounting 1 69 43 _ Terminal screw V9 screw M4 1 38 35 M4 0 22 5 5 041 047 les ert Inverter 35 mm wide LIE Y MCCB GFCl FSL 323 IEC standard i rail z a a oo
319. multi monitor Operation of inverters on a PC screen Windows based only Refer to Chapter 5 RUNNING THOUGH RS 485 COMMUNICATION OPTION for details 6 25 ie m D a o LNAWdINOA 1ve aHdledd ONILOATAS 6 4 3 Meter options 1 Frequency meters Connect a frequency meter to analog signal output terminals FM and 11 ofthe inverter to measure the frequency component selected by function code F31 Figure 6 14 shows the dimensions ofthe frequency meter and a connection example Model TRM 45 10 VDC 1 mA 1 77 45 0 33 8 5 0 87 22 M LES 5 BTCA s 1 65 42 1 50 38 j 0 32 0 04 8 1 _ M2 3 4 10 28 0 12 63 1 26 32 Unit inch mm 1 1 26 32 1 26 60 12 3 Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Model FM 60 10 VDC 1 mA 1 61 71 38 35 0 51 13 ell 5 2 00 85 Cover opiom 2 36 60 P Terminal screws 2 M4 Mounting bolts 2 M3 Panel cutout size T eu Sui E B F i Sat EE Unit inch mm or E 1 38 35 serons 2 60 14 H 1 38 35 idis 240 2 525 1 1 97 50 approx 0 15 Ibs 70g Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Inverter Frequency MMC FM meter 11 Figure 6 14 Frequency Meter Dimensions and Connection Example 6 26 Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAP
320. n refer to Section 7 1 3 2 When there are some specified requirements for the acceleration time calculate it according to the following procedure 1 Calculate the moment of inertia for the load and motor Calculate the moment of inertia for the load referring to Section 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation For the motor refer to the related motor catalogs 2 Calculate the minimum acceleration torque See Figure 7 4 The acceleration torque is the difference between the motor short time output torque base frequency 60 Hz explained in Section 7 1 1 2 Maximum driving torque in a short time and the load torque tL ng during constant speed running calculated in the above 1 Calculate the minimum acceleration torque for the whole range of speed 3 Calculate the acceleration time Assign the value calculated above to the equation 7 10 in Section 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation to calculate the acceleration time If the calculated acceleration time is longer than the expected time select the inverter and motor having one class larger capacity and calculate it again Motor output torque Tm Torque Load torque at constant speed UL En Ne Sa ANE sess r Minimum acceleration Load torque TL Speed Figure 7 4 Example Study of Minimum Acceleration Torque 07 m r m O d z 0 O v d z 2 r z O O D 2 Z o Z lt mi E m
321. n accident or physical injury may result c z O a O Z Q O Og m Q Function code data Active ON Active OFF 0 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 Select ACC DEC time Terminal commands assigned Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps 1006 Enable 3 wire operation 1007 Coast to a stop BX 1008 Reset alarm RST 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 OSIIN BR wl nye UP Increase output frequency UP DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN Enable data change with keypad WE KP Cancel PID control Hz PID Switch normal inverse operation IVS Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus LE Universal DI U DI Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM Force to stop STOP Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Hold PID integral component PID HLD Reserved Run forward Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals by E98 and E99 Run reverse Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals by E98 and E99 Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions Note marked with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip and Force to stop are fail safe terminal commands
322. n code F02 Oo m D 9 wo E Operational relationship between function code F02 Operation method and key Table 3 6 lists the relationship between function code F02 settings and the fun key which determines the motor rotational direction Table 3 6 Motor Rotational Direction Specified by F02 Data for F02 Pressing the D key runs the motor 0 In the direction commanded by terminal FWD or REV un key disabled The motor is driven by terminal FWD or REV command In the forward direction Note The rotational direction of IEC compliant motors is opposite to In the reverse direction that of the motor shown here QVdA3M AHL ONISN NOLLVeH3dO For the details on operations with function code F02 refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES 3 2 4 Jogging Operation This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor 1 Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below The LED monitor should display 2 7 Enter Running mode see page 3 2 and press the D S keys simultaneously The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately one second and then returns to Lial again Function codes C20 and H54 specify the jogging frequency and acceleration deceleration time respectively Use these function codes exclusively for the jogging operation with your needs Tip Using the input terminal command Ready for jogging JOG switches between the normal operation state and ready t
323. n undervoltage alarm L Li is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state Enable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the Restart at the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter saves the output frequency being the power failure applied at that time and shuts down the output so that the occurred for general motor enters a coast to stop state loads If a run command has been input restoring power restarts the inverter at the output frequency saved during the last power failure processing This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure frequency at which Enable restart After a momentary power failure restoring power and Restart at the then entering a run command restarts the inverter at the starting frequency starting frequency specified by function code F23 for low inertia load This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Tip When the motor restarts after a momentary power failure the auto search mode can apply which detects the idling motor speed and runs the idling motor without sto
324. nals CM s and CMY 8 9 a g on o z lt Related Functions function codes Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 66 ft 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 8 2 ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal a malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or an equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal and or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 8 3 Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 when you assign the terminal C1 to C1 function Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Shielded wire lt Control circuit gt Cd D Capacitor Control circuit analog output 0 0224 F 50V D qur 12 x Qi Ferrite core Pass the
325. nce information including accumulated run time Alarm Information Displays the latest four alarm codes You can refer to the running information at the time when the alarm occurred For details of each menu item refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Terminal C1 Signal Definition C1 V2 function E59 defines the property of terminal C1 for either a current input 4 to 20 mA DC CI function or a voltage input 0 to 10 VDC V2 function In addition to this setting you need to turn SW7 on the interface PCB to the corresponding position as listed below Data for E59 Input configuration SW7 position 0 Current input 4 to 20 mA DC C1 function Cl 1 Voltage input 0 to 10 VDC V2 function V2 note To use terminal C1 for the PTC thermistor input set E59 data to 0 Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function C1 function Terminal C1 Extended Function V2 function E61 E62 and E63 define the property of terminals 12 C1 C1 function and C1 V2 function respectively There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources pou E Function Description 0 None This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be Auxiliary frequency added to frequency command 1 F01 It is never command 1 added to frequency command 2 multi frequency command or other frequency commands This is an aux
326. ne currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the 9 V key while the current alarm code is displayed 3 4 3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm When the alarm code is displayed you may check various running status information output frequency and output current etc by pressing the eS key The item number and data for each running information will be displayed alternately Further you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the J Okey The information displayed is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm Information in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 19 in Section 3 3 7 Reading alarm information Pressing the e key while the running status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm codes CNote When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause pressing CNo hel c key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm state This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this time 3 4 4 Switching to Programming mode You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing Gro eS keys simultaneously with the alarm displayed and modify the function code data 3 4 Alarm Mode Figure 3 11 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items Running mode Programming mode Item
327. ng an external power supply Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1 5 seconds after power on so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period Terminals 30A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching Where frequent ON OFF switching is anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line use transistor outputs Y1 and Y2 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched on and off at one second intervals The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y 1 Y2 and 30A B C To make the explanations simpler the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic Active ON Function code data Active ON Active OFF Functions assigned Symbol 1000 Inverter running RUN 1001 Frequency arrival signal FAR 1002 Frequency detected FDT 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU 1004 Torque polarity detected B D 1005 Inverter output limiting IOL 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF 1007 Motor overload early warning OL 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY 1021 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL
328. ng the FRENIC Multi Configuring the FRENIC Multi This section lists the names and features of peripheral equipment and options for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters and includes a configuration example for reference Refer to Figure 6 1 for a quick overview of available options Remote keypad Standard equipment If the back cover packed with the inverter is mounted and the extension cable is used remote operation can be performed Multi function keypad available soon TP G1 This multi function keypad has a large 5 digit 7 segment LED with backlit LCD It cannot be mounted on the inverter body Arrestor CN2320000 Used to absorb lightning surges that come in from the power supply to protect all the equipment that is connected to the power supply Handled by Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Radio noise reducing zero phase reactor ACL 40B ACL 74B This is used to reduce noise For the most part control effects can be obtained in frequency band of 1MHz or higher Since the frequency band where effects can be obtained is broad it is effective as simple countermeasure against noise If the wiring distance between a motor and the inverter is short 66ft 20m is a good guideline it is recommended that it be connected to the power supply side and if the distance exceeds 66f1 20m connect it to the output side EMC compliant filter EFL 000 This is an exclusive filter used to comply with European regulations
329. ning of the magnetic contactors miniature control relays and timers Applicable surge absorber models are the S2 A O and S1 B O Figure 6 5 shows their external dimensions Refer to the catalog Fuji Noise Suppressors SH310 Japanese edition only for details The surge absorbers are available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Type S2 A O for magnetic contactor 0 24 0 02 0 41 0 04 11 81 300 Steg wi wire 1 18 6 0 5 40 41 1 580 oat ka AX ory ait eo Type S1 B O for mini control relay or timer 0 24 0 02 0 36 0 04 11 81 300 Toad wire 0 79 0 04 6 0 5 9 121 1 58x0 02 40 1 2051 To sot at IR dio e i Or si M 2 Unit inch mm Available from Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Figure 6 5 Surge Absorber Dimensions 6 13 ile m D o D IN3WdIno3 1vSaHdledd ONILOAIAS 6 4 Selecting Options 6 4 1 Peripheral equipment options 1 Braking resistors A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration of the motor to heat for consumption Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 2 Selecting a Braking Resistor 1 1 Standard model The standard model of a braking resistor integrates a facility that detects the temperature on the heat sink of the resistor and outputs a digital ON OFF signal if the temperature exceeds the specified level as an overheating warning signal To ensure
330. nitialize all function code data to the factory defaults Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 Rated capacity and P99 Motor 1 selection Function codes subject to initialization PO1 P03 P06 to P12 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 Rated capacity and A39 Motor 2 selection Function codes subject to initialization A15 A17 A20 to A26 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes as follows 1 P02 A16 Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW Motor Rated capacity 2 P99 A39 Select the characteristics of the motor Motor Selection 3 H03 Data Initialization Initialize the motor parameters H03 2 or 3 4 P03 A17 Set the rated current on the nameplate 1f the already set Motor Rated current data differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate of the motor Upon completion of the initialization the H03 data reverts to 0 factory default If the P02 or A16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating data initialization with H03 internally converts the specified value forcedly to the equivalent nominal applied motor rating see the tabl
331. nne 8 28 8 7 JProtectiveEurnctions ete eee ue tS eee dede se pee ee eO 8 30 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 230 V Item Specifications Type FRN E1S 2U F12 F25 F50 001 002 003 005 007 010 015 020 Nominal applied motor HP v d4 ue 3 3 5 75 170 15 20 Rated capacity kVA 2 os os 12 20 2 44 Be 10 13 19 2 Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function l T 0 8 1 5 3 0 5 0 80 11 17 25 33 47 60 y SHIRTS 0 7 14 25 42 7 0 10 16 5 23 5 31 44 57 EE A DR 1 53 ia LAN PRI doc D ERG ua D PE de MS II n IN nta 10 WD a 3 LS O Overload capability 150 of rated current for 1 min 200 0 5 s Rated frequency Hz S5060H OOO O E A Phases voltage frequency Three phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz g Voltage frequency variations Voltage 10 to 15 Voltage unbalance 2 or less 9 Frequency 5 to 5 i amp with DCR 0 57 0 93 1 6 3 0 57 83 140 211 288 422 576 a Rated current A T T T T T T without DCR 1 1 1 8 3 1 5 3 9 5 13 2 22 2 31 5 42 7 60 7 80 1 Required power supply capacity kVA 6 0 2 0 3 0 6 1 1 2 0 2 9 4 9 74 10 15 20 Torque Al 150 100 7 40 20 2 Torque 8l 150 amp DC braking Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level
332. no load current while running 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 00 to 50 00A 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 50 00 0 00 to 15 00 Hz Set P09 and P11 data to 100 0 01 to 10 00 s H High performance functions FVR E11S App F Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Accumulated operation time LED monitor shows the accumulated operation time Check with Menu 5_00 cumulative run time Trip history LED monitor shows the trip history Check with Menu Z6 00 output frequency Data initializing 0 Disabled 1 Initializing data Data initialization 0 Disable initialization 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Auto reset Times Reset interval 0 Inactive 1 to 10 times 2to20s Auto reset Times Reset interval 0 Disable 1 to 10 2 to 20s Cooling fan ON OFF control 0 Inactive 1 Active Cooling fan ON OFF control 0 Disable 1 Enable ACC DEC pattern Liner S curve Weak S curve Strong Non linear Acceleration deceleration pattern 0 Linear 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong 3 Curvilinear Start mode Rotating motor pick up Inactive Active Only auto restart after momentary power failure mode Active 0 1 2 3 0 1 Starting mode Auto search 0 Di
333. ntrol depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 the item accessible is the primary frequency command if it is set to any other data it is the PID dancer position command LU Refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block Setting the PID dancer position command with the and C keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 N O keys on keypad 2 Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E43 0 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID command with the 9 V key To enable the PID dancer position command to be modified with the 9 V key first switch to Running mode 3 Press the 9 amp 2 key to display the PID dancer position command The lowest digit blinks on the LED monitor 4 To change the command press the J amp key again The command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory as function code J57 data It is retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID command source and then go back to the via keypad PID command Furthermore you can directly configure the command with function code J57 O U m O Z C D z 4 I m A m lt gt ju Even if multi frequency is selected as a PID command 4 or 8 ON you still can Tip set the PID dancer position command using the keypad
334. o 100 V2 function Multi frequency Selectable from 16 different of frequencies 0 to 15 UP DOWN operation Frequency can be increased or decreased while the digital input signal is ON Link operation Frequency can be specified via the RS 485 or field bus communications port option Frequency switching Two types of frequency settings can be switched with an external signal digital input Changeover between frequency setting and multi frequency setting via communication is available Auxiliary frequency setting Inputs at terminal 12 or C1 C1 V2 function can be added to the main setting as auxiliary frequency settings Inverse operation Normal inverse operation can be set or switched with digital input signal and function code setting 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 at terminal 12 and C1 V2 function 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 at terminal C1 C1 function Pulse train input Max 30 kHz Maximum output frequency when the optional PG interface card is installed Remarks Acceleration deceleration time Frequency limiter Upper limit and lower limit frequencies Bias Gain Jump frequency Timer operation 0 00 to 3600 s variable setting Acceleration and deceleration time can be independently set with 2 types and selected with digital input signal 1 point Acceleration and deceleration pattern can be selected from 4 types Linear S curve weak S curve stron
335. o avoid that H69 provides a choice of cancellation of the anti regenerative control to apply when three times the specified deceleration time is elapsed thus decelerating the motor Data for H69 Function Disable Enable Canceled 1f actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by FO8 E11 Enable Not canceled even if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 not 0 Enabling the anti regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration time When a brake unit is connected disable the anti regenerative control H70 Overload Prevention Control H70 specifies the decelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring due to an overload This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat or inverter overload with an alarm indication of 7 or LiL respectively It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency drops c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Data for H70 Function 0 00 Decelerate the motor by deceleration time 1 F08 or 2 E11 0 01 to 100 0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s 999 Disable overload prevention control In equipment where a decrease in the output frequenc
336. o induce a malfunction by any setting Takes effect in the constant speed or deceleration operation mode that is not needed Takes effect in the constant speed operation mode m Timer J67 Takes effect in all the operation modes J67 configures the timer to suppress any activation of the overload stop function by any unexpected momentary load fluctuation If an activation condition of the overload stop function is taken for the time specified by the timer J67 the inverter activate it in case of J65 1 or 2 ON s If J65 3 the timer setting is ignored In this case the inverter decelerates the motor instantaneously with the torque limit function so that referring to the timer is to interfere running of this function J68 Braking Signal Brake OFF current J69 Braking Signal Brake OFF frequency J70 Braking Signal Brake OFF timer J71 Braking Signal Brake ON frequency J72 Braking Signal Brake ON timer These function codes are for the brake releasing turning on signals of hoisting elevating machines Releasing the Brake The inverter releases the brake Terminal command BRKS ON after checking torque generation of the motor monitoring whether it applies both the output current and frequency to the motor which are higher than ones specified for the time long enough Function code 0 to 200 Set it putting the inverter rated current at 100 Brake OFF current Dat
337. o jog state Switching between the normal operation state and read to jog state with the 9 AN keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped 2 Jogging the motor Hold down the amp 9 key during which the motor continues jogging To decelerate to stop the motor release the key 3 Exiting the ready to jog state and returning to the normal operation state Press the 89 AN keys simultaneously LL For details refer to the descriptions of function codes E01 to E05 in Chapter 9 Section 9 2 2 E codes Terminal functions 3 9 3 3 Programming Mode The Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 7 lists menus available in Programming mode The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on the menu selected last in Programming mode will be displayed Quick Setup LED monitor shows I LII TI Table 3 7 Menus Available in Programming Mode Main functions Displays only basic function codes to customize the inverter operation Refer to Section 3 3 1 Data Setting F codes Fundamental functions
338. oad torque Rotational Direction Limitation H08 inhibits the motor from running in an unexpected rotational direction due to miss operation of run commands miss polarization of frequency commands or other mistakes Data for H08 Function Disable Enable Reverse rotation inhibited Enable Forward rotation inhibited 9 87 c z O a O Z Q O Og m Q Starting Mode Auto search H49 Starting Mode Delay time H09 specifies the auto search mode for idling motor speed to run the idling motor without stopping it The auto search applies to both a restart of the inverter after a momentary power failure and every normal startup The auto search mode can be switched by assigning an STM terminal command Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting to a digital input terminal with any of E01 to E05 function code data 26 If no STM is assigned the inverter interprets STM as being OFF by default Auto search for idling motor speed Starting the inverter with a run command ON BX OFF auto reset etc with STM being ON searches for the idling motor speed for a maximum of 1 2 seconds to run the idling motor without stopping it After completion of the auto search the inverter accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the frequency command and the preset acceleration time Frequency command 1 I Motor speed 1 1 b ue i 1 Starting mode
339. of Function Code Data Changing Procedure Oo m D 9 wo QVdA3M AHL ONISN NOLLVeH3dO 3 3 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data Setting in Programming mode allows you to set up function codes for making the inverter functions match your needs To set function codes in this menu it is necessary to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode Basic key operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 3 1 3 3 Programming Mode 3 3 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 2 Data Checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary Figure 3 6 shows the menu transition in Menu 2 Data Checking Power ON O Running mode 3 Mi 5 yil Z qe P i Cu Pac List of function codes Function code data z T y 1 1 A Ol tO 4 T m eee n EE E 1 U go to the next a Save data and function code Cer 5 k ci i Go to the next function code iy ESR aE Go to the next func
340. of carrier frequency Bit 0 This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter running c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Even 1f a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load abnormal ambient temperature or cooling system failure enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping 7 or 4 Li Note that enabling this function results in increased motor noise Input phase loss protection 7 Bit 1 Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit due to phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance in the three phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 17 In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit Note Output phase loss protection Bit 2 Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 4 Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation all the phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 3
341. of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Output voltage V Variable torque output using non linear V f pattern Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Constant torque output Non linear not using non linear V f pattern V f pattem 1 Voltage H51 Output frequency 0 Non linear V f pattern 1 Base Hz Frequency frequency 1 H50 F04 9 19 c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo E Torque boost Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage 1s added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load to give the output voltage To secure a sufficient starting torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09 Specify an appropriate level that guarantees smooth start up and yet does not cause over excitation with no or light load Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the load fluctuation Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that provides approx 100 of starting torque Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause overcurrent due to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level When the non linear V f pattern
342. of the command sources and apply them inverter shown on the Loader by clicking Apply screen Loader will become to show the latest inverter status Refer to the table shown below for details of the operation buttons The indented appearance of the FWD button as shown in the figure above indicates that it is active for running the motor forward while that of the REV button is same for running reverse Stops the motor Run the motor forward Run the motor reverse Resets all alarm information saved in the selected inverter 5 2 Overview of FRENIC Loader 5 2 3 5 Real time trace Displaying running status of an inverter in waveforms This function allows you to monitor up to 4 analog readouts and up to 8 digital ON OFF signals maximum number of monitor item to be displayed is 8 channels measured at fixed sampling intervals of 200 ms which represent the running status of a selected inverter These quantities are displayed in real time waveforms on a time trace Waveform capturing capability Max 15 360 samples channel Sub panes Set up the monitor items Status of Cursor Save Data Hardcopy Cursor scroll Blinks during the Position graph monitoring position the monitor slide real time trace am Real time trace Position grap Measuring monitor Frequency command 60 00 HZ Output frequency 41 07 Hz Output current 14 37 FWD terminal Output current ar CH 4 X1 terminal oF
343. ol displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Terminal input signal status under communications control in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status under communications control in hexadecimal format Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals under RS 485 communications control Refer to Bi Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control in Section 3 3 5 Checking I O signal status for details Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession the alarm information for the first CNote l occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in between will be discarded The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserved as the first alarm information 3 31 O Q m o Z c Er Z 9 I m A m lt gt oO 3 4 Alarm Mode If an abnormal condition arises the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm then the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode At the same time an alarm code appears on the LED monitor 3 4 4 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the e key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The alarm can be removed using the amp key only when the alarm code is displayed 3 4 2 Displaying the alarm history It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the o
344. om output side wiring If the wiring length in a plant etc is long it is effective as a noise reduction countermeasure This filter is not limited by carrier frequency Also motor tuning can be carried out with this option in the installed state Surge absorber S2 A O For magnetic contactors S1 B O For mini control relays timers control relays and timers etc Handled by Fuji Electric Technica Co Ltd Magnetic Contactor T j Yez Fop Yoc Ep Absorbs external surges and noise and prevents malfunction of magnetic contactors mini Extension cable for remote operation This cable is used if Model Length ft m CB5S 1600 remote operation is to CB 3S 9 8 3 be performed Connector type RJ 45 CB 1S 33 1 Inverter loader software for Windows This software is used to set function codes in the inverter from a personal computer to manage data etc USB RS 485 converter USB cable Handled by System Sacom Sales Corp CHEST THe Ree eee eee eee ee eee Et T BI Other Inverters Braking Resistor DB00 00 Used to improve the braking capacity in cases where there is frequent starting and stopping or when the load is great from the inertial moment etc Filter capacitor for radio noise reduction NFMOO M315KPDO Used to reduce noise It is effective in the AM radio frequency band Do not use this in the inverter output side Made by NIPPON C
345. ombinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the manual speed command entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 3 Manual Speed Frequency Command Specified with WA QO Keys and Requirements PID Communi LED monitor E43 control Mode selection Frequency command 1 F01 Multi frequency SS2 Multi frequency SS1 cations link operation Pressing AN QO keys controls J01 LE OFF PID enabled PID output as final frequency command Manual speed frequency command set by keypad ON PID disabled OFF PID enabled PID output as final frequency command Other than the above Manual speed frequency command currently selected ON PID disabled F01 0 Link disabled LE OFF Manual speed command from keypa SS2 SS1 OFF PID disabled Frequency setting other Hz PID ON than above O Command via link O Multi frequency command Final frequency command PID output as frequency command 3 6 3 2 Running Mode E Settings under PID dancer control To enable the PID dancer control you need to set function code JO1 to 3 Under the PID control the items that can be specified or checked with and amp keys are different from those under the regular frequency co
346. ometiutiuent nibo a mute 6 14 6 4 1 Peripheral equipment optlotis eh IER ERR HERB RITIENE 6 14 6 4 2 Options for operation and communications sese nre 6 23 6 43 Meter OptiOrisu aco aote ini t eR e eae RT I Id eR a Udo 6 26 Part 4 Selecting Optimal Inverter Model Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters sess enne enitn terne nnne nnne nr ennt 7 1 7 1 1 Motor output torque characteristics ninn eren nennen ener ener nnne nnne nnns 7 1 FAD Selection procedure s Ste edente ate Mena ect eic deg 7 4 7 1 3 Equations for selections c ie nete edet AB T a AER RE EE 7 7 7 1 3 1 Load torque during constant speed running cceeceseceeesceeseeeseeeeeeeceesecesecesecesecnsecnseessenaeenaes 7 7 7 1 3 2 Acceleration and deceleration time calculation sse 7 8 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor sse 7 11 7 1 3 4 Calculating the RMS rating of the motor 0 0 ee sss 7 12 72 Selecting a Braking Resisto eee te hikes Goes er Ce e ME E Pe a EE Era eei ie SCoT 7 13 T21 Selection procedure sse dea ecd e ee e eda 7 13 R22 Notesomselectlon s aate So e fate ra Ste a itio th Meee cotes me 7 13 Part 5 Specifications Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 lv 7 Standard Models 50 1 d be e to eh o e ee 8 1 Solel SEhreezpliase 230 Vc ue Rea ee oe tdi ite aee BA hak t tees 8 1 8 12 Ihree phase 460w Lise oeebioreiuibet
347. onds Note that the timer count on the LED monitor appears as an integral number without a decimal point 2 Press the amp 9 key The motor starts running and the timer starts counting down If the timer counts down the motor stops without pressing the 69 key Even if the LED monitor displays any item except the timer count the timer operation is possible c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Note After the countdown of the timer operation triggered by a terminal command such as FWD the inverter decelerates to stop and at that moment the LED monitor displays c and any LED monitor item for the timer count alternately Turning FWD OFF retums to the LED monitor item C30 Frequency Command 2 F01 Frequency Command 1 For details of frequency command 2 refer to the description of F01 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset C33 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Filter time constant C36 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Offset C38 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Filter time constant C41 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Offset C43 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Filter time constant C31 C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage current input at terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function respectively The table below summarizes their interrelation The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment
348. ons SS7 SS2 SS4 and SS8 data 0 1 2 and 3 to the digital input terminals For the relationship between multi frequency operation and other frequency commands refer to Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo m When enabling PID control J01 1 2 or 3 Under the PID control a multi frequency command can be specified as a preset value 3 different frequencies It can also be used for a manual speed command even with the PID control being canceled Hz PID ON or for a primary reference frequency under the PID dancer control PID command SST SS2 Command Command specified by J02 Multi frequency by C08 Multi frequency by C12 Multi frequency by C16 C08 C12 and C16 can be specified in increments of 1 Hz The following gives the conversion formula between the PID command value and the data to be specified Data to be specified PID command x Maximum frequency F03 100 Data to be specified C08 C12 C16 PID command Manual speed command SS8 SS4 Maximum frequency F03 x 100 Selected frequency Other than multi frequency C05 Multi frequency 1 C06 Multi frequency 2 C07 Multi frequency 3 For PID commands refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 4 Section 4 5 PID Process Control Block and Section 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block C20 Jogging Frequency C20 specifies
349. ons method Half duplex Communications rates bps 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Maximum communications distance 1600ft 500m Terminal resistor Built in DeviceNet Board OPC E1 DEV Used to set change and check the function codes necessary for operation commands frequency setting monitoring and operation from the DeviceNet master Connection Nodes Max 64 units including the master MAC ID 0 to 63 Insulation 500V DC photo coupler insulation Communications rates kbps 500 250 125 Network power consumption Max 50mA 24V DC DC Reactor DCRO 000 For power supply coordination 1 Used when the power supply s transformer capacity is 500kVA or higher and is 10 or more times the rated capacity of the inverter 2 Used in cases where a thyristor converter is connected as a load on the same transformer If a commutating reactor is not used in the thyristor converter is necessary to connect an AC reactor on the inverter s input side and so be sure to verity that this is done 3 Used to prevent tripping in cases where an inverter overvoltage trip is caused by opening and closing of the phase advancing capacitor in the power supply system 4 Used when there is a phase unbalance of 2 or greater in the power supply voltage For improving supplied power factor reducing harmonics Used to reduce the supplied harmonics current or improve power factor Conceming reduction ef
350. ontrol circuit Programmable logic controller PLC SINK Sw1 Tdi SOURCE 1O i SOURCE X X1 to X5 FWD REV X1 to X8 FWD REV Photocoupler Photocoupler CM CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 8 6 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC For details about the slide switch setting refer to Setting up the slide switches on page 8 17 8 3 Terminal Specifications Analog output pulse output transistor output and relay output terminals 1 as 7 2 SS e o O FM Analog output Pulse output Analog monitor FMA function Functions The monitor signal for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V is output You can select FMA function with slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB and change the data of the function code F29 You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31 Output frequency 1 Before slip compensation Output frequency 2 After slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command SV PID output MV Input impedance of external device Min 5kQ 0
351. or C1 C1 function Offset Gain 0 00 to 200 00 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Offset Gain 0 00 to 200 00 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 Bias Frequency command 1 0 00 to 100 00 Bias base point Bias PID command 1 S a ay o o S8 S8 o a o o Bias value Bias base point Selection of Normal Inverse Operation 0 Normal Tp Frequency command 1 Inverse operation P codes Motor 1 Parameters A Data Default Refer to Code Data setting range Unit 3 K copying setting page ii cb d EE EET A E ud Y2 P02 Rated capacity 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 0 3 or 4 0 01 kW Y1 Rated 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 1 0 01 HP Y2 capacity of motor P03 Rated current 0 00 to 100 0 0 01 A Y1 Rated value Y2 of Fuji standard motor P04 Auto tuning 0 Disable 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped 2 Enable Tune R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped and no load current while running P05 Online tuning 0 Disable 1 Enable P06 No load current ER Ea value 9 78 Y2 of Fuji standard motor P07 R1 0 00 to 50 00 Y Rated value of Fuji standard motor P08 0 00 to 50 00 Rated value of Fuji standard motor P09 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 B 9 78 P10 Slip compensation response time A lj 9 79
352. or motor with Select motor characteristics separately powered cooling fan Overload detection level 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 100 00 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure 0 Disable restart Trip immediately Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power failure Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load Frequency Limiter High cow Mode selection DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking level Braking time Starting Frequency 1 0 1 to 60 0 Holdingtime 0 00 to 10 00 7 Stop Frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Motor Sound Carrier frequency 0 75 to 15 1 Tone 0 Level 0 Inactive 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 3 Level 3 The shaded function codes E are applicable to the quick setup jun Change Data Default Refer Unit when copyin settin to runnii Pying 9 page Kivun j ee o1 paz N v 600 9 16 ALL E AEF E Depending on the inverter capacity 9 21 100 of the motor rated current o1 fmn v v 50 CETT li EPA MA 9 28 o1 re 9 29 9 32 9 33 9 34 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If
353. or to the output frequency before slip compensation to be applied for monitor If the constant feeding rate time is 999 9 min or more or the denominator of the right hand side is zero 0 999 9 appears PID Display Coefficient A PID Display Coefficient B These function codes specify PID display coefficients A and B to convert a PID command and its feedback into mnemonic physical quantities to display Data setting range 999 to 0 00 to 9990 for PID display coefficients A and B m Display coefficients for PID process command and its feedback J01 1 or 2 E40 specifies coefficient A that determines the display value at 100 of the PID process command or its feedback and E41 specifies coefficient B that determines the display value at 0 The display value is determined as follows Display value PID process command or its feedback 100 x Display coefficient A B B Value displayed 4 PID display coefficient A PID display coefficient B E41 i__ PID process command 0 100 PID feedback Example Maintaining the pressure around 16 kPa sensor voltage 3 13 V while the pressure sensor can detect 0 to 30 kPa over the output voltage range of 1 to 5 V Select terminal 12 as a feedback terminal and set the gain to 200 so that 5 V corresponds to 100 9 2 Overview of Function Codes The following E40 and E41 settings allow you to monitor or specify the values of the PID process command and its fee
354. oscilloscope or equivalent Repeat the following procedure to determine the optimal solution for each system Increase the data of J03 PID control P Gain within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Decrease the data of J04 PID control I Integral time within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Increase the data of J05 PID control D Differential time within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Refining the system response waveforms is shown below 1 Suppressing overshoot Increase the data of J04 Integral time and decrease the data of JO5 Differential time E Controlled Response 7 Time 9 110 9 2 Overview of Function Codes 2 Quick stabilizing moderate overshoot allowable Decrease the data of J03 Gain and increase that of J05 Differential time r Controlled Response 1 Natural Time 3 Suppressing oscillation whose period is longer than the integral time specified by J04 Increase the data of J04 Integral time Controlled Response Natural Time 4 Suppressing oscillation whose period is approximately the same as the time specified by J05 Differential time Decrease the data of J05 Differential time Decrease the data of J03 Gain when the oscillation cannot be suppressed even if the differential time is set at 0 sec oO m D Pad co Controlled Respon
355. ose inverter protocol m Protocol selection y20 y20 specifies the communications protocol for the optional communications port Modbus RTU protocol Fuji general purpose inverter protocol 9 122 9 2 Overview of Function Codes y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection H30 Communications Link Function Mode selection For setting data for y98 bus link function Mode selection refer to the description of function code H30 y99 Loader Link Function Mode selection This 1s a link switching function for FRENIC Loader Rewriting the data of y99 to enable RS 485 communications from Loader helps Loader send the inverter the frequency and or run commands Since the data to be set in the function code of the inverter is automatically set by Loader no keypad operation is required While Loader is selected as the source of the run command if the PC runs out of control and cannot be stopped by a stop command sent from Loader disconnect the RS 485 communications cable from the standard port Keypad connect a keypad instead and reset the y99 to 0 This setting 0 in y99 means that the run and frequency command source specified by function code H30 takes place Note that the inverter cannot save the setting of y99 When power is turned off the data in y99 is lost y99 is reset to 0 Function Data for y99 Frequency command Run command Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 communications
356. ot exceed the discharging capability kWs listed in Tables 6 6 to 6 8 in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors For detailed calculation refer to Section 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor 3 The average loss that is calculated by dividing the discharge energy by the cyclic period must not exceed the average loss kW listed in Tables 6 6 to 6 8 in Chapter 6 Section 6 4 1 1 Braking resistors 7 2 2 Notes on selection The braking time T cyclic period To and duty cycle ED are converted under deceleration braking conditions based on the rated torque as shown below However you do not need to consider these values when selecting the braking resistor capacity 150 Braking power Braking time T1 Braking time T1 Time gt J l Cyclic period To E j I Figure 7 11 Duty Cycle n m T m O d Z a O Q gt r O O E gt Z U z lt m E 4 ITI E Q Q m o Part 5 Specifications Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS Chapter9 FUNCTION CODES Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes specifications of the output ratings control system and terminal functions for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters It also provides descriptions of the operating and storage environment external dimensions examples of basic connection diagrams and details of the protective functions Contents Sells Standard Models o 5tresnaqi eie EO Sones a a ata eda
357. otor that is used as a standard motor listed in tables in Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT and Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS Overload capability The overload current that an inverter can tolerate expressed as a percentage of the rated output current and also as a permissible energization time PID control The scheme of control that brings controlled objects to a desired value quickly and accurately and which consists of three categories of action proportional integral and differential Proportional action minimizes errors from a set point Integral action resets errors from a desired value to 0 Differential action applies a control value in proportion to a differential component of the difference between the PID reference and feedback values Related function codes E01 to E05 E40 E41 E43 E61 to E63 C51 C52 J01 to J62 G 4 Programming mode One of the three operation modes supported by the inverter This mode uses the menu driven system and allows the user to set function codes or check the inverter status maintenance information PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor Type of thermistor with a positive temperature coefficient Used to safeguard a motor Related function codes H26 and H27 Rated capacity The rating of an inverter output capacity at the secondary side or the apparent power that is represented by the rated output voltage times the rated output current which is calc
358. ource Select frequency Reference frequency given by the command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 frequency command source used just before switching Other than UP DOWN F01 C30 Cancel PID control Reference frequency given by PID FID condones Hz PID control PID controller output Select multi frequency Reference Reference SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 frequency given by frequency at the the frequency time of previous Enable communications command source UP DOWN Communications link link via RS 485 or field used just before control bus LE switching Multi frequency Cnote To enable the UP and DOWN terminal commands you need to set frequency Note command 1 F01 or frequency command 2 C30 to 7 beforehand Changing the PID speed command value When the UP DOWN control is selected as a PID speed command turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON with a run command being ON causes the PID speed command to change within the range from 0 to 100 The PID speed command can be specified in mnemonic physical quantities such as temperature or pressure with the PID display coefficients E40 E41 UP DOWN Function Data 17 Data 18 Retain PID speed command value Increase PID speed command value at a rate between 0 196 0 1 s and 1 0 1 s Decrease PID speed command value at a rate between 0 196 0 1 s and 1 0 1 s Retain PID speed command value Selecting the PID control for
359. ous braking time Brake unit Not required This braking resistor is not applicable to three phase 460 V and single phase 230 V of inverters 6 16 6 4 Selecting Options 2 DC reactors DCRs A DCR is mainly used for power supply matching and for input power factor correction for reducing harmonic components E For power supply matching Usea DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the rated inverter capacity In this case the percent reactance of the power supply decreases and harmonic components and their peak value increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter or decrease the capacitance ofthe capacitor which can shorten the inverter s service life Also use a DCR when there are thyristor driven loads or when phase advancing capacitors are being turned ON OFF UseaDCR when the interphase voltage unbalance ratio of the inverter power supply exceeds 2 Max voltage V Min voltage V Interphase voltage unbalance 96 x 67 Three phase average voltage V E For input power factor correction for suppressing harmonics Generally a capacitor is used to improve the power factor of the load however it cannot be used in a system that includes an inverter Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power supply so as to decrease harmonic components on the power supply lines
360. ower lines Providing noise filters at the input and output terminals is also an effective measure A 1 A 2 Noise This section gives a summary of noises generated in inverters and their effects on devices subject to noise 1 Inverter noise Figure A l shows an outline of the inverter configuration The inverter converts AC to DC rectification in a converter unit and converts DC to AC inversion with 3 phase variable voltage and variable frequency The conversion inversion is performed by PWM implemented by switching six transistors IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor etc and is used for variable speed motor control Switching noise is generated by high speed on off switching of the six transistors Noise current 1 is emitted and at each high speed on off switching the noise current flows through stray capacitance C of the inverter cable and motor to the ground The amount of the noise current is expressed as follows i C dv dt It is related to the stray capacitance C and dv dt switching speed of the transistors Further this noise current is related to the carrier frequency since the noise current flows each time the transistors are switched on or off In addition to the main circuit of the inverter the DC to DC switching power regulator DC DC converter which is the power source for the control circuit of the inverter may be a noise source in the same principles as stated above The frequency ban
361. owered cooling fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1 The characteristic factors a1 through o3 as well as their corresponding output frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below list the factors of the motor selected by P99 Motor 1 Selection Actual Output Current Continuous Overload Detection Level F11 fo Base frequency Even if the specified i base frequency exceeds 60 Hz fo 60 Hz Output frequency 0 f2 is amp fo Hz Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft driven Cooling Fan Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 Selection 0 or 4 Nominal applied motor HP Thermal time constant t Factory default Output current for setting the thermal time constant Imax Rated current x 150 Output frequency for motor characteristic factor Characteristic factor 76 f2 f3 a2 Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 or 3 Nominal applied motor HP 1 8 to 30 Thermal time constant T Factory default Output current for setting the thermal time constant Imax Rated current x 150 Bi Overload detection level F11 Output frequency for motor ch
362. ows Selection of normal inverse operation FEinaloneration for frequency command 1 C53 p 0 Normal operation Normal 1 Inverse operation Inverse Note When the process control is performed by the PID control facility integrated in the Note inverter the IVS terminal command is used to switch the PID controller output reference frequency between normal and inverse and has no effect on any normal inverse operation selection of the manual frequency setting m Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus option LE Function code data 24 Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run commands received via the RS 485 communications link H30 or the field bus option y98 No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON Refer to H30 Communications link function and y98 Bus link function m Universal DI U DI Function code data 25 Using U DI enables the inverter to monitor digital signals sent from the peripheral equipment via an RS 485 communications link or a field bus option by feeding those signals to the digital input terminals Signals assigned to the universal DI are simply monitored and do not operate the inverter For an access to universal DI via the RS 485 or field bus communications link refer to their respective Instruction Manuals m Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM Function code data 26 This digital
363. pacity of motor 0 00 to 100 0 Rated value of Fuji standard motor 0 Disable 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped 2 Enable Tune R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped and no oad current while running Rated value of Fuji standard motor Rated value of Fuji standard motor Rated value of Fuji standard motor 0 00 to 15 00 Rated value of Fuji standard Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors Enable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above onan Of waned Damping Gain for Motor 2 9 11 a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo J codes Application Functions l Change Dat Default Refer Code Name Data setting range Deren Unit when ad y an to umni copying setting PID Control Mode selection J02 J03 J04 J05 J06 J10 J11 J12 J13 J18 J19 J56 J57 J58 J59 J60 J61 J62 J63 J64 J65 J66 J67 J68 J69 J70 J71 J72 J73 J74 J75 J76 J77 J78 J79 J80 J81 J82 J83 J84 J85 J86 J87 J88 J90 J91 J92 Remote command SV P Gain Integral time D Differential time Feedba
364. pecified by SS4 and SS8 terminal commands can also be selected as a preset value for the PID command Note Calculate the setting data of the PID command using the expression below PID command data Preset multi frequency Maximum frequency x1 n dancer control J01 3 the setting from the keypad interlocks with data of J57 PID control Dancer reference position and is saved as function code data 9 107 Data Setting Range of PID Command Only applicable to an analog input To select an analog input as a PID command define the setting range of the PID command As with frequency setting you can arbitrary map the relationship between the command and the analog input value by adjusting the gain and bias For details refer to the descriptions of C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 C44 C51 and C52 Example Mapping the range of 1 through 5 V at terminal 12 to 0 through 100 Process command Gain C32 100 Gain base point C34 50 Bias value C51 0 Bias base point C52 10 0 Input at terminal 12 0V1V 5V 10V PID display coefficient and monitoring To monitor PID commands and feedback amounts define the display factor for converting them to numeric control values such as temperature for display LL Refer to the descriptions of E40 and E41 for details on display coefficients and to E43 for details on monitoring m Gain J03 J03 specifies the gain for the PID processor Data setting rang
365. pecifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the motor while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary regeneration For safety therefore it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level Note that even when power is restored restart will not take place until the restart time H13 has elapsed Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage c undo Undervoltage level 1 1 r 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 g 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 p 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 1 State of the inverter Runnin Operation 1 Ing Ready to run ie m D Pad o Operation 2 Gate turned ON j E i i S Z Run command ON ON 9 P AE a 2 State of the inverter Gate signal ON Gate turned OFF Start running 9 oO m o Restart Factory default By factory default H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter capacity Basically you do not need to change H13 data However if the long restart time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case make sure that no al
366. play modes for the standard keypad as listed below Data for E52 Menu display mode Function code data editing mode Menus to be displayed Menus 0 and 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 Coe Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 The multi function keypad always displays all the menu items including additional menu items regardless of the E52 data The menus available on the standard keypad are described below Quick Setup LED monitor shows a LINI Main functions Displays only basic function codes to customize the inverter operation Data Setting F codes Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions P codes Selecting each of Motor 1 parameters these function codes enables its data to be displayed changed H codes High performance functions A codes Motor 2 parameters J codes Application functions y codes Link functions aa c z O a O Z Q O Og m 02 o codes Optional function Data Checking Displays only function codes that have been changed from their factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data Drive Monitoring Displays the running information required for maintenance or test running I O Checking Displays external interface information Maintenance Information Displays maintena
367. pping it Refer to H09 ANWARNING If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 4 or 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power 1s restored Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting Otherwise an accident could occur 9 24 9 2 Overview of Function Codes m Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level while the inverter is running If the load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter enters the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is restored the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a momentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command off In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a ready to run state If a run command is recei
368. process control J01 1 or 2 validates the H61 data as well as frequency commands Selecting it for dancer control J01 3 runs the motor with H61 1 regardless of the actual H61 data that is the inverter internally holds the current PID command specified by the UP DOWN control and applies the held PID command at the next restart including powering on Cnote To validate UP and DOWN terminal commands it is necessary to select the PID Note control Remote command SV J02 3 c Z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo m Enable data change with keypad WE KP Function code data 19 Turning this terminal command OFF protects function code data from unintentionally getting changed with the keypad Only when the WE KP terminal command is ON you can change function code data with the keypad according to the setting of function code F00 as listed below Function Disable changing of all function code data Enable changing of all function code data Disable changing of all function code data except F00 data If no WE KP terminal command is assigned the inverter interprets WE KP as being ON by default f you mistakenly assign a WE KP terminal command you no longer edit or Note modify function code data In such a case temporarily turn this WE KP assigned terminal ON and reassign the WE KP terminal command to a correct command WE KP is only a signal that allows you to change function code data so it do
369. pter contains external views of the FRENIC Multi series and an overview of terminal blocks including a description of the LED monitor keys and LED indicators on the keypad Contents 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks 2 1 2 2 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad sse 2 2 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks 2 1 External View and Allocation of Terminal Blocks Figure 2 1 shows the external views of the FRENIC Multi 1 External views Q gt o 9 N Terminal cover Control circuit terminal block Warning plate nameplate Main circuit Terminal cover Terminal cover terminal block cover fixing screw SNOILONN 4 ANY S3IAVN SLYVd Main circuit terminal block Figure 2 1 FRN020E1S 2U 2 Terminal block location Control circuit Control circuit terminal block terminal block Pd Main circuit EC L3 Main circuit terminal block terminal block a FRNOO1E1S 2U b FRNO20E1S 2U Figure 2 2 Terminal Blocks I Refer to Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS for details on terminal functions arrangement and connection and to Chapter 6 Section 6 2 1 Recommended wires when selecting wires T For details on the keys and their functions refer to Section 2 2 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad For details on keying operation and function code setting refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 2 1
370. put for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode Frequency Arrival Delay Time for FAR2 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width for FAR and FAR2 The moment the output frequency reaches the zone defined by Reference frequency Hysteresis width specified by E30 the Frequency arrival signal FAR comes ON After the delay time specified by E29 the Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 comes ON For the FAR and FAR2 refer to the descriptions of E20 E21 and E27 For details about the operation timings refer to the graph below Frequency command Change the frequency command Reference frequency 1 E30 2 Reference frequency 1 Reference frequency 1 E30 7 777777 Reference frequency 2 E30 2 gR Reference frequency 2 Reference frequency 2 E30 7777 7 l l I I I I I I I I I I I I l l l oe nm m o eee Frequency arrival signal FAR ON Frequency arrival I Frequency I delay time E29 4 9 arrival delay r 9 m time E29 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 I ON Frequency Detection Detection level for FDT Frequency Detection Hysteresis width for FDT When the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 the F
371. put Circuit Filter OFL Nominal applied motor HP FRNF50E1S 2U 1 jFRNOOTE1S 2U 2 FRNOO2E1SU 3 j FRNOO3E1S 2U 5 j FRNOOSE1SU 7 5 FRNOO7E1S 2U 10 fF 5 20 U2 Inverter type RNO10E1S 2U FRNO15E1S 2U FRNO20E1S 2U 1 2 3 5 5 0 5 0 122 FRNF50E1S 4U 1 FRNOO1E1S 4U FRN002E1S 4U FRN003E1S 4U FRNO005E1S 4U RNF50E1S 4U 1 RNOO1E1S 4U 2 RN002E1S 4U 3 RN003E1S 4U 5 RNOO5E1S 4U 5 0 5 0 1 3 F F 1 IF 2 3 IF 5 JF 7 5 FRNOO7E1S 4U 10 jFRNOTOETS 4U 15 FRNO15E1S 4U 20 FRNO20E1S 4U 1 FRNF50E1S 7U FRNOO1E1S 7U y 7 1 2 f 1 1 2 f 1 1 2 Pt L 3 Rated Filter type OFL 0 4 2 Overload capability current A OFL 1 5 2 150 for 1 OFL 3 7 2 min 200 for 0 5 sec OFL 7 5 2 OFL 15 2 OFL 0 4 4 OFL 1 5 4 OFL 3 7 4 150 for 1 min OFL 7 5 4 200 for 0 5 sec OFL 15 4 OFL 0 4 4A OFL 1 5 4A 150 for 1 OFL 3 7 4A min OFL 7 5 4A 200 for 0 5 sec OFL 15 4A OFL 0 4 2 150 for 1 min OFL 1 5 2 200 for 0 5 sec OFL 3 7 2 Note 1 The OFL 4A models have no restrictions on carrier frequency 6 20 Carrier Inverter A frequency Maximum power allowable frequency input voltade range Hz M kHz Three phase 200 to 240 V 8 to 15 400 50 60 Hz Three phase 380 to 440
372. quency command sources terminals 12 and C1 in frequency command 1 F01 and does not affect frequency command 2 C30 or UP DOWN control As listed below the combination of the Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and the ZVS terminal command determines the final operation Combination of C53 and IVS Data for C53 Final operation Normal 0 Normal operation Inverse Inverse 1 Inverse operation Normal When the process control is performed by the PID control facility integrated in the inverter The Cancel PID control terminal command Hz PID can switch the PID control between enabled process is to be controlled by the PID controller and disabled process is to be controlled by the manual frequency setting In either case the combination of the PID control J01 or Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and the IVS command determines the final operation as listed below When the PID control is enabled The normal inverse operation selection for the PID controller output reference frequency 1s as follows PID control Mode selection J01 Final operation Normal 1 Enable normal operation Inverse Inverse 2 Enable inverse operation M i orma m c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo When the PID control is disabled The normal inverse operation selection for the manual reference frequency is as foll
373. quency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the Frequency detection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 m Undervoltage detected LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given m Torque polarity detected B D Function code data 4 The inverter detects the polarity of the internally calculated torque and issues the driving or braking polarity signal to this digital output This signal comes OFF when the calculated torque is the driving one and it goes ON when it is the braking one a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo m Inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms Torque limiting F40 F41 E16 and E17 Current limiting by software F43 and F44 Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware H12 1 Automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 Overload stop Hit mechanical stop J65 3
374. r Power supply Power Proximity supply switch lt Possible cause gt It is considered that the capacitance type proximity switch is susceptible to conduction and radiation noise because of its low noise immunity 1 Install an LC filter at the output side of the inverter 2 Install a capacitive filter at the input side of the inverter Ground the 0 V common line of the DC power supply of the proximity switch through a capacitor to the box body of the machine Power supply A 10 1 If a low current circuit at the malfunctioning side is observed the measures may be simple and economical 1 Noise generated in the inverter can be reduced 2 The switch is superseded by a proximity switch of superior noise immunity such as a magnetic type device Pressure sensor Position detector pulse encoder Program mable logic controller PLC App A Advantageous Use of Inverters Notes on electrical noise Table A 2 Phenomena A pressure sensor malfunctioned Power supply N Box body Possible cause The pressure sensor may malfunction due to noise that came from the box body through the shielded wire Erroneous pulse outputs from a pulse converter caused a shift in the stop position of a crane Inverter Q Curtain cable m Lo Pulse generator Possible cause gt Erroneous pulses may be outputted by induction noi
375. r If the inverter 1s turned ON it automatically enters this mode which you may run stop the motor set up the set frequency monitor the running status and jog the motor S curve acceleration deceleration weak strong To reduce the shock to the machine during acceleration deceleration the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor at the both ends of the acceleration deceleration zones like a figure of S letter Related function code H07 Slip compensation control A mode of control in which the output frequency of an inverter plus an amount of slip compensation 1s used as an actual output frequency to compensate for motor slippage Related function codes P09 to P12 and A23 to A26 Stall A behavior of a motor when it loses speed by tripping of the inverter due to overcurrent detection or other malfunctions of the inverter Starting frequency The minimum frequency at which an inverter starts its output not the frequency at which a motor starts rotating Related function codes F23 and A12 Starting torque Torque that a motor produces when it starts rotating or the drive torque with which the motor can run a load Simultaneous keying To simultaneously press the 2 keys on the keypad This presents the special function of inverters Stop frequency The output frequency at which an inverter stops its output Related function code F25 Thermal time constant The time needed to activate the ele
376. r failure occurs 1 Inactive Trip and alarm when power recovers 2 Active Restarts at output frequency of before power failure Active Restarts at starting frequency Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection 0 Disable restart Trip immediately 1 Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power failure 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load Electronic thermal overload relay for motor 1 Select Inactive Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level 0 00 Active for 4 pole standard motor Active for 4 pole inverter motor Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Select motor characteristics 1 For general purpose motors with shaft driven fan 2 For inverter driven motors non ventilated motors or motors with forced cooling fan Electronic thermal overload relay for motor 1 Level 0 01 to 99 9 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor DC brake Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable DC braking 1 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s DC brake Starting frequency 0 to 60 Hz DC braking 1
377. r 1 M2 M1 Function code data 12 Turning this terminal command ON switches from motor 1 to motor 2 Switching is possible only when the inverter is stopped Upon completion of switching the digital terminal output Switched to motor 2 SWM2 assigned to any of terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C turns ON If no MZ MI terminal command is assigned motor 1 is selected by default Input terminal command Selected molot SWM2 status M2 MI after completion of switching OFF Motor 1 OFF ON Motor 2 ON Switching between motors 1 and 2 automatically switches applicable function codes as listed below The inverter runs the motor with those codes that should be properly configured Function code name For Motor 1 For Motor 2 Maximum Frequency F03 A01 Base Frequency F04 A02 Rated voltage at Base Frequency F05 A03 Maximum Output Voltage F06 A04 Torque Boost F09 A05 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor F10 A06 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level F11 A07 Thermal time constant F12 A08 DC Braking Braking starting frequency F20 A09 Braking level F21 A10 Braking time F22 All Starting Frequency F23 A12 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation F37 A13 Control Mode Selection F42 A14 Motor No of poles POI A15 Rated capacity P02 A16 Rated current P03 A17 Auto tuning P04 A18 Onlin
378. r details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual 9 119 m Station address y01 for standard port and y11 for option port y01 and y11 specify the station address for the RS 485 communications link The table below lists the protocols and the station address setting ranges Protocol Station address Broadcast address Modbus RTU protocol 1 to 247 FRENIC Loader protocol to 255 FUJI general purpose inverter protocol 1 to 31 f any wrong address beyond the above range is specified no response is returned since the inverter will be unable to receive any enquiries except the broadcast message To use FRENIC Loader set the station address that matches the connected PC m Communications error processing y02 for standard port and y12 for option port y02 and y12 specify the operation performed when an RS 485 communications error has occurred RS 485 communications errors contain logical errors such as address error parity error framing error and transmission protocol error and physical errors such as communications disconnection error set by y08 and y18 In each case these are judged as an error only when the inverter is running while the operation command or frequency command has been set to the configuration specified through RS 485 communications When neither the operation command nor frequency command is issued through RS 485 communications or the inverter is not running error occurrence is not r
379. r limit of PID process output J19 PID Control Lower limit of PID process output The upper and lower limiter can be specified to the PID output exclusively used for PID control The settings are ignored when PID cancel is enabled and the inverter is operated at the reference frequency previously specified m PID Control Upper limit of PID process output J18 J18 specifies the upper limit of the PID processor output limiter in 96 If you specify 999 the setting of the frequency limiter High F15 will serve as the upper limit m PID Control Lower limit of PID process output J19 J19 specifies the lower limit of the PID processor output limiter in 96 If you specify 999 the setting of the frequency limiter Low F16 will serve as the lower limit J56 Z et un Cc a PID Control Speed command filter J57 PID Control Dancer reference position J57 specifies the dancer reference position in 100 to 100 for dancer control The reference position can be specified as the function code from the keypad by this function code if J02 0 keypad or as typical operation of the PID command For the setting procedure of the PID command refer to Chapter 3 J5 PID Control Detection width of dancer position deviation J59 a PID Control P Gain 2 J60 PID Control I Integral time 2 J61 PID Control D Differential time 2 The moment the feedback value of dancer roll position comes into the range of th
380. r the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop ofthe motor Chote If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not Note output any power as long as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo Output frequency Starting Stop frequency 1 frequency Holding time Holding time F24 F39 Starting I Stop frequency 1 I frequency i F25 Time Inverter Out of running Out of running running state Gate OFF In tunning Gate ON Gate OFF Time F27 Motor Sound Carrier frequency Motor Sound Tone E Motor sound Carrier frequency F26 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output secondary wirings Carrier frequency 0 75 to 15 kHz Motor sound noise emission High amp Low Motor temperature due to harmonics components High amp Low Ripples in output current waveform Large Small Leakage current Low High Electromagnetic noise emission Low High Inverter loss Low High ote Specifying a too low carrier frequency
381. r to Menu 5_07 Inverter ROM version Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Inverter ROM version Refer to Menu 25 14 Keypad panel ROM version Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad Keypad panel ROM version Refer to Menu 5 16 Option ROM version Data is displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad A 40 Option ROM version Refer to Menu 5 19 A Alternative motor parameters 2 FVR E11S App F Replacement Information FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Maximum frequency 2 50 to 400 Hz Maximum frequency 2 50 to 400 Hz Base frequency 2 25 to 400 Hz Base Frequency 2 25 to 400 Hz Rated voltage 2 OV The output voltage in proportion to the power supply voltage is set 200 V 80 to 240 V 400 V 160 to 480 V Rated voltage at base frequency 2 80 to 240 V for OV Output a voltage in 250 y proportion to input voltage 160 to 480 V for 460 V Maximum voltage 2 230 V 80 to 240 V 460 V 160 to 480 V Maximum output voltage 2 80 to 240V for 230 V 160 to 480 V for 460 V Torque boost 2 0 1 2 3 to 31 Torque boost 2 Refer to the Torque Boost Conversion Table on the last page of this appendix Electric thermal overload relay for motor 2 Select 0 Inactive E
382. rder of the identifying numbers for ease of access Note that function codes closely related each other for the implementation of an inverter s operation are detailed in the description of the function code having the youngest identifying number Those related function codes are indicated in the right end of the title bar 9 2 1 F codes Fundamental functions Data Protection F00 specifies whether to protect function code data except F00 and digital reference data such as frequency command PID command and timer operation from accidentally getting changed by pressing the J V keys Data for F00 Function Disable both data protection and digital reference protection allowing you to change both function code data and digital reference data with the 3 amp keys Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection allowing you to change digital reference data with the J amp keys But you cannot change function code data except F00 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection allowing you to change function code data with the J V keys But you cannot change digital reference data Enable both data protection and digital reference protection not allowing you to change function code data or digital reference data with the W O keys Enabling the protection disables the 9 V keys to change function code data To change F00 data simultaneous keying of 69
383. refer to the description of F42 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Automatic Deceleration Anti regenerative control Mode selection H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H69 enables or disables the anti regenerative control In the inverter not equipped with a PWM converter or brake unit if regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip occurs To avoid such an overvoltage trip enable the anti regenerative control with this function code and the inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque around 0 Nm in both the acceleration deceleration and constant speed running phases Since increasing the output frequency too much in the anti regenerative control is dangerous the inverter has a torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking that can be specified by H76 The torque limiter limits the inverter s output frequency to less than Reference frequency t H76 setting Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti regenerative control resulting in a trip with an overvoltage alarm in some cases Increasing the H76 data 0 0 to 400 0 Hz makes the anti regenerative control capability high In addition during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF the anti regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the load depending on the load state huge moment of inertia for example T
384. rent 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level Example of Operating Characteristics E PAK AY S Specified o E S co D E 2 5 d Z O d i O H Zz f Q O UO 0 50 100 150 200 E Actual Output Current Overload Detection Level x 100 9 23 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Frequency fall rate H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Allowable momentary power failure time F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure E Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection F14 Data for F14 Description Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm Trip immediately Trip after recovery from power failure The moment the power is restored a
385. requency Hz x Function code E50 The 7 segment letters C 7 appear for 10000 r min or more If L appear decrease function code E50 data so that the LED monitor displays 9999 or below referring to the above equation PID command Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID command x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears PID feedback amount Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID feedback amount x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Torque limit value Level 1 Driving torque limit value based on motor rated torque Torque limit value Level 2 Braking torque limit value based on motor rated torque o Q m o Z c Er Z 9 I m A m lt gt oO B Displaying running status To display the running status in hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Table 3 11 Table 3 12 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 13 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to
386. reverse REV Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively C codes Control Functions Refer to page Code Data setting range C01 Jump Frequency 1 C02 2 C03 3 C04 Hysteresis width CO5 Multi Frequency 1 0 00 to 400 0 0 01 Sa 9 71 C06 C07 C08 C09 C10 C11 C12 C13 c14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 Jogging m 0 00 to 400 0 9 72 C21 Timer Operation 0 Disable 9 73 1 Enable C30 Frequency Command 2 UP DOWN keys on keypad 9 14 2 ee input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC 9 73 Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function Voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN control DIO interface card option PGinterface card option These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes a c z O a O Z Q O Og m Qo C code continued Default setting Data setting range Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Gain Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 Polarity 0 Bipolar 1 Unipolar Analog Input Adjustment f
387. ring the braking time F22 when the output frequency reaches the DC braking starting frequency F20 Setting the braking time to 0 0 F22 0 disables the DC braking m Braking starting frequency F20 F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate to stop state m Braking level F21 F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated The function code data should be set assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 10096 in increments of 196 m Braking time F22 F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking m Braking response mode H95 H95 specifies the DC braking response mode Data for H95 Characteristics Slow response Slows the rising edge Insufficient braking torque may result of the current thereby preventing at the start of DC braking reverse rotation at the start of DC braking Quick response Quickens the rising Reverse rotation may result edge of the current thereby depending on the moment of inertia accelerating the build up of the of the mechanical load and the braking torque coupling mechanism Output frequency Start of decelerate to stop Hz DC braking 1 Braking starting frequency F20 0 Time l l i DC braking 1 Braking time F22 DC braking 1 Braking level F21 X Time e DC braking Braking response mode H95 DC br
388. rmation output frequency current or voltage in Programming mode it displays menus function codes and their data and in Alarm mode it displays an alarm code which identifies the alarm factor if the protective function is activated If one of LED4 through LEDI is blinking it means that the cursor is at this digit allowing you to change it If the decimal point of LEDI is blinking it means that the currently displayed data is a value of the PID process command not the frequency data usually displayed LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 a I I ELCO Figure 2 4 7 Segment LED Monitor Table 2 2 Alphanumeric Characters on the LED Monitor Character 7 segment Character 7 segment Character 7 segment Character 7 segment s J WI Ss E N jj eg J 9 A b C d E F G C J M Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time The FRENIC Multi supports simultaneous keying as listed below The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a letter between the keys throughout this manual For example the expression 9 J keys stands for pressing the J key while holding down the key Table 2 3 Simultaneous Keying Operation mode Simultaneous keying Gra A keys Change certain function code data Refer to codes F00 LU H03 H45 and H97 in Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES Programming mode 69 amp keys
389. rol acts to always minimize the deviation even if a commanded value changes or external disturbance steadily occurs However the longer the integral time the slower the system response to quick changed control P action can be used alone for loads with very large part of integral components 2 PD control In PD control the moment that a deviation occurs the control rapidly generates much manipulated value than that generated by D action alone to suppress the deviation increase When the deviation becomes small the behavior of P action becomes small A load including the integral component in the controlled system may oscillate due to the action of the integral component if P action alone is applied In such a case use PD control to reduce the oscillation caused by P action for keeping the system stable That is PD control is applied to a system that does not contain any damping actions in its process 3 PID control PID control is implemented by combining P action with the deviation suppression of I action and the oscillation suppression of D action PID control features minimal control deviation high precision and high stability In particular PID control is effective to a system that has a long response time to the occurrence of deviation Follow the procedure below to set data to PID control function codes It is highly recommended that you adjust the PID control value while monitoring the system response waveform with an
390. rol circuit Control circuit Programmable Programmable logic controller logic controller Current Photocoupler Current R SINK input IY1yIY2 d 24 VDC L CMY SOURCE input a PLC serving as SINK b PLC serving as SOURCE Figure 8 8 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit Relay output 30A B C Alarm relay 1 Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function output has been activated to stop the motor for any error Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5A Any one of output signals assigned to terminals Y1 and Y2 can also be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Between terminals 30A and 30C is closed excited for ON signal output Active ON or Between terminals 30A and 30C is open non excited for ON signal output Active OFF a 2 m Q I S o Z 77 RS 485 communications port Connector Functions Classifi RJ 45 Standard RJ 45 1 Used to connect the inverter with the keypad The inverter connector connector supplies the power to the keypad through the pins specified for the below The extension cable for remote operation also uses ke
391. rol panel where the inverter is used Consideration of peripheral equipment and a full range of protective functions B Side by side mounting saves space If your control panel is designed to use multiple inverters these inverters make it possible to save space through their horizontal side by side installation 5 HP or smaller models ise ses Ses 4 72 120 The 3 phase 230 V 1 HP model is shown here E Unit inch mm 3 15 80 3 15 80 3 15 80 Figure 1 14 1 6 1 1 Features B Resistors for suppressing inrush current are built in making it possible to reduce the capacity of peripheral equipment When FRENIC Multi Series including FRENIC Mini Series FRENIC Eco Series and 11 Series is used the built in resistor suppresses the inrush current generated when the motor starts Therefore it is possible to select peripheral equipment with lower capacity when designing your system than the equipment needed for direct connection to the motor i9 m o 9 B Outside panel cooling is also made possible using the mounting adapter for external cooling option The mounting adapter for external cooling option can be installed easily as an outside panel cooling system This function is standard on 7 5 HP or higher models You can use an inverter equipped with functions like these B New system for more energy efficient operation BInIN OIN34H OL NOILONGOYLNI Previous energy saving op
392. rom this block diagram S codes are communication related function codes Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details Figure 4 1 2 Drive Frequency Command Block Output Stage 4 3 This page is intentionally left blank 4 4 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block Figures 4 1 1 and 4 1 2 show the processes that generate the internal drive frequency command through the various frequency command and switching steps by means of function codes When the PID control is active JO1 1 to 3 the logic differs from that of this block diagram Refer to Section 4 5 PID Process Control Block and Section 4 6 PID Dancer Control Block Additional and supplemental information is given below Frequency command sourcing by the J amp keys operation on the keypad covers various command expression formats such as a load rotational speed and a line speed by specifying data of function code E48 The input terminal natively covers the 10 to 10 VDC analog frequency command The function code C35 allows this terminal to be used as a unipolar input 0 to 10 VDC or a bipolar input 10 to 10 VDC For the unipolar input inserting the O limiter in the following process stage of the terminal input 12 modification of the reference frequency by the bias and gain assures the reference frequency not to always be switched to the negative frequency command causing the reverse rotation of the motor
393. rter checks memory data after power on and when the Er Yes detection data is written If a memory error is detected the inverter stops Keypad The inverter stops by detecting a communications error between Ev Yes communications the inverter and the keypad during operation using the standard error detection keypad or multi function keypad optional CPU error Ifthe inverter detects a CPU error or LSI error caused by noise or Era Yes detection some other factors this function stops the inverter Not applicable 8 31 o 9 m Q N S o Z 77 LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Option Upon detection of an error in the communication between the Ee communications inverter and an optional card stops the inverter output error detection Option error When an option card has detected an error this function stops eus AC detection the inverter output Operation STOP Pressing the 6o key on the keypad forces the inverter Er amp Yes protection key to decelerate and stop the motor even if the inverter is priority running by any run commands given via the terminals or communications link operation After the motor stops the inverter issues alarm A Start The inverter prohibits any run operations and displays Ere Yes check Er amp on the 7 segment LED monitor if any run function command is present when Powering up Analarm is released the
394. s LNAWdINOA 1vesaHdle add ONILOATAS Power supply capacity 500 kVA power supply impedance 5 The current listed in the above table will vary in inverse proportion to the power supply voltage such as 230 VAC and 380 VAC The braking current is always constant independent of braking resistor specifications including built in standard and 10 ED models 6 3 6 2 1 Recommended wires Tables 6 2 and 6 3 list the recommended wires according to the internal temperature of your power control panel B if the internal temperature of your power control panel is 50 C 122 F or below Table 6 2 Wire Size for main circuit power input and inverter output Recommended wire size mm Power Nominal Main circuit power input L1 R L2 S L3 T or L1 L L2 N supply 9PPled inverter type wl DC reactor DCR w o DC reactor DCR Inverter ouput IVa voltage TUE RAE x ERAI Current Uo pre ame Current onasan KEA 08 1 5 3 0 5 0 Three 8 0 phase 11 230v ESSE 2 0 17 75 FRNOO7ETS 2U 5 5 20 20 211 80 35 35 315 55 3 5 20 25 10 FRNOTOETS 2U 8 0 3 5 20 288 140 55 5 5 427 80 35 3 5 33 15 FRNOTSETS 2U 14 0 5 5 5 5 422 22 0 14 0 80 607 140 80 55 47 20 FRNOZOETS 2U 220 140 80 576 380 22 0 140 80 1 22 0 140 80 60 15 2 5 2 FRNOOZETSMU 20 20 20 30 20 20 20 59 20 20 20 37 Three s fenera 20 20
395. s enne ttn nhn ret tn eterni ee tn senes eene tn nnn 4 16 4 7 EM Output Selectot s RENE RR ee HUN RE in 4 19 4 1 Symbols Used in the Block Diagrams and their Meanings FRENIC Multi series of inverters is equipped with a number of function codes to match a variety of motor operations required in your system Refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES for details of the function codes The function codes have functional relationship each other Several special function codes also work with execution priority each other depending on their functions or data settings This chapter explains the main block diagrams for control logic in the inverter You are requested to fully understand the inverter s control logic together with the function codes in order to set the function code data correctly The block diagrams contained in this chapter show only function codes having mutual relationship For the function codes that work independently and for detailed explanation of each function code refer to Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES 4 1 Symbols Used in Block Diagrams and their Meanings Table 4 1 lists symbols commonly used in block diagrams and their meanings with some examples Table 4 1 Symbols and Meanings Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning FWD Y1 etc Digital inputs outputs to from the inverter s control circuit terminal block Function code FWD REV etc Terminal commands assigned to digital inputs outputs fleE Lo
396. s the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip That is this facility is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12 Rated slip frequency P09 Slip compensation gain for driving and P11 Slip compensation gain for braking H68 enables or disables the slip compensation facility according to the motor driving conditions Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone Data for H68 Accl Decel Constant speed Base frequency or Above the base below frequency Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Disable m Dynamic torque vector control To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function and disables auto energy saving operation Using the PG feedback speed control at same time however also disables the slip compensation function This control is effective for improving the system response against external disturbances and the motor speed control accuracy B PG speed feedback control PG interface This control is made available by mounting an optional pulse generator PG interface card It uses the speed feedback
397. s the motor output the unit LED indicator kW blinks 3 2 2 Setting up frequency and PID commands You can set up the desired frequency and PID commands by using and Q keys on the keypad It is also possible to set up the frequency command as load shaft speed motor speed or speed 96 by setting function code E48 E Setting up a frequency command E Using J and V keys Factory default 1 Set function code F01 to 0 N keys on keypad This can be done only when the inverter is in Running mode 2 Press the 3 Q key to display the current reference frequency The lowest digit will blink 3 Ifyou need to change the frequency command press the J amp key again The new setting will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory and retained even when the power is off When the power is turned on next time the setting will be used as an initial reference frequency If you have set function code F01 to 0 9 amp 2 keys on keypad but have selected a frequency command source other than frequency command 1 i e frequency command 2 frequency command via communication or multi frequency command then the N and V keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running mode Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency Tip When you start specifying the reference frequency or any other parameter with the O Okey the least significant digit on
398. s the timing can be done and so mechanical brake wear is reduced 1 3 B Limit operations can be selected to match your equipment Inverters are equipped with two limit operations torque limitation and current limitation so either can be selected to match the equipment you are using the inverter with Torque limitation In order to protect mechanical systems this function accurately limits the torque generated by the motor Instantaneous torque cannot be limited Current limitation This function limits the current flowing to the motor to protect the motor thermally or to provide rough load limitation Instantaneous current cannot be limited Auto tuning is not required Simple and thorough maintenance B The life information on each of the inverter s limited life components is displayed Main circuit capacitor capacity Cumulative running time of the electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board Figure 1 8 Cooling fan cumulative running time compensated by cooling fan ON OFF control Inverter cumulative running time Construction is simple enabling quick removal of the top cover and making it easy to replace the cooling fan 7 5 HP or higher models B Simple cooling fan replacement Cooling fan replacement procedure The cover on top of the Simply disconnect the inverter can be quickly power connector and removed replace the cooling fan Figure 1 9 B Information that con
399. sa Transistor output circuit specifications Control circuit Photocoupler Current 31 to 35 V Figure 8 7 Transistor Output Circuit Item Max Operation ON level 3V voltage OFF level 27V Maximum motor current at ON 50 mA Leakage current at OFF 0 1 mA Figure 8 8 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC Note When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a surge absorbing diode across relay s coil terminals When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the power 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 50 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circuit between the terminals CMY and CM in this case Transistor output common Common terminal for transistor output signal terminals This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM s and 11 s Transistor output 8 3 Terminal Specifications Related Functions function codes M Connecting Programmable Logic Controller PLC to Terminal Y 1 or Y2 Figure 8 8 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example 2 the input circuit of the PLC serves as a SINK for the control circuit output whereas in example b it serves as a SOURCE for the output Photocoupler Cont
400. sable 0 01 to 3600 s Timer operation 0 Disable 1 Enable The time can be specified within the range from 1 to 3600 s in units of 1 s with the X and V keys on the keypad Terminal Y1 Inverter running RUN Frequency level detection FDT Frequency equivalence signal FAR Undervoltage detection signal LU Torque limiting TL Auto restarting Terminal Y 1 function 0 Inverter running RUN 2 Frequency detected FDT 1 Frequency arrival signal FAR 3 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU Inverter output limiting JOL Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF FDT function signal Level 0 to 400 0 Hz Frequency Detection FDT Detection level 0 0 to 400 0 Hz FDT function signal Hysteresis 0 to 30 Hz Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width 0 0 to 10 0 Hz Frequency Detection FDT Hysteresis width 0 0 to 400 0 Hz Terminal THR Function 0 THR function 1 Write enable for keypad A 29 Terminal X5 function 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 19 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP FVR E9S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E9S Jump frequency Hysteresis 0 to 30 Hz Jump frequency Hysteresis 0 0 to 30 0 Hz Jump frequency 1 0 to 400 Hz Jump frequency 1
401. sable 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start Energy saving operation Inactive Active Load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation 1 0 or 1 Refer to F09 3 Equivalent to FVR E11S s F09 being set to 1 or2 4 Equivalent to FVR E11S s F09 being set to any of 3 to 31 Refer to the FVR E11S s F09 DEC mode Normal Coast to stop Deceleration mode 0 Normal deceleration 1 Coast to stop Instantaneous overcurrent limiting Inactive Active 0 1 0 1 Instantaneous overcurrent limiting 0 Disable 1 Enable Auto restart Restart time Freq fall rate 0 1 to 5 0 s 0 00 to 100 0 Hz s Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time Frequency fall rate 0 1 to 5 0 s when H16 999 0 00 to 100 0 Hz s PID control Mode select Feedback signal Feedback filter Inactive Active Active inverse operation mode PID control Mode selection 0 Disable 1 Enable Process control normal operation 2 Enable Process control inverse operation Terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC Terminal 12 extended function 5 PID feedback amount Terminal C1 4 to 20 mA Terminal C1 extended function C1 function 5 PID feedback amount 2 Terminal 12 10 to 0 VDC 3 Termin
402. sary for connection of the inverter to host equipment having no RS 485 communications port such as a PC or for configuring a multi drop connection 1 Communications level converter Most personal computers PC are not equipped with an RS 485 communications port but RS 232C and USB ports To connect a FRENIC Mult inverter to a PC therefore you need to use an RS 232C RS 485 communications level converter or a USB RS 485 interface converter For correct running of the communications facility to support FRENIC Multi series of inverters be sure to use one of the recommended converters listed below Recommended converters KS 485PTI RS 232C RS 485 communications level converter USB 485I RJ45 T4P USB RS 485 interface converter Supplied by SYSTEM SACOM Corporation 2 Requirements for the cable Use an off the shelf IOBASE T LAN cable ANSI TIA EIA 568A category 5 compliant straight type Non The RJ 45 connector has power source pins pins 1 2 7 and 8 exclusively assigned for Note keypads When connecting other devices to the RJ 45 connector take care not to use those pins Failure to do so may cause a short circuit hazard 3 Multi drop adapter To connect a FRENIC Multi inverter to a network in a multi drop configuration with a LAN cable that has RJ 45 as the communications connector use a multi drop adapter for the RJ 45 connector Recommended multi drop adapter Model MS8 BA JJJ made by SK KOHKI Co Ltd Az c
403. se j Natural Time S302 NOILONNA m Feedback filter J06 J06 specifies the time constant of the filter for feedback signals under PID control Data setting range 0 0 to 900 0 s This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop Setting too long a time constant makes the system response slow To specify the filter for feedback signals in detail under PID dancer control apply Not filter time constants for analog input C33 C38 and C43 9 111 J10 J11 J12 J13 PID Control Anti reset windup J10 suppresses overshoot in control with PID processor As long as the deviation between the feedback and the PID command is beyond the preset range the integrator holds its value and does not perform integration operation Data setting range 0 0 to 200 PID feedback PV PID command pre set value SV In this range integration does not take place In this range integration takes place In this range integration does not take place rec en s Time PID Control Select alarm output PID Control Upper level alarm AH PID Control Lower level alarm AL Two types of alarm signals can be output associated with PID control absolute value alarm and deviation alarm You need to assign the PID alarm output PID ALM to one of the digital output terminals function code data 42 m Select alarm output J11 J11 specifies the alarm type The table below lists
404. se since the power line of the motor and the signal line of the PG are bundled together The PLC program sometimes malfunctions Power supply Power supply Possible cause Since the power supply system is the same for the PLC and inverter it is considered that noise enters the PLC through the power supply Continued Noise prevention measures 1 Install an LC filter on the input side of the inverter 2 Connect the shield of the shielded wire of the pressure sensor to the 0 V line common of the pressure sensor changing the original connection 1 Install an LC filter and a capacitive filter at the input side of the inverter 2 Install an LC filter at the output side of the inverter LC filter LC filter 1 Install a capacitive filter and an LC filter on the input side of the inverter 2 Install an LC filter on the output side of the inverter 3 Lower the carrier frequency of the inverter LC filter LC filter Capacitive filter Power PLC supply Signal source A 11 1 The shielded parts of shield wires for sensor signals are connected to a common point in the system Conduction noise from the inverter can be reduced This is an example of a measure where the power line and signal line cannot be separated Induction noise and radiation noise at the output side of the inverter can be reduced Total conduction noise and induction noise in the
405. sis width CO4 Specify the jump frequency hysteresis width Data setting range 0 0 to 30 0 Hz Setting to 0 0 results in no jump frequency band 9 2 Overview of Function Codes C05 to C19 Multi frequency 1 to 15 W These function codes specify 15 frequencies required for driving the motor at frequencies 1 to 15 Turning terminal commands SS J S2 SS4 and SS8 ON OFF selectively switches the reference frequency of the inverter in 15 steps For details of the terminal function assignment refer to the descriptions for function codes E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function Data setting range 0 00 to 400 0 Hz The combination of SS7 SS2 SS4 and SS8 and the selected frequencies are as follows Selected frequency command Other than multi frequency C05 multi frequency 1 C06 multi frequency 2 C07 multi frequency 3 C08 multi frequency 4 C09 multi frequency 5 C10 multi frequency 6 C11 multi frequency 7 C12 multi frequency 8 C13 multi frequency 9 C14 multi frequency 10 C15 multi frequency 11 C16 multi frequency 12 C17 multi frequency 13 C18 multi frequency 14 C19 multi frequency 15 Other than multi frequency includes frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 and other command sources except multi frequency commands To use these features you need to assign multi frequency selecti
406. specified by H27 13 PTC thermistor T M pite Mode selection M H26 1kQ W2 C1 pct PTC l E Comparator o o GHY thermistor 2509 Rp eu Thermistor detection level H27 OV Note To use analog input terminal C1 for the PTC thermistor input turn switches SW7 and SWS on the interface printed circuit board to the specified positions and set E59 data to 0 C1 function For details refer to Setting up the slide switches on page 8 17 Droop Control In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery any speed gap between inverter driven motors results in some load unbalance between motors The droop control allows each inverter to drive the motor with the speed droop characteristics for increasing its load eliminating such kind of load unbalance Speed Output frequency Reference frequency z o Hz Droop characteristics Output frequency xb ur Coe gt Load 100 Motor load torque Note To use droop control be sure to auto tune the inverter for the motor 9 92 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Communications Link Function Mode selection y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Using the RS 485 communications link standard option or field bus option allows you to Issue frequency commands and run commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location as well as monitoring the inverter runn
407. splays 30A B C Overcurrent Stops the inverter output to protect the During fi i Yes protection inverter from an overcurrent resulting from acceleration overload Short circuit Stops the inverter output to protect the protection inverter from overcurrent due to a short circuiting in the output circuit pomum el H3 deceleration Ground fault Stops the inverter output to protect the protection inverter from overcurrent due to a ground During running at 3 fault in the output circuit This protection 1s constant speed effective only during startup of the inverter If you turn ON the inverter without removing the ground fault this protection may not work Overvoltage Stops the inverter output upon detection of During Ui Yes protection an overvoltage condition 400 VDC for acceleration dirse phase 230 V 800 VOC dob um TT P mE During LILIT three phase 460 V in the DC link bus deceleration This protection is not assured if extremely Duri rim uring running at Lita large AC line voltage is applied inadvertentl constant speed CEE stopped Undervoltage Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops LLI Yes 1 protection below the undervoltage level 200 VDC for three phase 230V 400 VDC for three phase 460 V However if data 4 or 5 is selected for F14 no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops Input phase loss Detects input phase loss stopping the inverter output This Loan Yes
408. sse 3 12 3 3 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting sessssssssssssssseseeeneeeeenenen ene 3 16 3 3 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking ssssssseeee 3 17 3 3 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring 3 18 3 3 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking ssesssesseeeeeenenennee 3 21 3 3 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information sss 3 26 3 3 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information essere 3 29 3 4 Alam Mode oie E a PR e eei e e a ts d Oed ea 3 32 3 4 1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode sse 3 32 3 4 2 Displaying the alarm history sss eene enne nennen nennen nnne 3 32 3 4 3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm sese 3 32 3 4 4 Switching to Programming mode sse ener enne A enn 3 32 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes 3 1 Overview of Operation Modes FRENIC Multi features the following three operation modes E Running mode This mode allows you to enter run stop commands in regular operation You can also monitor the running status in real time Bl Programming mode This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance E Alarm mode If an alarm condition arises
409. t Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed General purpose fans and pumps Constant torque load Constant torque load To be selected 1f a motor may be over excited at no load Note If a required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the rated torque it is recommended to select the linear V f pattern factory default 9 18 9 2 Overview of Function Codes B V f characteristics The FRENIC Multi series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which include V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for special pump load requiring high starting torque Two types of torque boost are available manual and automatic Output voltage V Output voltage V 4 Rated voltage 4 Rated voltage 100 100 Torque Output Torque Output boost In ie boost P frequency Base a Base Hz requency frequency 1 F04 F04 Variable torque V f pattern F37 0 Linear V f pattern F37 1 C Tp When the variable torque V f pattern is selected F37 0 or 3 the output voltage may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the motor at a low frequency zone depending on some characteristics of the motor itself and load In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f pattern Recommended value H50 1 10
410. t the use of specific hazardous substances RoHS These inverters are gentle on the environment Use of 6 hazardous substances is limited Products manufactured beginning in the autumn of 2005 will comply with European regulations except for interior soldering in the power module lt Six Hazardous Substances gt Lead Mercury Cadmium Hexavalent Chromium Polybrominated biphenyl PBB Polybrominated diphenyl ether PBDE BInIN OIN34H OL NOILONGOYLNI lt About RoHS gt The Directive 2002 95 EC promulgated by the European Parliament and European Council limits the use of specific hazardous substances included in electrical and electronic devices B Long life design The design life of each internal component with limited life has been extended to 10 years This helps to extend the maintenance cycle for your equipment Limited Life Component Service Life Main circuit capacitors 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on printed circuit boards 10 years Cooling fan 10 years Conditions Ambient temperature is 40 C 104 F and load factor is 80 of the inverter s rated current B Noise is reduced by the built in EMC filter Use of a built in EMC filter that reduces noise generated by the inverter makes it possible to reduce the effect on peripheral equipment Expanded capacity range and abundant model variation B Standard Series Capacity Input power Nominal applied motor HP expanded SY s ya y i 2 3 5
411. tage V Rated voltage at base frequency Output 0 4 frequency Hz Base Maximum frequency frequency The minimum frequency at which an inverter delivers a constant voltage in the output V f pattern Related function codes F04 and A02 Bias A value to be added to an analog input frequency to modify and produce the output frequency Related function codes F18 C50 to C52 Braking torque Torque that acts in a direction that will stop a rotating motor or the force required to stop a running motor Power Inverter Motor During accelerating or running at constant speed Power i Inverter During decelerating If a deceleration time is shorter than the natural stopping time coast to stop determined by a moment of inertia for a load machine then the motor works as a generator when it decelerates causing the kinetic energy of the load to be converted to electrical energy that is returned to the inverter from the motor If this power regenerative power is consumed or accumulated by the inverter the motor generates a braking force called braking torque Carrier frequency Frequency used to establish the modulation period of a pulse width under the PWM control system The higher the carrier frequency the closer the inverter output current approaches a sinusoidal waveform and the quieter the motor becomes Related function code F26 Coast to stop If the inverter stops i
412. tation direction The rotation direction of the motor is specified by specified by terminal terminal command FWD or REV command External signal Enables terminal command FWD or REV to run the motor Keypad Enables fur 6o keys to run and stop the motor Note Forward rotation that this run command enables only the forward rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction Keypad Enables fun 6o keys to run and stop the motor Note Reverse rotation that this run command enables only the reverse rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction On Note When function code F02 0 or 1 the Run forward FWD and Run reverse pe REV terminal commands must be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively When the FWD or REV is ON the F02 data cannot be changed When assigning the FWD or REV to terminal FWD or REV with F02 being set to 1 be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand otherwise the motor may unintentionally rotate In addition to the run command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link are provided Maximum Frequency 1 A01 Maximum Frequency 2 F03 specifies the maximum frequency to limit a reference frequency Specifying the maximum frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches t
413. ted slip frequency Motor 2 Selection P99 Motor 1 Selection Slip Compensation 2 Operating conditions H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 2 H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 1 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 Startup Times of Motor 2 H44 Startup Times of Motor 1 Function codes in this section apply to motor 2 For details about motor 1 and motor 2 refer to the descriptions of E1 to E05 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 MI c z O a O Z Q O Og m Q 9 103 9 2 7 J codes Application functions J01 PID Control Mode selection J02 PID Control Remote command SV J03 PID Control P Gain J04 PID Control I Integral time J05 PID Control D Differential time J06 PID Control Feedback filter In PID control the state of control object is detected by a sensor or similar device and is compared with the commanded value e g temperature control command If there is any deviation between them the PID control operates so as to minimize it Namely it is a closed loop feedback system that matches controlled variable feedback amount PID control expands the application area of the inverter to process control such as flow control pressure control temperature control and speed control such as dancer control If PID control is enabled J01 1 2 or 3 the frequency control of the inverter is
414. ter Mode selection ACC DEC time RT2 RT1 Acceleration Acceleration time time 1 S08 B 07 rha S09 B F05 TQAL_ H70 0 999 Deceleration Deceleration time time 1 l Acceleration time 2 H70 0 00 Deceleration time 2 Overload prevention control Deceleration Overload rate Freeney prevention processo control Cancel if Operation H70 999 analyzer O O Select torque limiter level TL2ITL1 Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for driving Torque limiter 2 Torque limiter Braking H76 Limiting level for driving Torque Calculated limit torque djust Torque limiter 1 aqjuster Limiting level for braking Torque limiter 2 Limiting level for braking Run decision m Torque limiter Braking Automatic deceleration H76 lt Calculated gt Main control torque block Run Limit decision Cancel if Automatic deceleration H69 0 Mode selection Restart mode after momentary power failure ED imj Frequency fall rate 8 Current limit control Current limiter Level F44 C Current limiter Run Output current decision Cancel if Current limiter F43 0 Mode selection E43 1 r Enable Disable Slip compensation operation response time analyzer Calculated torque O Control mode selection 1 Slip compensation 1
415. ter generating loss App C Inverter Generating Loss Generating loss W Power supply Nominal applied motor Inverter type Low carrier High carrier voltage HP frequency frequency 2 kHz 15 kHz 1 8 FRNF12E1S 2U 16 18 1 4 FRNF25E1S 2U 23 27 1 2 FRNFS0E1S 2U 35 39 1 FRNOOIE1S 2U 54 58 2 FRNO02E1S 2U 74 95 RU 3 FRNO03E1S 2U 98 128 5 FRNO0OSEI1S 2U 166 231 7 5 FRN007EI1S 2U 179 232 10 FRNOI1OEI1S 2U 287 364 15 FRNOISEI1S 2U 444 545 20 FRNO20E1S 2U 527 700 1 2 FRNFS0E1S 4U 30 52 1 FRNOOIE1S 4U 40 72 2 FRNO02E1S 4U 57 104 3 FRN003EI1S 4U 79 147 eic ru 5 FRNO0SE1S 4U 121 219 7 5 FRN007E1S 4U 151 283 10 FRNOI0E1S 4U 227 399 15 FRNOI5E1S 40 302 499 20 FRNO020EI1S 4U 332 602 1 8 FRNFI2EIS 7U 16 18 1 4 FRNF2SEIS 7U 23 27 Single phase 1 2 FRNFSOEIS 7U 36 40 230 V 1 FRN001E1S 7U 55 59 2 FRN002E1S 7U 78 100 3 FRN003E1S 7U 105 135 App D Conversion from SI Units All expressions given in Chapter 7 SELECTING OPTIMAL MOTOR AND INVERTER CAPACITIES are based on SI units The International System of Units This section explains how to convert expressions to other units 1 Conversion of units 1 Force 6 Inertia constant 1 kgf 9 8 N J kg m2 moment of inertia 1 N 0 102 kgf GD2 kgm flywheel effect 2 Torque e GD2 4J 1 kgfm 9 8 N m j GD 1 N m 0 102 kgfm 4 3 Wor
416. ter slip compensation Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency F03 A01 Output current Output current RMS of the inverter Twice the inverter rated current Output voltage Output voltage RMS of the inverter 250 V for 230 V 500 V for 460 V Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque Load factor Load factor Equivalent to the indication of the load meter Twice the rated motor load Input power Input power of the inverter Twice the rated output of the inverter PID feedback amount PV Feedback amount under PID control 100 of the feedback amount PG feedback value Feedback value of closed loop control through the PG interface Maximum speed 10096 of the feedback value DC link bus voltage DC link bus voltage of the inverter 500 V for 230 V 1000 V for 460 V Universal AO Command via communications link Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual 20000 as 100 Motor output Motor output kW Twice the rated motor output Calibration Full scale output of the meter calibration This always outputs the full scale 100 PID command SV Command value under PID control 100 of the feedback amount Note PID output MV Output level of the PID controller under PID control Frequency command Maximum frequency F03 A01 If F31 16 PID output
417. terminal block ite 0 10 W x 0 07 H inch 0 24 inch 6 mm 2 51 W x 1 76 H mm Manufacturer of ferrule terminals Phoenix Contact Inc Refer to the table below Table 8 4 Recommended Ferrule Terminals Screw size AWG24 0 25 mm Type With insulated collar AI0 25 6BU Without insulated collar AWG22 0 34 mm AI0 34 6TQ AWG20 0 5 mm AI0 5 6WH 3 5 mm AWG18 0 75 mm AI0 75 6GY Head thickness 0 6 mm AWGI6 1 25 mm AII 5 6BK Screwdriver head style 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment 8 4 1 Operating environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 8 5 Item Site location Table 8 5 Environmental Requirements Specifications Indoors Ambient temperature 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F Note 1 Relative humidity 5 to 95 No condensation Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive gases flammable gas oil mist vapor or water drops Pollution degree 2 IEC60664 1 Note 2 The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Altitude 1000 m max Note 3 Atmospheric pressure 86to 106 kPa Vibration San
418. terminal command determines at the start of operation whether or not to search for idling motor speed and follow it Refer to H09 Starting mode m Force to stop STOP Function code data 30 Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the H56 data Deceleration time for forced stop After the motor stops the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm 4 4 displayed m Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Function code data 33 Turning this terminal command ON resets the integral and differential components of the PID processor m Hold PID integral component PID HLD Function code data 34 Turning this terminal command ON holds the integral components of the PID processor m Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop Tip This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 m Runreverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop Tip This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 9 54 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Acceleration Time 2 F07 Acceleration Time 1 Deceleration Time 2 F08 Deceleration Time 1 Refer to the descriptions of function codes F07 and F08 Torque Limiter 2 Limit
419. tes on trip mode 1 The relay 30 excites on normal mode Terminal 30A B C function 99 Alarm output for any alarm Active ON 1099 Alarm output for any alarm Active OFF Torque limiter 1 Driving Braking 20 to 200 999 No limit 096 Automatic deceleration control 20 to 200 999 No limit Torque limiter 1 Limiting level for driving Limiting level for braking 20 to 200 999 Disable 20 to 200 999 Disable Torque vector control 1 0 Inactive 1 Active A 35 Control mode selection 1 0 Disable V f operation with slip compensation inactive 1 Enable Dynamic torque vector operation E Extension terminal functions FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Func Func tion Name Data setting range tion Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S code code X1 terminal 0 Multistep freq select SS Terminal X1 0 Select multi frequency SS1 function 1 Multistep freq select SS2 function 1 Select multi frequency SS2 E01 2 Multistep freq select SS4 E01 2 Select multi frequency SS4 3 Multistep freq select SS8 3 Select multi frequency SS8 4 ACC DEC time selection RTT 4 Select ACC DEC time RTT X2 terminal 5 3 wire operation stop command HLD Terminal x2 716 Enable 3 wire operation HLD function 6 Coast to stop command BX function T Coastto a stop BX E02 7 Alarm reset R
420. that the signal is recognized at one of the digital input terminals of the FRENIC Multi assign the external alarm THR to any of terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV Connect the assigned terminals to terminals 1 and 2 ofthe braking resistor Upon detection of the warning signal preset detection level 150 C the inverter simultaneously transfers to Alarm mode displays alarm on the LED monitor and shuts down its power output Braking 2 Terminal CM resistor P 1 0 3 Terminal X1 d po ey through X5 apie FWD REV External alarm function THR P Inverter Figure 6 6 Braking Resistor Standard Model and Connection Example Table 6 6 Braking Resistor Standard Model Power Continuous braking Repetitive braking w Resistance 10096 braking torque each cycle is less than 100 s supply Inverter type Type Q ty z voltage Q Discharging Braking time 5 Average allowable Duty cycle capability kWs loss kW ED FRNF12E1S 2U FRNF25E1S 2U DBO 75 2 400 9 i 0 037 ST FRNF50E1S 2U 0 044 22 FRNO001E1S 2U 17 45 0 068 18 Three FRNOO2E1S 2U 34 0 075 10 phase FRNOOSE1S 2U DES ae 33 30 0 077 7 230 V FRNOO5E1S 2U DB3 7 2 33 37 20 0 093 FRNOO7E1S 2U DB5 5 2 20 55 0 138 FRNO10E1S 2U DB7 5 2 15 37 0 188 5 FRNO15E1S 2U DB11 2 10 55 10 0 275 FR
421. the display blinks that is the cursor lies in the least significant digit Holding down the 9 V key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry while the cursor remains in the least significant digit e After the least significant digit blinks by pressing the 9 V key holding down the amp key for more than 1 second moves the cursor from the least significant digit to the most significant digit Further holding it down moves the cursor to the next lower digit This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the data in higher digits By setting function code C30 to 0 N O keys on keypad and selecting frequency command 2 you can also specify or change the frequency command in the same manner using the J V key You can set a reference frequency not only with the frequency Hz but also with other menu items motor speed load shaft speed line speed and constant feeding rate time depending on the setting of function code E48 3 4 5 or 6 as listed in Table 3 1 3 2 Running Mode ll Settings under PID process control To enable the PID process control you need to set function code J01 to 1 or 2 Under the PID control the items that can be specified or checked with and amp keys are different from those under regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 you can
422. the rated current of the Electronic 20 to 135 thermal O L inverter thermal relay for motor overload 1 protection Level for motor 1 Overload detection level Electronic 0 5 to 10 min Electronic 0 5 to 10 0 min thermal O L thermal relay for motor overload 1 protection Thermal time for motor 1 constant Thermal time constant Electronic Electronic 999 Disable thermal O L thermal overload relay protection for braking for braking resistor Inactive Inactive resistor Discharging capability Electronic Functionally equivalent to the FVR E11S s thermal overload function code However the setting protection procedure is different so make the setting for braking appropriate for the applied braking resistor resistor Discharging capability Allowable Active average loss External braking resistor External braking DBOD 4C resistor DBLILI 2C Active Active External braking External braking resistor resistor DBLILI 2C DBLILI 4C External braking resistor MAG LISS A 33 FVR E11S FRENIC Multi Name Data setting range Name Data setting range Equivalent to the setting for FVR E11S Restart mode after momentary power failure Select 0 Inactive immediate inverter trip 1 Inactive inverter trip at recovery 3 Active Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred 4 Active Restart at
423. the surge voltages can be suppressed by reducing the voltage rise time dv dt with the installation of an AC reactor on the output side of the inverter Refer to Figure C 3 1 However if the wiring length becomes long suppressing the peak voltage due to surge voltage may be difficult 2 Output filter Installing a filter on the output side of the inverter allows a peak value of the motor terminal voltage to be reduced Refer to Figure C 3 2 Reactor Commercial power source Commercial power source Inverter Inverter Surge suppressing filter circuit 1 Output reactor 2 Output filter Figure C 3 Method to Suppress Surge Voltage B 4 Regarding existing equipment 1 In case of a motor being driven with 460 V class inverter A survey over the last five years on motor insulation damage due to the surge voltages originating from switching of inverter elements shows that the damage incidence is 0 013 under the surge voltage condition of over 1 100 V and most of the damage occurs several months after commissioning the inverter Therefore there seems to be little probability of occurrence of motor insulation damage after a lapse of several months of commissioning 2 In case of an existing motor driven using a newly installed 460 V class inverter We recommend suppressing the surge voltages with the method of Section C 3 A 14 App C Inverter Generating Loss The table below lists the inver
424. time Lower limit of PID operation PID control process output D Differential time Switch J01 normal Inverse PID control operation Mode selection PID alarm PID ALM PID alarm processor PID control Feedback filter A PID control Select alarm output PID control Upper level alarm AH PID control Lower level alarm AL 1 Takes priority when the same function has been assigned by E61 E62 and E63 Terminal 12 gt Terminal C1 C1 function gt Terminal C1 V2 function 2 For details of the options refer to the instruction manual for each option Note S codes are communication related function codes Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details Figure 4 4 2 PID Process Control Block Output Stage 4 13 UJ r Q A z gt D E S n ui E Q O z Az Q E O O This page is intentionally left blank 4 14 4 5 PID Process Control Block Figures 4 4 1 and 4 4 2 show block diagrams of the PID control block input and output stages respectively when the PID process control is enabled JO1 1 or 2 The logic shown generates the drive frequency command gt according to the PID process command source and PID feedback source PID conditioner and the selected frequency command source for a manual speed command Additional and supplemental information is given below This logic disables settings of the frequency command 2 C3
425. tion Remarks GER 25 to 400 Hz frequency Base frequency 25 to 400 Hz o apf Saring 0 1 to 60 0 Hz Duration 0 0 to 10 0 s zi frequency Carrier frequency 0 75 to 15 kHz o VA Note When the carrier frequency is set at 6 KHz or above it may automatically drop depending upon the ambient temperature or output current to protect the inverter Automatic carrier frequency reduction stop function available Carrier frequency modulation with spread spectrum for noise reduction Accuracy Stability Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C 77 50 F Digital setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F Setting resolution Analog setting 1 3000 of maximum frequency ex 0 02 Hz at 60 Hz 0 04 Hz at 120 Hz Digital setting 0 01 Hz 99 99 Hz or less 0 1 Hz 100 0 Hz or more Link setting Selectable from 2 types 1 20000 of maximum frequency ex 0 003 Hz at 60 Hz 0 006 Hz at 120 Hz 0 01 Hz fixed Control Control method V f control Dynamic torque vector control V f control with sensor when the optional pulse generator PG interface card is installed V f characteristic Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum output frequency 80 to 240 V 230 V The AVR control can be turned ON or OFF Non linear V f setting 2 points Desired voltage 0 to 240 V and frequency 0 to 400 Hz can be set Possible to set output volta
426. tion code X 5 Figure 3 6 Menu Transition in Menu 2 Data Checking Changing F01 F05 and E52 data only Basic kev operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 3 1 Tip To check function codes in Menu 2 Data Checking it is necessary to set function code Tip E52 to 1 Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode For details refer to Bl Selecting menus to display on page 3 12 3 3 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive Monitoring is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running The display items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 10 Figure 3 7 shows the menu transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Power ON X Running mode Programming gt 1 mode GFac List of monitoring items Running status info OO e7 e PE NN 3m S 4950 Output frequency l t eU zs Before slip hez zeseetezem 4 Al To y compensation 3 01 la 59 00 Output frequency em After slip compensation 3 02 1 amp xs bend wy sag Torque limit value Sats p SU Level 2 es Figure 3 7 Menu Transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Basic key operation To monitor the running status on the drive monitor set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the in
427. to 10 VDC output While the terminal is outputting 0 to 10 VDC it is capable to drive up to two meters with 10kQ impedance Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 300 Pulse monitor FMP function Pulse signal is output You can select FMP function with the slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB and change the data of the function code F29 You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31 Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ Pulse duty Approx 50 Pulse rate 25 to 6000 p s Voltage waveform Pulse output waveform o1 v mex FM output circuit 11 Analog common Two common terminals for analog input and output signal terminals These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals CM s and CMY 8 13 UU m Q I S J o Z 77 3 i 3 o H Q n EZ g S E Transistor output 1 Transistor output 2 Functions 1 Various signals such as inverter running speed freq arrival and overload early warning can be assigned to any terminals Y1 and Y2 by setting function code E20 and E21 Refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 2 Overview of Function Codes for details Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 Y2 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 Y2 and CMY is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF 1s 1 in the negative logic system and vice ver
428. torque load Auto Torque Boost Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 9 10 A code continued Code A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A39 A40 A41 A45 A46 Control Mode Selection 2 No of poles Rated capacity Rated curent Auto tuning Online tuning No load current R1 Slip compensation gain for driving Slip compensation response time Slip compensation gain for braking Rated slip frequency Motor 2 Selection Slip Compensation 2 Operating conditions 9 1 Function Code Tables 3 Incre Data Default Refer to Data setting range Unit y i ment k copying setting page V f operation with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector operation V f operation with slip compensation active V f operation with optional PG interface 4 Dynamic torque vector operation with optional PG interface i 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 0 3 or4 0 01 Rated 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 1 0 01 ca
429. tributes to equipment maintenance is displayed In addition to inverter maintenance information data that also take equipment maintenance into consideration are displayed Item Purpose Motor cumulative The actual cumulative running time of the equipment motor the inverter is being running time hr used with is calculated Example of use If the inverter is used to control a fan this information is an indication of the timing for replacing the belt that 1s used on the pulleys Number of starts The number of times the inverter starts and stops can be counted times Example of use The number of equipment starts and stops 1s recorded and so this information can be used as a guideline for parts replacement timing in equipment in which starting and stopping puts a heavy load on the machinery 1 4 1 1 Features B The alarm history records the latest four incidents i9 m o 9 Detailed information can be checked for the four most recent alarms Simple operation simple wiring B A removable keypad is standard equipment The keypad can be easily removed and reset making remote operation possible If the back cover packed with the inverter is installed and a LAN cable is used the keypad can be easily mounted on the equipment s control panel HNN OINJH4 OL NOILONGOYLNI Figure 1 10 W A removable interface board is used The interface board is used as a terminal block for control
430. ts output when the motor is running the motor will coast to a stop due to inertial force Communications link function A feature to control an inverter from external equipment serially linked to the inverter such as a PC or PLC Related function code H30 Constant feeding rate time Time required for an object to move in a constant distance previously defined The faster speed the shorter time and vise versa This facility may be applied to a chemical process that determines a processing time of materials as the speed such as heating cooling drying or infiltration in some constant speed machinery Related function codes E39 and E50 Constant output load A constant output load is characterized by 1 The required torque is in inverse proportion to the load shaft speed 2 An essentially constant power requirement Related function code F37 and A13 Applications Machine tool spindles Required torque x Ib in N m o 25 so as oo a AT a ionem en ef N g g Required power HP kW X c 0 Rotating speed of load machine Constant torque load A constant torque load is characterized by 1 A requirement for an essentially constant torque regardless of the load shaft speed 2 A power requirement that proportion to the load shaft speed Related function code F37 and A13 decreases in Applications Conveyors elevators and carrier machines Required torque Ib in N m te D as i
431. ulated by solving the following equation and is stated in kVA Rated capacity kVA 43 x Rated output voltage V x Rated output current A x10 The rated output voltage is assumed to be 220 V for 230 V equipment and 440 V for 460 V equipment Rated output current A total RMS equivalent to the current that flows through the output terminal under the rated input and output conditions the output voltage current frequency and load factor meet their rated conditions Essentially inverter rated at 200 V covers the current of a 200 V 50 Hz 6 pole motor and inverter rated at 400 V covers the current of a 380 V 50 Hz 4 pole motor Rated output voltage A fundamental wave RMS equivalent to the voltage that is generated across the output terminal when the AC input voltage supply voltage and frequency meet their rated conditions and the output frequency of the inverter equals the base frequency Required power supply capacity The capacity required of a power supply for an inverter This is calculated by solving either of the following equations and is stated in kVA Required power supply capacity kVA 43 x 200 x Input RMS current 200 V 50 Hz or 43 x 220 x Input RMS current 220 V 60 Hz Required power supply capacity kVA 43 x 400 x Input RMS current 400 V 50 Hz or 43 x 440 x Input RMS current 40 V 60 Hz Glossary Running mode One of the three operation modes supported by the inverte
432. unction codes 4 Use the J and amp keys to display the desired function code in this example then press the eS key The data of this function code appears In this example data of appears 5 Change the function code data using the e and V keys In this example press the e key two times to change data to Z 6 Press the amp key to establish the function code data The SALLIE appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example A Pressing the E key instead of the S key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the e key to return to the menu from the function code list Tip Cursor movement You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the e key for 1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings This action is called Cursor movement Power ON Qu Y aoe t Running mode ad A List of function codes Function code data K i1 apice iiia PS l Programming l V mode A a N RE Lorca ie V e lo a RG e N 2 times Z ic k 2 SI we m DAT ae Save data and go to the next function code pa Figure 3 5 Example
433. unts making it possible to apply the inverter to air conditioners The ZVS terminal command can also switch operation between normal and inverse For details of switching between normal and inverse operations refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 Selecting Feedback Terminals For feedback control determine the connection terminal according to the type of the sensor output If the sensor is a current output type use the current input terminal C1 of the inverter f the sensor is a voltage output type use the voltage input terminal 12 of the inverter or switch over the terminal C1 to the voltage input terminal and use it For details refer to the descriptions of E61 through E63 9 105 ile m D bd co S302 NOILONNA Application example Process control The operating range for PID process control is internally controlled as 0 through 100 For the given feedback input determine the operating range to be controlled by means of gain adjustment When the output level of the external sensor is within the range of 1 to 5 V Use terminal 12 since the connection terminal is for voltage input Example Set the gain C32 for analog input adjustment at 20096 in order to make the maximum value 5 V ofthe external sensor s output correspond to 100 Note that the input specification for terminal 12 is 0 to 10 V corresponding to 0 to 100 thus a gain factor of 200 10 V 5 x 100 should be specified
434. up times Ea I N H45 Mock Alarm 0 Disable 9 95 1 Enable Once a mock alarm occurs the data automatically returns to 0 9 99 H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal H48 Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Indication for een capacitors on printed circuit boards 0000 to FFFF H49 Starting Mode Delay time 0 0 to 10 0 s 0 1 9 88 Vida NNUS A RN IS DT EA DR H50 Non linear V f Pattern 1 0 0 Cancel 0 1 Hz 9 16 mme pieno ET P sas H51 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 230 V 1 Y2 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 460 V Ea HRILA Frequency 0 1 to 400 0 H53 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 230 V HRA 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 460 V H54 ACC DEC Time 0 00 to 3600 9 95 Pur eme ureemetem menm A H56 Deceleration Time for Forced Stop 0 00 to 3600 9 96 5 H61 UP DOWN Control 0 0 00 ee ee eee sd TI URN H63 Low Limiter Mode ay o Limit by F16 Frequency limiter Low and continue to run 9 28 1 If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16 Frequency 9 96 limiter Low decelerate to stop the motor H64 Lower limiting frequency 0 0 Depends on F16 Frequency limiter Low Bac SEIS ES 9 96 0 1 to 60 0 9 95 c z O a O z Q O O m on H code continued A Default herer Code Data setting range to s
435. ure abnormally rises then the inverter becomes overloaded so that it reduces the motor speed to lessen the load for continuing operation z Z O o c O d Load state o z 4 O id Inverter temperature m P Output frequency c 0 Time Figure 1 19 Fully compatible with network operation B RS 485 communications connector is standard A connector RJ 45 compatible with RS 485 communication is provided as standard 1 port also used for keypad communication so the inverter can be connected easily using an off the shelf LAN cable 10OBASE T 100BASE TX RJ 45 connector Figure 1 20 1 9 B Complies with optional networks using option cards Available soon Installation of special interface cards option makes it possible to connect to the following networks DeviceNet PROFIBUS DP CC Link B Wiring is easy with the RS 485 communications card optional The RS 485 communications card is available as an option It has a pair of RJ 45 connectors that acts as a transfer port for a multidrop network configuration independently of the communications port RJ 45 provided as standard on the inverter Important points 1 A pair of RJ 45 connectors eliminating the provision of a separate multidrop adaptor 2 Built in terminating resistor eliminating the provision of a separate terminating resistor Figure 1 21 RS 485 Communications Card option Example of configuration with peripheral equipment
436. ure copies the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters The standard keypad does not support this feature The optional multi function keypad supports it with Menu 8 in Programming mode If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given below Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The function code marked with N is not subject to the Verify operation either If necessary set up uncopied code data manually and individually 9 1 B Using negative logic for programmable l O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An active ON signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the normal logic system is fun
437. us 5 C 41 F and it goes OFF when it drops down to the overheat trip 7 temperature minus 8 C 46 F 9 2 Overview of Function Codes W Service life alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board and cooling fan has expired This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not m Reference loss detected REF OFF Function code data 33 This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is in a reference loss state as specified by E65 due to a wire break or a weak connection This signal goes OFF when the operation under the analog input is resumed Refer to the description of E65 m inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is running at the starting frequency or below or the DC braking is in operation m Overload prevention control OLP Function code data 36 This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Refer to the description of H70 W Current detected and Current detected 2 ID an
438. used with any machinery or equipment on which lives depend or with machinery or equipment which could cause serious loss or damage should this product malfunction or fail ensure that appropriate safety devices and or equipment are installed B Precautions for Use In running general purpose motors Driving a 460 V general purpose motor When driving a 460 V general purpose motor with an inverter using extremely long wires damage to the insulation of the motor may occur Use an output circuit filter OFL 1f necessary after checking with the motor manufacturer Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters because of their reinforced insulation Torque characteristics and temperature rise When the inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial power supply In the low speed range the cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor If constant torque is required in the low speed range use a Fuji inverter motor or a motor equipped with an externally powered ventilating fan Vibration When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system Note that operation of a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause abnormal vibration The use of a rubber coupling or vibration proof rubber is recommended Us
439. ut frequency z 4 Eu g c O a O Z O z J m o z a The current running through the motor on the other hand has a fairly smooth alternating current AC waveform shown on the right hand side Current waveform of Figure 1 23 thanks to the inductance of the motor coil The control block section controls the PWM so as to bring this current waveform as close to a sinusoidal waveform as possible MI WLU PWM voltage waveform Current waveform Figure 1 23 Output Voltage and Current Waveform of the Inverter For the reference frequency given in the control block the accelerator decelerator processor calculates the acceleration deceleration rate required by run stop control of the motor and transfers the calculated results to the voltage calculator directly or via the dynamic torque vector flux controller whose output drives the PWM block to switch the power gates The FRENIC Multi series features the dynamic torque vector controller with the flux estimator which is always correcting the magnetic flux phase while monitoring the inverter output current as the feedback This feature allows the inverter to always apply the drive power with an optimal voltage and current and consequently respond to quick load variation or speed change The feature also estimates the generated torque of the motor from the estimated flux data and output current to the motor to improve the motor efficien
440. ved within 2 seconds the inverter begins the restart processing in accordance with the F14 data Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the inverter cancels the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and needs to be started again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay When run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 it is retained inside the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage 4 Undervoltage level Time reserved for restart 131 No power about 0 3 to 0 6 s Gate ON command Gate OFF Ready to run State of the inverter E 2 8 Waiting for run command Run command ON ON A Restart c z O a O Z Q O Og m Q When the power is restored the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run command However if the allowable momentary power failure time H16 elapses after the power failure was recognized even within the 2 seconds the restart time for a run command is
441. vel H61 UP command _p gt _ up UP DOWN p process command from keypad DOWN control command PID process coi oy DOWN oO 2 gt uei DOWN gt control D I O card D I O card 610 communications input terminal option 2 PG card PG card es Gai Bi PID input terminal option ain ee feedback c37_X C39 C51 X C52 amount 3 gt x 4 Gain Bias C44 c51 X C52 OFF if y98 1 3 Standard keypad or H30 4 5 8 Manual speed command 4 5 PID Process Control Block Enable communications link Select multi frequency Cancel PID control via RS 485 or field bus SS1 SS2 HrPiD LE Under PID control Inverter running PID CTL RUN Frequency limiter High Communications link function Bus link function L lo to Mutti l I MultHrequency 1 Multifrequency 2 Multi requency 3 Drive frequen gt Jump x pd equeny frequency ATN F16 Frequency limiter Low Loader link function Select multi frequency SS4 SS8 c08 Multi frequency 4 I Multi frequency 8 l Multi frequency 12 E Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST PID control Anti reset windup Hold PID integral component PID HLD PID control Upper limit of PID process output PID control P Gain PID processor PID control PID control Normal inverse Integral
442. verter on It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the S and amp keys to display Drive Monitoring Z4 a rw 3 Press the e key to proceed to a list of monitoring items e g 7 Liki 4 Use the e and V keys to display the desired monitoring item then press the eS key The running status information for the selected item appears 5 Press the amp 9 key to return to a list of monitoring items Press the amp 9 key again to return to the menu 3 3 Programming Mode LED monitor shows Output frequency Table 3 10 Drive Monitor Display Items Description Output frequency before slip compensation Output frequency Output frequency after slip compensation Output current Output current Output voltage Output voltage Calculated torque Calculated output torque of the motor in Reference frequency Frequency specified by a frequency command ruv LILI Rotational direction Rotational direction being outputted forward reverse stop LOK LLLI Running status Running status in hexadecimal format Refer to Bi Displaying running status on the next page J DX LILI Motor speed 120 Function code P01 Display value Output frequency Hz x For motor 2 read P01 as A15 Load shaft speed Or Line speed Display value Output f
443. w pass filter Features appropriate characteristics by changing the time constant through the function code data Switch controlled by a function code Numbers assigned to the terminals express the function code data Drive frequency command Internal control signal for inverter logic High limiter Limits the upper value by a constant or data set to a function code Enable communications link Switch controlled by a terminal command In the example shown on the left the enable communications link command LE assigned to one of the digital input terminals from X1 to X5 controls the switch Low limiter Limits the lower value by a constant or data set to a function code OR logic In normal logic if any input is ON then C ON Only if all inputs are OFF then C OFF eps 0 Zero limiter Prevents data from dropping to a negative value NOR Not OR logic In normal logic if any input is OFF then C ON If all inputs are ON C OFF Gain multiplier for reference frequencies given by current and or voltage input or for analog output signals C AxB AND logic In normal logic only if A ON and B ON then C ON Otherwise C OFF T F15 F16 er zu B A Cc B Adder for 2 signals or values C A B If B is negative then C A B acting as a subtracter 4 1 NOT logic In normal logic if A ON then B OFF and vice versa UJ r
444. which the initial value of the reference frequency is fixed to 0 00 at the start of the UP DOWN control and the other mode H61 1 in which the reference frequency applied in the previous UP DOWN control applies as the initial value When H61 0 the reference frequency applied by the previous UP DOWN control has been cleared to 0 so at the next restart including powering on use the UP terminal command to accelerate the speed as needed When H61 1 the inverter internally holds the current output frequency set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held frequency at the next restart including powering on Note At the time of restart if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory the inverter saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP DOWN control with the new frequency The previous frequency held will be overwritten by the current one Frequency Frequency saved in internal memory Output frequency ON OFF Run command UP terminal command LL Ele 9 2 Overview of Function Codes Initial frequency for the UP DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched When the frequency command source is switched to the UP DOWN control from other sources the initial frequency for the UP DOWN control is as listed below Frequency command Initial frequency for UP DOWN control Switching command s
445. wing you to reset the alarm Just as for data alarm history and relevant information of those alarms that could occur in running of the inverter the inverter saves mock alarm data enabling you to confirm the mock alarm status To clear the mock alarm data use H97 Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of S key 9 key For details refer to the description of H97 H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor H47 displays the initial value of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Printed Circuit Boards H48 displays the cumulative run time of the capacitors mounted on the printed circuit boards Starting Mode Delay time H09 Starting Mode Auto search For details about the auto search delay time refer to the description of H09 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency F04 Base Frequency 1 F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 ws Non linear V f Pattern 1 Voltage F04 to F06 sm Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency F04 to F06 em Non linear V f Pattern 2 Voltage F04 to F06 For details about the setting of the non linear V f pattern refer to the descriptions of F04 to F06 ACCI DEC Time Jogging operation H54 specifies the common acceleration and deceleration time for jogging operation Data setting range 0 00 to 3600 s LL For details about the jogging operation JOG refer to E01 to E05 that
446. witching the motor to commercial power or for any other Installing an MC purpose ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped i d before you turn the MC on or off Remove a surge killer integrated with the magnetic contactor in the inverter s output secondary circuit Do not turn the magnetic contactor MC in the primary circuit on or off Installing an MC more than once an hour as an inverter failure may result in the primary i circuit If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation use terminal FWD REV signals or the RUN STOP key The electronic thermal feature of the inverter can protect the motor The operation level and the motor type general purpose motor inverter motor should be set For high speed motors or water cooled motors set a small value for the thermal time constant Protecting the Combina motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire a tion with high frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance This peripheral may cause the thermal relay to trip at a current lower than the set value If devices this happens lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter OFL Discontinuance of power factor correcting capacitor Do not connect power factor correcting capacitors to the inverter s primary circuit Use the DC reactor to improve the inverter power factor Do not use power factor correcting capacitors
447. with series connected brake coils Geared motors If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous motor operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation Synchronous motors It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type Contact your Fuji Electric representative for details Single phase motors Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed operation Use three phase motors Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from 10 to 50 C The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may become hot under Environ certain operating conditions so install the inverter on nonflammable Installation mental location material such as metal conditions Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions specified in Chapter 8 Section 8 4 Operating Environment and Storage Environment Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or Installing an residual current operated protective device RCD ground fault circuit MCCB or interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of RCD GFCI each inverter to protect the wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity If a magnetic contactor MC is installed in the inverter s output secondary circuit for s
448. xceeded lower the Wiring carrier frequency or install an output circuit filter OFL fix Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the current value or Wire size rS recommended wire size Do not share one multi core cable in order to connect several inverters with Wire type motors Grounding Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal Select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor ratings listed in DA the standard specifications table for the inverter rivin n r E bur urpose When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration Selecting 8 purp i motor is required select an inverter with one rank larger capacity than the inverter standard Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters capacity for details Driving special Select an inverter that meets the following condition motors Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current Transpor When transporting or storing inverters follow the procedures and select locations that meet the tation and environmental conditions listed in the FRENIC Multi Instruction Manual Chapter 1 Section 1 3 storage Transportation and Section 1 4 Storage Environment How this manual is organized This manual contains Chapters 1 through 9 Appendices and Glossary Part 1 General Information Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TO FRENIC Multi This chapter describes the features and control system of the FRENIC Mu
449. ximum load torque converted to motor shaft N m na Reduction gear efficiency As clarified in the above equation the equivalent moment of inertia becomes J J2 ng by considering the reduction gear efficiency J kg m J2 kgm Ne Pe HHHH Motor shaft moment Moment of inertia of inertia converted to motor shaft Figure 7 9 Load Model Including Reduction gear 3 Calculation of the deceleration time In a load system shown in Figure 7 9 the time needed to stop the motor rotating at a speed of Ny r min is calculated with the following equation Jit A Tlg 2n 0 Nw e pce D TS TM TLeN s 7 11 where J Motor shaft moment of inertia kg m Jo Load shaft moment of inertia converted to motor shaft kg m tw Minimum motor output torque in braking or decelerating motor N m tL Maximum load torque converted to motor shaft N m na Reduction gear efficiency In the above equation generally output torque tw is negative and load torque t is positive So deceleration time becomes shorter 7 1 Selecting Motors and Inverters 7 1 3 3 Heat energy calculation of braking resistor If the inverter brakes the motor the kinetic energy of mechanical load is converted to electric energy to be regenerated into the inverter circuit This regenerative energy is often consumed in so called braking resistors as heat The following explains the braking resistor rating 1 Calculation of regenerative energy In the
450. y Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive or flammable gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa during storage pressure 70 to 106 kPa during transportation Assuming a comparative short time storage e g during transportation or the like 2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Precautions for temporary storage 1 2 3 8 4 2 2 Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed above wrap the inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage If the inverter is to be stored in a high humidity environment put a drying agent such as silica gel in the airtight package described in item 2 Long term storage The long term storage method of the inverter varies largely according to the environment of the storage site General storage methods are described below 1 2 3 The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage However for storage exceeding three months the ambient temperature range should be within the range from 10 to 30 C 14 to 86 F This is to prev
451. y improves carrier machine positioning accuracy Positioning time can be shortened The speed just before positioning is Improves measuring accuracy on a Mese vpn ORE EE scale Figure 1 5 1 2 1 1 Features B Tripless deceleration by automatic deceleration control The inverter controls the energy level generated and the deceleration time and so deceleration stop can be accomplished without tripping due to overvoltage Z Wo E D Run o command ii iw f i400 ms c ERI Rat ite CERE o Rotational EON 4 speed 1500 r min s OV DClink veep SOV Yi i O bus voltage i TE zi I inn ai m Current E A PN N Z Time E Figure 1 6 Optimum for the operations specific to vertical and horizontal conveyance B Hit and stop control is realized more easily Impacts are detected mechanically and not only can the inverter s operation pattern be set on coast to stop or deceleration stop but switching from torque limitation to current limitation and generating a holding torque hit and stop control can be selected making it easy to adjust brake application and release timing 2s 10A Current Rotational y 1 600r min speed Time Figure 1 7 B Inclusion of a brake signal makes it even more convenient At brake release time After the motor operates torque generation is detected and signals are output At brake application time Brake application that matche
452. y does not lead to a decrease in Chote i l the load the overload prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled 9 97 H71 Deceleration Characteristics Setting the H71 data to 1 ON enables forced brake control If regenerative energy produced during the deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip will occur The forced brake control increases the motor energy loss during deceleration increasing the deceleration torque ON ote This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration it has no effect if there is braking load Enabling the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71 H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H69 Automatic Deceleration Mode selection For details about the function of H76 refer to the description of H69 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 1 A41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 2 The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics and or backlash in the machine Modifying the H80 data adjusts the controls in order to suppress such fluctuation However as incorrect setting of this gain may cause larger current fluctuation do not modify the default setting unless it is necessary Data setting range 0 00 to 0 40 Res
453. ypad wires connected to these pins for supplying the keypad power Remove the keypad from the standard RJ 45 connector and connect the RS 485 communications cable to control the inverter through the PC or PLC Programmable Logic Controller Refer to Setting up the slide switches on page 8 17 for setting of the terminating resistor 4 5 VDC g S a fo 2 5 E E S oO GND Terminating RJ 45 connector resistor SW3 RJ 45 connector f pin assignment Figure 8 9 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the standard keypad and multi function keypad so do not use those pins for any other equipment Note Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit The RJ 45 connector pin assignment on the FRENIC Multi series is different from that on the FVR E11S series Do not connect to the keypad of the FVR E11S series of inverter Doing so could damage the internal control circuit 8 16 8 3 Terminal Specifications Setting up the slide switches Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB and interface PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the analog output termin
454. z Az r r O O Switching between normal and inverse operation is only effective for the reference frequency from the analog frequency command input signal terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function Note that the frequency command source set up by using the 9 V key is only valid for normal operation Frequency commands by S01 and S05 for the communications link facility take different command formats as follows SOIL the setting range is 32768 to 432767 where the maximum output frequency is obtained at 120000 S05 the setting range is 0 00 to 655 35 Hz in increments of 0 01 Hz Basically priority level for the command in S01 is higher than that in S05 If a value other than 0 is set in S01 the data set in SO1 will take effect If SO1 is set at 0 data in S05 will take effect Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details The frequency limiter Low F16 helps user select the inverter operation for either the output frequency is held at data of the frequency limiter lower or the inverter decelerates to stop the motor with reference frequency data of 0 by specifying the lower limiter select H63 4 5 4 3 Drive Command Block ZLY Se Z4 pee Z Jojoui 104 sieyop 404 enuey sasn uoneoiunuuuo G9r S 34 0 1949H Sepoo UOUN pojeje1 uoneo unuJuJOO 9Je sepoo S SO 0N uondo uoee 104 Jenuew uononijsul ay oj 19491 suondo y jo sleep J04 Zy
455. z zZ Z 0 X pu O C 0 I Az o A co e Oo O z c zZ S d O z 4 RS 485 Communications Card To equip your inverter with another RS 485 communications port in addition to the standard RS 485 communications port you need to install this optional card Note that you cannot use FRENIC Loader through the optional RS 485 communications port RS 485 Communications Card option For details refer to the RS 485 Communications Card OPC EI RS Installation Manual For more details through Section 5 1 5 refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual 5 5 5 2 1 5 2 Overview of FRENIC Loader FRENIC Loader is a software tool that supports the operation of the inverter via an RS 485 communications link It allows you to remotely run or stop the inverter edit set or manage the function codes monitor key parameters and values during operation as well as monitor the running status including alarm information of the inverters on the RS 485 communications network For details refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual Specifications Name of software Specifications White on black indicates factory default FRENIC Loader Ver 4 0 0 0 or later Remarks Supported inverter FRENIC Multi series FRENIC Eco series FRENIC Mini series Note 1 No of supported inverters Up to 31 Recommended cable 10BASE T cable with RJ 45 connectors compliant with EIA568 CPU Intel Pentiu

User`s Manual - tn incorporated ltd.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents